(NISSAN) Manual de Taller Nissan Note

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC
GI
SECTION MA
EM
CONTENTS LC
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX.........................4 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4 Adjustment .................................................................42
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION............................8 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
FE
Special Service Tool ....................................................8 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................49
Commercial Service Tools ...........................................8 Introduction ................................................................49
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Two Trip Detection Logic ...........................................49 AT
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″.............10 Emission-related Diagnostic Information ...................50
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................65
System of Engine and A/T.........................................10 OBD System Operation Chart ...................................69 PD
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System ..................11 CONSULT-II ...............................................................74
Precautions ................................................................12 Generic Scan Tool (GST) ..........................................85 FA
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Introduction ........................87
SYSTEM.........................................................................14 Introduction ................................................................87
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................14 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................87 RA
System Diagram ........................................................16 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Work Flow...........................89
Engine Control Component Parts Location...............17 Work Flow..................................................................89
Description for Work Flow .........................................90
BR
Vacuum Hose Drawing ..............................................19
System Chart .............................................................20 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - Basic Inspection ................91
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL Basic Inspection.........................................................91 ST
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...............................................21 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - General Description...........97
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .......................21 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Inspection
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ..................................23 Priority Chart..............................................................97 RS
Fail-Safe Chart...........................................................98
Air Conditioning Cut Control......................................24
Symptom Matrix Chart...............................................99
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine BT
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
speed) ........................................................................25
Mode ........................................................................102
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ...........................26
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Description .................................................................26 HA
Mode ........................................................................105
Inspection...................................................................26
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .....................107
Evaporative Emission Line Drawing..........................29 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT EL
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) ..........31 INCIDENT.....................................................................117
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................36 Description ...............................................................117
Description .................................................................36 Common I/I Report Situations .................................117 IDX
Inspection...................................................................36 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................117
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ...................................37 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY........118
Fuel Pressure Release ..............................................37 Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit..................118
Fuel Pressure Check .................................................37 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100..................124
Injector Removal and Installation ..............................38 Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) ................................124
Throttle Opener..........................................................39 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0105..................132
Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment .......40 Absolute Pressure Sensor.......................................132
Direct Ignition System - How to Check Idle TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0110 ..................140
Speed and Ignition Timing.........................................40 Intake Air Temperature Sensor................................140
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115 ..................145 Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS) .........145 (P0171: Bank 1), (P0174: Bank 2) ..........................245
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120..................150 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0172 (B1),
Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................150 P0175 (B2) ...................................................................251
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0125..................161 Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor ...........161 (P0172: Left bank), (P0175: Right bank) ................251
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130 (B1), TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0180..................257
P0150 (B2) ...................................................................166 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor ...............................257
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0130: Bank TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0308....262
1), (P0150: Bank 2) (Circuit) ...................................166 No. 1 - 8 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0131 (B1), Misfire ......................................................................262
P0151 (B2) ...................................................................174 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0325 (B1),
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0131: Bank P0330 (B2) ...................................................................267
1), (P0151: Bank 2) (Lean shift monitoring)............174 Knock Sensor (KS) (P0325: Left bank), (P0330:
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0132 (B1), Right bank) ..............................................................267
P0152 (B2) ...................................................................180 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0335..................270
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0132: Bank Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) ............270
1), (P0152: Bank 2) (Rich Shift Monitoring) ............180 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0340..................275
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133 (B1), Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) .........................275
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0133: Bank EGR Function (Close) .............................................281
1), (P0153: Bank 2) (Response monitoring) ...........187 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0402..................290
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0134 (B1), EGRC-BPT Valve Function .....................................290
P0154 (B2) ...................................................................196 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0420 (B1),
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0134: Bank P0430 (B2) ...................................................................295
1), (P0154: Bank 2) .................................................196 Three Way Catalyst Function (P0420: Left bank),
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0135 (B1), (P0430: Right bank).................................................295
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) (P0135: Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
Bank 1), (P0155: Bank 2)........................................204 (Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) ...........................298
P0157 (B2) ...................................................................210 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) (P0137: Bank Volume Control Valve (Circuit) ................................309
1), (P0157: Bank 2) (Min. Voltage Monitoring)........210 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0446..................315
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0138 (B1), Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
P0158 (B2) ...................................................................218 Control Valve (Circuit)..............................................315
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) (P0138: Bank TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0450..................320
1), (P0158: Bank 2) (Max. Voltage Monitoring).......218 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0139 (B1), Pressure Sensor ......................................................320
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) (P0139: Bank Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
1), (P0159: Bank 2) (Response Monitoring) ...........226 (Gross Leak) ............................................................326
P0160 (B2) ...................................................................233 Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) ..................................335
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) (P0140: Bank TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0505..................340
1), (P0160: Bank 2) (High voltage) .........................233 Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) - Auxiliary Air
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0141 (B1), Control (AAC) Valve ................................................340
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heaters (Rear) Closed Throttle Position Switch...............................346
(P0141: Bank 1), (P0161: Bank 2) ..........................239 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0600, P1605 .....352
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0171 (B1), A/T Communication Line (P0600) and A/T
P0174 (B2) ...................................................................245 Diagnostic Communication Line (P1605) ................352
EC-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0605..................355 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1446..................452
Engine Control Module (ECM) ................................355 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1105 ..................358 Control Valve (Close)...............................................452
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)/Barometric
GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447..................457
Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid Valve................358 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1110 (B1), Purge Flow Monitoring.............................................457 MA
Intake Valve Timing Control (P1110: Left bank), Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent
(P1135: Right bank).................................................367 Control Valve (Open) ...............................................464
EM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1120 ..................375 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1490..................470
Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS)...........375
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)...............470 LC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1125 ..................381
Tandem Throttle Position Sensor ............................381
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve ............................475
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1140 (B1),
P1145 (B2) ...................................................................382
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor
Control Valve/Solenoid Valve (Circuit).....................481
(P1140: Left bank), (P1145: Right bank) .................382 FE
P1168 (B2) ...................................................................388 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge
Closed Loop Control (P1148: Left bank), (P1168: Control Valve/Solenoid Valve ..................................487 AT
Right bank) ..............................................................388 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1706..................494
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1210..................390 Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch ........................494
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABS/TCS C/U PD
Traction Control System (TCS) Signal Circuit.........390
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1220..................393 SIGNAL ........................................................................499
Fuel Pump Control Module (FPCM)........................393 ABS/TCS Control Unit .............................................499 FA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1320..................399 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ECM - ABS/TCS
Ignition Signal ..........................................................399 COMM NG....................................................................500
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1336..................407 ABS/TCS Communication Line ...............................500 RA
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD) TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT .................503
(COG) ......................................................................407 Overheat ..................................................................503
BR
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE
EGRC-solenoid Valve ............................................412 ITEMS...........................................................................515
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1401..................417 Injector .....................................................................515 ST
EGR Temperature Sensor .......................................417 Start Signal ..............................................................521
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1402..................423 Fuel Pump Control...................................................523
EGR Function (Open)..............................................423 Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch .......................527 RS
Electrical Load Signal ..............................................532
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control System
MIL & Data Link Connectors ...................................535 BT
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure).............................432
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........536
General Specifications.............................................536
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................536 HA
Volume Control Valve ..............................................444
When you read wiring diagrams:

I Read GI section, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.
EL
I See EL section, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnoses, read GI section, “HOW TO FOLLOW FLOW CHART IN
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES” and “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL
IDX
INCIDENT”.
EC-3
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
Items DTC*6 Items DTC*6
Reference Reference
(CONSULT-II screen CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen CONSULT-II
ECM*1 page ECM*1 page
terms) GST*2 terms) GST*2
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 0908 EC-161 FPCM/CIRCUIT P1220 1305 EC-393
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 1103 AT-95 FUEL SYS LEAN/BK1 P0171 0115 EC-245
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 1104 AT-100 FUEL SYS LEAN/BK2 P0174 0210 EC-245
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 1105 AT-104 FUEL SYS RICH/BK1 P0172 0114 EC-251
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 1106 AT-108 FUEL SYS RICH/BK2 P0175 0209 EC-251
A/T COMM LINE P0600 0504 EC-352 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 0402 EC-257
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 0804 EC-352 HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0303 EC-166
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 1107 AT-118 HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0409 EC-187
ABS-TCS C/U SIGNAL — 0107 EC-500 HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0410 EC-180
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 0803 EC-132 HO2S1 (B1) P0131 0411 EC-174
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 0401 EC-140 HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0412 EC-196
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 1208 AT-85 HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0413 EC-187
CAM POS SEN/CIR P0340 0101 EC-275 HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0414 EC-180
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 0307 EC-388 HO2S1 (B2) P0151 0415 EC-174
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 0308 EC-388 HO2S1 (B2) P0150 0503 EC-166
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 0203 EC-346 HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0509 EC-196
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 0103 EC-145 HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0901 EC-204
CPS/CIRC (OBD) COG P1336 0905 EC-407 HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 1001 EC-204
CPS/CIRCUIT (OBD) P0335 0802 EC-270 HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0511 EC-210
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0608 EC-262 HO2S2 (B1) P0140 0512 EC-233
CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0601 EC-262 HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0902 EC-239
ECM P0605 0301 EC-355 HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 1002 EC-239
ECM-ABSTCS COMM IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0205 EC-340

— 0404 EC-500
NG
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 0201 EC-399
EGR SYSTEM P0400 0302 EC-281
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P1110 0805 EC-367
EGR SYSTEM P1402 0514 EC-423
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P1135 1301 EC-367
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 0305 EC-417
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 P1140 1303 EC-382
EGRC SOLENOID/V P1400 1005 EC-412
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 P1145 1304 EC-382
EGRC-BPT VALVE P0402 0306 EC-290
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0304 EC-267
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 1207 AT-92
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0330 0212 EC-267
EVAP PURG FLOW/
P1447 0111 EC-457 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 1205 AT-125
MON
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 P0100 0102 EC-124
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 0213 EC-432
MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR P1105 1302 EC-358
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 0705 EC-298
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0701 EC-262
EVAP SYS PRES SEN P0450 0704 EC-320
NATS MALFUNCTION — — EC-69
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0715 EC-326
EC-4
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
Items DTC*6
Reference
(CONSULT-II screen CONSULT-II
ECM*1 page
terms) GST*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED,
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0505 — GI
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED,
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*5 EC-65 MA
MAY BE REQUIRED.
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1203 AT-143
OVER HEAT — 0208 EC-503

EM
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1003 EC-494
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 1101 AT-81 LC

PURG CONT/V & S/V P1493 0312 EC-487
PURG CONT/V S/V P1492 0807 EC-481
PURG VOLUME
P1444 0214 EC-444
CONT/V
PURG VOLUME FE
P0443 1008 EC-309
CONT/V
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 1108 AT-129

AT
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 P0755 1201 AT-133
TACM SW SIGNALS P1210 0106 EC-390
TANDEM TP SEN/CIRC P1125 0110 EC-381

PD
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 1204 AT-114
THRTL POS SEN/

P0120 0403 EC-150
FA
CIRC*3
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 P1705 1206 AT-137
RA
TP SEN2/CIRCUIT P1120 0406 EC-375
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0702 EC-295
TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0703 EC-295 BR

Unable to access ECM — — EC-98
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 0311 EC-475 ST

VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 0801 EC-470
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 P0720 1102 AT-89

RS
VEH SPEED SEN/
P0500 0104 EC-335
CIRC*4
VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 0215 EC-452 BT

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1448 0309 EC-464
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 0903 EC-315 HA

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These
numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012. EL
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor sig-
nal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail- IDX
safe condition at the same time.
*5: While engine is running.
*6: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
NOTE: Regarding Y33 models, “B1” and “BK1” indicates left
bank and “B2” and “BK2” indicates right bank.
EC-5
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*6 Items DTC*6 Items

Reference Reference
CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen
ECM*1 page ECM*1 page
GST*2 terms) GST*2 terms)
— — Unable to access ECM EC-98 P0175 0209 FUEL SYS RICH/BK2 EC-251
— 0107 ABS-TCS C/U SIGNAL EC-500 P0180 0402 FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-257
— 0208 OVER HEAT EC-503 P0300 0701 MULTI CYL MISFIRE EC-262
ECM-ABSTCS COMM P0301 0608 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-262

— 0404 EC-500
NG
P0302 0607 CYL 2 MISFIRE EC-262
— — NATS MALFUNC EC-69
NO DTC IS DETECTED,
No DTC Flashing*5 FURTHER TESTING EC-65
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0305 0604 CYL 5 MISFIRE EC-262
NO DTC IS DETECTED, P0306 0603 CYL 6 MISFIRE EC-262
P0000 0505 FURTHER TESTING —
MAY BE REQUIRED. P0307 0602 CYL 7 MISFIRE EC-262
P0100 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*3 EC-124 P0308 0601 CYL 8 MISFIRE EC-262
P0105 0803 ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC EC-132 P0325 0304 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-267
P0110 0401 AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-140 P0330 0212 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 EC-267
P0115 0103 COOLANT T SEN/CIRC EC-145 P0335 0802 CPS/CIRCUIT (OBD) EC-270
THRTL POS SEN/ P0340 0101 CAM POS SEN/CIR EC-275

P0120 0403 EC-150
CIRC*3 P0400 0302 EGR SYSTEM EC-281
P0125 0908 *COOLAN T SEN/CIRC EC-161 P0402 0306 EGRC-BPT VALVE EC-290
P0130 0303 HO2S1 (B1) EC-166 P0420 0702 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 EC-295
P0131 0411 HO2S1 (B1) EC-174 P0430 0703 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 EC-295
P0132 0410 HO2S1 (B1) EC-180 P0440 0705 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-298
P0133 0409 HO2S1 (B1) EC-187 PURG VOLUME
P0443 1008 EC-309
P0134 0412 HO2S1 (B1) EC-196 CONT/V
P0135 0901 HO2S1 HTR (B1) EC-204 P0446 0903 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-315
P0137 0511 HO2S2 (B1) EC-210 P0450 0704 EVAPO SYS PRES SEN EC-320
P0138 0510 HO2S2 (B1) EC-218 P0455 0715 EVAP GROSS LEAK EC-326
P0139 0707 HO2S2 (B1) EC-226 VEH SPEED SEN/

P0500 0104 EC-335
CIRC*4
P0140 0512 HO2S2 (B1) EC-233
P0505 0205 IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC EC-340
P0141 0902 HO2S2 HTR (B1) EC-239
P0510 0203 CLOSED TP SW/CIRC EC-346
P0150 0503 HO2S1 (B2) EC-166
P0600 0504 A/T COMM LINE EC-352
P0151 0415 HO2S1 (B2) EC-174
P0605 0301 ECM EC-355
P0152 0414 HO2S1 (B2) EC-180
P0705 1101 PNP SW/CIRC AT-81
P0153 0413 HO2S1 (B2) EC-187
P0710 1208 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-85
P0154 0509 HO2S1 (B2) EC-196
P0720 1102 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 AT-89
P0155 1001 HO2S1 HTR (B2) EC-204
P0725 1207 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-92
P0157 0314 HO2S2 (B2) EC-210
P0731 1103 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-95
P0158 0313 HO2S2 (B2) EC-218
P0732 1104 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-100
P0159 0708 HO2S2 (B2) EC-226
P0733 1105 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-104
P0160 0315 HO2S2 (B2) EC-233
P0734 1106 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-108
P0161 1002 HO2S2 HTR (B2) EC-239
P0740 1204 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-114
P0171 0115 FUEL SYS LEAN/BK1 EC-245
P0744 1107 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-118
P0172 0114 FUEL SYS RICH/BK1 EC-251
P0745 1205 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-125
P0174 0210 FUEL SYS LEAN/BK2 EC-245
P0750 1108 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-129
EC-6
DTC*6 Items
Reference
CONSULT-II (CONSULT-II screen
ECM*1 page
GST*2 terms)
P0755 1201 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-133
P1105 1302 MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR EC-358

GI
P1110 0805 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-367
P1120 0406 TP SEN2/CIRCUIT EC-375 MA

P1125 0110 TANDEM TP SEN/CIRC EC-381
P1135 1301 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-367 EM

P1140 1303 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 EC-382
P1145 1304 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 EC-382

LC
P1148 0307 CLOSED LOOP-B1 EC-388
P1168 0308 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-388

P1210 0106 TACM SW SIGNALS EC-390
P1220 1305 FPCM/CIRCUIT EC-393
P1320 0201 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-399 FE

P1336 0905 CPS/CIRC (OBD) COG EC-407
P1400 1005 EGRC SOLENOID/V EC-412 AT

P1401 0305 EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC EC-417
P1402 0514 EGR SYSTEM EC-423

PD
P1440 0213 EVAP SMALL LEAK EC-432
PURG VOLUME
P1444 0214 EC-444
CONT/V FA
P1446 0215 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-452
EVAP PURG FLOW/

P1447 0111
MON
EC-457 RA
P1448 0309 VENT CONTROL VALVE EC-464
P1490 0801 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-470 BR

P1491 0311 VC CUT/V BYPASS/V EC-475
P1492 0807 PURG CONT/V S/V EC-481 ST

P1493 0312 PURG CONT/V & S/V EC-487
P1605 0804 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-352

RS
P1705 1206 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-137
P1706 1003 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-494
P1760 1203 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-143

BT
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These
numbers are controlled by NISSAN. HA
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor sig- EL
nal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-
safe condition at the same time.
*5: While engine is running.
IDX
NOTE: Regarding Y33 models, “B1” and “BK1” indicates left
bank and “B2” and “BK2” indicates right bank.
EC-7
PRECAUTIONS AND PREPARATION
Special Service Tool

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
(J38365-A) Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sen-
Heated oxygen sensor sor
wrench
3/8 drive
NT636 a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
Commercial Service Tools

Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Leak detector Locating the EVAP leak
(J41416)
NT703
EVAP service port adapter Applying positive pressure through EVAP ser-
(J41413-OBD) vice port
NT704
Hose clipper Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the

fuel tank and EVAP canister applied to DTC
P1440 [(EVAP small leak positive pressure)].
NT720
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve open-
ing pressure
NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

perature sensor
NT705
EC-8
Commercial Service Tools (Cont’d)
Tool name
Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use
(J-43897-18) with anti-seize lubricant shown below. GI
(J-43897-12)
a: J-43897-18 18 mm dia. for Zirconia Oxygen
Sensor MA
b: J-43897-12 12 mm dia. for Titania Oxygen
NT778 Sensor
EM
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
(PermatexTM 133AR or tool when reconditioning exhaust system
equivalent meeting MIL threads. LC
specification MIL-A-907)
NT779 FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-9
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to INFINITI Q45 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of front side air bag module (located in the outer side of front
seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring
harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized INFINITI dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses (except satellite sensor and side air bag mod-
ule) covered with yellow insulation tape either just before the harness connectors or for the com-
plete harness are related to the SRS.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

System of Engine and A/T
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect the negative battery terminal before the
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of the related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after the work. The loose (unlocked) connec-
tor will cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure to connect the connector with-
out water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc. in it.)
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
I Be sure to route and clamp the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after the work. The misconnected or disconnected rub-
ber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the EGR system or the fuel injec-
tion system, etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) malfunction information in the ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
EC-10
Engine Fuel & Emission Control System
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF345WA
EC-11
Precautions
I Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
ECM. Because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if
ignition switch is turned off.
SEF289H
I When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten secur-

ing bolt until the gap between the orange indicators dis-
appears.
: 3 - 5 N⋅m (0.3 - 0.5 kg-m, 26 - 43 in-lb)
SEF308Q
I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
SEF291H
I Before replacing ECM, perform ECM input/output signal

inspection and make sure whether ECM functions prop-
erly or not. (See page EC-107.)
MEF040D
I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” or “DTC (Diagnostic
Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. The
“OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” should be a good result if
the repair is completed.
SEF217U
EC-12
Precautions (Cont’d)
I When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
bring the two tester probes into contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
SEF348N
I Regarding model Y33, “B1” indicates the left bank and

“B2” indicates the right bank as shown in the figure. PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF202UB
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-13
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
TEC038M
EC-14
Circuit Diagram (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC782
EC-15
System Diagram
SEF870Z
EC-16
Engine Control Component Parts Location
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF347WA
EC-17
Engine Control Component Parts Location
(Cont’d)
SEF348WA SEF037T
SEF554T SEF038TA
SEF392WA SEF039TA
SEF386X SEF349W
EC-18
Vacuum Hose Drawing
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
SEF208U BR
q
1 Intake air duct to vacuum gallery A q
6 Intake manifold collector to One-way valve
q
2 Fuel pressure regulator to vacuum gallery B q
7 One-way valve to EVAP canister purge control solenoid
ST
q
3 Vacuum gallery A to EGRC-solenoid valve, MAP/BARO valve
switch solenoid valve and EVAP canister purge control q
8 EGRC-BPT valve to EGRC-solenoid valve RS
solenoid valve q
9 Intake manifold collector to MAP/BARO switch solenoid
q
4 Intake manifold collector to EGRC-solenoid valve valve
BT
q
5 EVAP canister purge control valve to EVAP canister purge q
10 Absolute pressure sensor to MAP/BARO switch solenoid
control solenoid valve valve
Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-16, for vacuum control system.

HA
Note: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses. EL
IDX
EC-19
System Chart
Camshaft position sensor E
Fuel injection &
mixture ratio control E Injectors
Mass air flow sensor E
Engine coolant temperature sensor E

Electronic ignition system E Power transistor
Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) E
Idle air control system E IACV-AAC valve

Ignition switch E
Throttle position sensor E Intake valve timing control

Intake valve timing control E solenoid valve
*4
E
Closed throttle position switch
EGR control E EGRC-solenoid valve
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch (TCM) E
Fuel pump relay and

Vehicle speed sensor E Fuel pump control E Fuel pump control module
Air conditioner switch E

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Malfunction indicator lamp
monitor & on board diagnostic E (On the instrument panel)
Knock sensor E system
ECM
Battery voltage E
Acceleration cut control E Air conditioner relay
Electrical load E
I EVAP canister purge volume

Intake air temperature sensor E EVAP canister purge flow con- control valve
trol E I EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve
*1
I EGR temperature sensor
I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
I Intake valve timing control position sensor
I Absolute pressure sensor E Heated oxygen sensors 1 & 2 Heated oxygen sensors 1 & 2
E heaters (front and rear)
I EVAP control system pressure sensor heaters (front and rear) control
I Fuel tank temperature sensor
Heated oxygen sensors 2 (rear)*3 Cooling fan control E Cooling fan relay
E
TCM (Transmission Control Module)*2 E

I EVAP canister vent control
valve
Power steering oil pressure switch E I Vacuum cut valve bypass
valve
E I MAP/BARO switch solenoid
valve
Secondary throttle position sensor TAC
E module E
TCS signal E
*1: These sensors are not used to control the engine system. They are used only for the on board diagnosis.
*2: The DTC related to A/T and gear position will be sent to ECM.
*3: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*4: This switch will operate in place of the throttle position sensor to control EVAP parts if the sensor malfunctions.
EC-20
ENGINE AND EMISSION BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL LINE
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed and piston position
E
GI
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
E
MA
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
E
EM
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
E
Throttle position LC
Throttle position sensor E
Throttle valve idle position
PNP switch (TCM) Park/Neutral position

E ECM E Injector
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed FE

E
Ignition switch Start signal AT

E
Battery Battery voltage

E PD
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)* Density of oxygen in exhaust gas

E FA
Secondary throttle position TAC Secondary throttle valve opening angle
sensor E module E RA
*: Under normal conditions, this sensor is not used to control the engine system. BR
BASIC MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION

INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION ST
SYSTEM
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is The amount of fuel injected is compensated for to
determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the improve engine performance. This will be made RS
length of time the valve remains open (injection under various operating conditions as listed below.
pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a <Fuel increase>
I During warm-up BT
program value in the ECM memory. The program
I When starting the engine
value is preset by engine operating conditions. I During acceleration
These conditions are determined by input signals I Hot-engine operation HA
(for engine speed and intake air) from both the cam- I When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D”
shaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor. I High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease> EL
I During deceleration
I During high speed operation
I Extremely high engine coolant temperature IDX
I During TCS operation
I During high engine speed operation
EC-21
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mix-
ture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three way cata-
lyst can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This sys-
tem uses a heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) in the exhaust manifold
to monitor if the engine is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the injec-
tion pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more
information about heated oxygen sensors 1 (front), refer to pages
EC-166. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichio-
metric (ideal air-fuel mixture).
SEF973Z This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensors 2 (rear) is located downstream of the three
way catalyst. Even if the switching characteristics of the heated
oxygen sensors 1 (front) shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to sto-
ichiometric by the signal from the heated oxygen sensors 2 (rear).
OPEN LOOP CONTROL

The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects
any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops in order to
maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
I Deceleration and acceleration
I High-load, high-speed operation
I Malfunction of heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) or its circuit
I Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) at low
engine coolant temperature
I High-engine coolant temperature
I During warm-up
I When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL

The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture
ratio signal transmitted from the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls
the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical mixture ratio as
possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily con-
trolled as originally designed. Both Manufacturing differences (i.e.
mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during
operation (i.e. injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mix-
ture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then computed in
terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for
the difference between the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared
against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes short-term
fuel trim and long-term fuel trim.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to
maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The signal from
the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) indicates whether the mixture
ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical value. The sig-
nal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is
rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-
term to compensate for continual deviation of the short-term fuel
trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to indi-
vidual engine differences, wear over time and changes in the usage
environment.
EC-22
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System (Cont’d)
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential multiport fuel injection system
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle accord-
ing to the firing order. This system is used when the engine is run- GI
ning.
Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each
MA
engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same width are
simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. EM
The six injectors will then receive the signals two times for each
engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the LC
fail-safe mode (CPU) or crankshaft position sensor (REF) is oper-
ating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of FE
the engine at excessively high speeds.
AT
MEF404E
Electronic Ignition (EI) System PD

FA
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed and piston position
E
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air RA

E
Engine coolant temperature

Engine coolant temperature sensor
E BR
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve idle position
E
ST
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
E
ECM E
Power RS
Ignition switch Start signal transistor
E
Knock sensor Engine knocking BT

E
PNP switch (TCM) Park/Neutral position

E HA
Battery Battery voltage
E
EL
Secondary throttle position TAC Throttle position
E
sensor E module (Secondary throttle position sensor)
IDX
EC-23
Electronic Ignition (EI) System (Cont’d)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best
air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine.
The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the
map shown below.
The ECM detects information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Responding to this information,
ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g. N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
SEF742M During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
1 At starting
2 During warm-up
3 At idle
4 Hot engine operation
5 At acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies.
The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-knocking
zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard
system does not operate under normal driving conditions.
If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition
timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal

E
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle

E
Engine speed Air condi-

Camshaft position sensor
E ECM E tioner
relay
Ignition switch Start signal
E
Secondary throttle position TAC Secondary throttle valve opening angle

sensor E module E
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air
conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is
turned off.
I When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
I When cranking the engine.
I At high engine speeds.
I After a few seconds when the TCS has started
operating.
EC-24
Fuel Cut Control (at no load & high engine

speed)
Vehicle speed GI
Vehicle speed sensor E
PNP switch (TCM)

Park/Neutral position
E
MA
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor E ECM E Injectors EM
Engine coolant temperature sensor E
LC
Engine speed and piston position
If the engine speed is above 1,400 rpm with no load (for example,
in neutral and engine speed over 1,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after
some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on FE
engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,000 rpm,
then fuel cut is cancelled. AT
NOTE:
This function is different than deceleration control listed PD
under multiport fuel injection on EC-21.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-25
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Description
SEF523Y
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons

emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This reduction
of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the
EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canis-
ter which contains activated carbon. This is where the vapor is
stored when the engine is not operating.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air flowing through
the EVAP canister purge volume control valve which is controlled
by engine control module. When the engine operates, the flow rate
of vapor controlled by the EVAP canister purge volume control
valve is proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
The EVAP canister purge control valve shuts off the vapor purge
line during decelerating and idling; under normal operating condi-
tions the valve is usually open.
Inspection
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Pinch the fresh air hose.
2. Blow air into port qA and check that it flows freely out of port
qB .
SEF210U
EC-26
Inspection (Cont’d)
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly between EVAP can-
ister and EVAP vent control valve.
GI
MA
SEF231SA EM
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (Built into fuel
filler cap) LC
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure:
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90
psi)
Vacuum: FE
−6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to
−0.48 psi)
SEF427N 3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly. AT
CAUTION:
Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incor- PD
rect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
FA
RA
BR
SEF943S
EVAP CANISTER PURGE CONTROL VALVE ST

Refer to EC-488.
VACUUM CUT VALVE AND VACUUM CUT VALVE RS

BYPASS VALVE
Refer to EC-475.
BT
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE
VOLUME CONTROL VALVE HA
Refer to EC-444.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE EL

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-488. IDX
FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-257.
EC-27
Inspection (Cont’d)
EVAP SERVICE PORT
Positive pressure is delivered to the EVAP system through the
EVAP service port. If fuel vapor leakage in the EVAP system
occurs, use a leak detector to locate the leak.
SEF462UA
HOW TO DETECT FUEL VAPOR LEAKAGE

CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air or a high pressure pump.
I Do not start engine.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
I Improper installation of adapter to the service port may
cause a leak.
1. Attach the EVAP service port adapter securely to the
SEF200U EVAP SERVICE port.
2. Also attach the pressure pump and hose.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Select the “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE” of “WORK SUP-
PORT MODE” with CONSULT-II.
5. Touch “START”. A bar graph (Pressure indicating dis-
play) will appear on the screen.
6. Apply positive pressure to the EVAP system until the
pressure indicator reaches the middle of the bar graph.
7. Remove adapter and hose with pressure pump.
8. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “Evapo-
rative Emission Line Drawing”, EC-29.
PEF658U
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Attach the adapter securely to the EVAP service port
and pressure pump with pressure gauge to the EVAP
service port.
2. Apply battery voltage to between the terminals of both
EVAP canister vent control valve and vacuum cut valve
bypass valve to make a closed EVAP system.
3. To locate the leak, deliver positive pressure to the EVAP
system until pressure gauge points reach 1.38 to 2.76
kPa (0.014 to 0.028 kg/cm2, 0.2 to 0.4 psi).
4. Remove adapter and hose with pressure pump.
SEF598U
5. Locate the leak using a leak detector. Refer to “Evapo-
rative Emission Line Drawing”, EC-29.
SEF599U
EC-28
Evaporative Emission Line Drawing
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF211U
Note: Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hoses or purge hoses.
EL
IDX
EC-29
Evaporative Emission Line Drawing (Cont’d)
SEF369U
EC-30
On Board Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
SEF206V
From the beginning of refueling, the fuel tank pressure goes up. When the pressure reaches the setting value PD
of the refueling control valve (RCV) opening pressure, the RCV is opened. After RCV opens, the air and vapor
inside the fuel tank go through refueling EVAP vapor cut valve, RCV and refueling vapor line to the EVAP
canister. The vapor is absorbed by the EVAP canister and the air is released to the atmosphere. FA
When the refueling has reached the full level of the fuel tank, the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve is closed
and refueling is stopped because of auto shut-off. The vapor which was absorbed by the EVAP canister is
purged during driving.
RA
The RCV is always closed during driving and the evaporative emission control system is operated the same
as conventional system. BR
WARNING:
When conducting inspections below, be sure to observe the following:
I Put a “CAUTION: INFLAMMABLE” sign in workshop. ST
I Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from work area.
I Be sure to furnish the workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
CAUTION: RS
I Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
a. Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put lid on securely.
b. Release fuel pressure from fuel line. Refer to “Fuel Pressure Release”, EC-37. BT
c. Disconnect battery ground cable.
I Always replace O-ring when the fuel gauge retainer is removed.
I Do not kink or twist hose and tube when they are installed. HA
I Do not tighten hose and clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
I After installation, run engine and check for fuel leaks at connection.
I Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. EL
I Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
IDX
EC-31
(Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
SYMPTOM: Fuel odor from EVAP canister is strong.
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP canister.
E
(EVAP canister).
Check EVAP canister for water.
Weigh the EVAP canister with vent control
valve attached.
If the weight is:
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK
If OK, check that water drains from the
canister.
Water should not drain from the EVAP
canister.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace refueling EVAP
E
(Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve). vapor cut valve with fuel
Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for tank.
open.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”,
EC-34.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace refueling control
E
(Refueling control valve). valve with fuel tank.
Check refueling control valve diaphragm
for damage. Blow air into hose end q A,
and check that there is no air flow. Refer
to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-34.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-32
(Cont’d)
SYMPTOM: Cannot refuel/Fuel odor from the fuel filler open-
ing is strong while refueling.
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace water separator or MA
(Water separator and EVAP canister). EVAP canister.
1. Check water separator for insect nests
or debris. Refer to “COMPONENT
INSPECTION”, EC-441.
EM
2. Weigh the EVAP canister with vent con-
trol valve attached.
If the weight is: LC
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG
If OK, check that water drains from the
canister.
Water should not drain from the
EVAP canister.
FE
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Repair or replace hoses AT
(Vent hoses and vent tubes). and tubes.
Check hoses and tubes between EVAP
canister and refueling control valve for
clogging, kink, looseness and improper PD
connection.
H
OK FA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace filler neck tube.
(Filler neck tube).
Check signal line and recirculation line for
RA
clogging, dents and cracks.
OK BR
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace refueling control
(Refueling control valve). valve with fuel tank.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on
ST
next page.
OK RS
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace fuel tank with
(Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve). refueling EVAP vapor cut BT
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on valve.
next page.
OK HA
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace fuel filler tube or
(Fuel filler tube). replace one-way fuel valve EL
1. Check filler neck tube and hose con- with fuel tank.
nected to the fuel tank for clogging,
dents and cracks.
2. Check one-way fuel valve for clogging. IDX
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”
on next page.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-33
(Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Refueling control valve
Check refueling control valve as follows:
1. Remove fuel filler cap.
2. Check air continuity between hose ends q A and q B .
Blow air into the hose end q B . Air should flow freely into the fuel tank.
3. Blow air into hose end q A and check there is no leakage.
4. Apply pressure to both hose ends q A and q B [20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg)] using a pressure pump and
a suitable 3-way connector. And check there is no leakage.
If NG, replace refueling control valve with fuel tank.
SEF816X
Refueling EVAP vapor cut valve

1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to “FUEL SYSTEM” in FE section.
Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge
retainer.
b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one side to fuel gauge
retainer where the hose was removed and the other
side to a fuel container.
c. Drain fuel using “FUEL PUMP RELAY” in “ACTIVE
TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF817X --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer.
b. Drain fuel from the tank using a hand pump into a fuel
container.
2. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close
as follows.
Blow air into the refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from hose
end q B ), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
3. Check EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follow-
ing.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose ends q A and q B using a suit-
able 3-way connector.
b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
EC-34
(Cont’d)
c. Put fuel tank upside down.
d. Apply vacuum pressure to both hose ends q A and q B [−13.3
kPa (−100 mmHg, −3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer
remaining open and check that the pressure is applicable. GI
If NG, replace refueling EVAP vapor cut valve with fuel tank.
MA
EM
One-way fuel valve
1. Drain fuel from the tank. LC
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” of refueling EVAP
vapor cut valve on previous page.
2. Remove fuel filler tube and hose.
3. Check one-way fuel valve for operation as follows.
When pushing with finger, the valve should open; when finger
is released, the valve should shut. FE
Do not drop any material into the tank.
If NG, replace one-way fuel valve with fuel tank. AT
SEF818X
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-35
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
This system returns blow-by gas to both the intake The ventilating air is then drawn from the air cleaner,
manifold and air cleaner. through the hose connecting air cleaner to rocker
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is cover, into the crankcase.
provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is
intake manifold. insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the valve, and its flow goes through the hose connection
intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the in the reverse direction.
PCV valve. On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by some
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to of the flow will go through the hose connection to the
handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilat- air cleaner under all conditions.
ing air.
SEF110T
Inspection
PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove ventilation hose from PCV
valve; if valve is working properly, a hissing noise will be heard as
air passes through it and a strong vacuum should be felt immedi-
ately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
SEF244Q
PCV HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any
hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
ET277
EC-36
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
Fuel Pressure Release

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel
line to eliminate danger.
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK GI
SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
(Touch “START” and after engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure.) MA
3. Turn ignition switch off.
SEF394X EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. LC
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release
all fuel pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch off and reconnect fuel pump fuse.
FE
SEF111T
AT
Fuel Pressure Check

PD
I When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
I Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent
parts. FA
I Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
I Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero, refer to previous page. RA
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine
side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube. BR
SEF112T 4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. ST
At idling:
Approximately 235 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
A few seconds after ignition switch is turned OFF to RS
ON:
Approximately 294 kPa (3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
6. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum BT
hose from intake manifold.
7. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
8. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator. HA
SEF718B
9. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as EL

vacuum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator. IDX
SEF114T
EC-37
Injector Removal and Installation
SEF113T
1. Release fuel pressure to zero, refer to previous page.

2. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM section (“TIM-
ING CHAIN”).
3. Disconnect vacuum hose from pressure regulator.
4. Disconnect fuel hoses from fuel tube assembly.
I Do not disassemble fuel tube assembly.
5. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
6. Remove injectors with fuel tube assembly.
I Push injector tail piece.
I Do not pull on the connector.
SEF245QB 7. Push out any malfunctioning injector from fuel tube assembly.
8. Replace or clean injector as necessary.
9. Install injector to fuel tube assembly.
I Always replace O-rings with new ones.
I Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
10. Install injectors with fuel tube assembly to intake manifold.
Tighten in numerical order shown in the figure.
a) First, tighten all bolts to 9.3 to 10.8 N⋅m (0.95 to 1.1 kg-m, 6.9
to 8.0 ft-lb).
b) Then, tighten all bolts to 21 to 26 N⋅m (2.1 to 2.7 kg-m, 15 to
20 ft-lb).
11. Install fuel hoses to fuel tube assembly.
12. Reinstall any parts removed in reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel hose to injector and fuel tube
assembly, check connection for fuel leakage.
EC-38
Throttle Opener
INSPECTION
1. Start engine and let it idle.
2. Confirm the amount of the rod moves “L” more than 1.65 mm
(0.0650 in), the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the GI
throttle opener.
If NG, go to next step.
If OK, inspection is end.
MA
SEF910X EM
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
4. Check vacuum source to throttle opener. LC
a. Check vacuum hose for disconnection or improper connection.
b. Remove vacuum hose connected to throttle opener.
c. Attach a vacuum gauge to vacuum hose, which is discon-
nected.
d. Start engine and let it idle.
e. Make sure that the vacuum is more than −40.0 kPa (−300 FE
mmHg, −11.81 inHg).
f. Remove the vacuum gauge from intake manifold.
SEF109L
If NG, go to next step. AT
If OK, go to step 7.
5. Check vacuum hose for clogging and cracks.
If NG, replace or clean vacuum hose. PD
If OK, go to next step.
6. Blow air into the intake manifold and make sure air flows freely.
If NG, replace or clean intake manifold. FA
RA
BR
SEF368U
7. Check throttle opener. ST

a. Connect suitable vacuum hose to vacuum pump as shown at
left.
b. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 RS
inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the
throttle opener.
c. Confirm the amount of the rod moves more than 1.65 mm BT
(0.0650 in), and also the throttle drum becomes free from the
rod of the throttle opener.
If NG, go to next step. HA
8. Check visually for cracking and/or distortion of throttle opener
SEF793W
and rod.
If NG, replace throttle opener. EL
If OK, install the vacuum hose and repeat from step 1 to 2.
IDX
EC-39
Fast Idle Cam (FIC) Inspection and Adjustment

1. Remove throttle body from engine.
2. Wait for at least 3 hours.
(This step is necessary to bring the temperature of the thermo-
element to the room temperature
3. Measure thermo-element stroke (L) and room temperature.

4. Check thermo-element stroke (L) as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not adjust TAS.
L: Thermo-element stroke Judgement

Thermo-element is normal , Adjust
Within oblique line
FI cam (go to step 5).
Replace thermo-element , Adjust FI
Out of oblique line
cam (go to step 2).
SEF292TA
5. Measure clearance between stopper and throttle adjusting

screw (TAS) as shown in the figure. If out of specification,
adjust the clearance using adjusting screw.
CAUTION:
Do not adjust throttle adjusting screw (TAS).
6. After adjustment, tighten lock nut of adjusting screw.
: 1.5 - 2.0 N⋅m (0.15 - 0.2 kg-m, 13.0 - 17.4 in-lb)
7. Reinstall throttle body.
8. After warming up engine, check that there is a clearance
between FI cam and roller.
SEF293T
SEF294T
Direct Ignition System — How to Check Idle

Speed and Ignition Timing
IDLE SPEED
I Method A (Using CONSULT-II)
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF392X
EC-40
Direct Ignition System — How to Check Idle
Speed and Ignition Timing (Cont’d)
I Method B (Using check connector)
Check the idle speed using check connector as shown in the fig-
ure. (Check connector is located in the harness protector).
GI
MA
SEF553T EM
IGNITION TIMING
Any of the following two methods may be used. LC
I Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
FE
SEF295T
AT
I Method B
1. Remove intake air duct.
PD
2. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
FA
RA
BR
SEF296T
3. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable ST
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to
this wire.
4. Install air duct. RS
5. Check ignition timing.
BT
HA
SEF297T
EL
IDX
SEF011V
EC-41
Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

Adjustment
PREPARATION I On air conditioner equipped models, checks
I Make sure that the following parts are in should be carried out while the air condi-
good order. tioner is “OFF”.
(1) Battery I When checking idle speed, ignition timing
(2) Ignition system and mixture ratio of A/T models, shift lever to
(3) Engine oil and coolant levels “N” position.
(4) Fuses I When measuring “CO” percentage, insert
(5) ECM harness connector probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
(6) Vacuum hoses I Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear win-
(7) Air intake system dow defogger.
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.) I Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
(8) Fuel pressure I Make the check after the cooling fan has
(9) Engine compression stopped.
(10) EGR valve operation
(11) Throttle valve
(12) EVAP system
Overall inspection sequence

INSPECTION START
H
Perform diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results). NG Repair or replace.
E
OK
H H
Check & adjust ignition timing.
G
OK
NG
H
Check & adjust idle
speed.
OK
F
H
NG Check harnesses of OK Check CO%. NG
E E E
heated oxygen sensors 1
(front). OK
Check function of heated
oxygen sensors 1 (front). NG
H Check emission control
H
parts and repair or
Repair or replace har- replace if necessary.
F
ness(es).
OK I Replace heated oxygen NG
sensor 1 (front). E
I Check function of
H heated oxygen sensor
INSPECTION END OK 1 (front).
F
EC-42
Adjustment (Cont’d)
START
H
Visually check the following: GI
I Air cleaner clogging
I Hoses and ducts for leaks
I EGR valve operation
I Electrical connectors MA
I Gasket
I Throttle position
SEF246F EM
H
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge and ensure that engine LC
speed is below 1,000 rpm.
H
Open engine hood and run engine at about 2,000 rpm for
about 2 minutes under no-load.
FE
H
SEF247F
Perform diagnostic test mode II (Self-diagnostic results). AT
OK NG
H
Repair or replace components as necessary. PD
H H
Does engine run smoothly? FA
OK NG
H
F Clean injectors. RA
H
Race engine two or three times under no-load, then run F q
B BR
SEF217U
engine at idle speed.
H ST
1. Turn off engine and disconnect
throttle position sensor harness con-
nector.
2. Start engine.
RS
H BT
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15°±2° BTDC (in “N” position) HA
SEF248F OK NG
H
Adjust ignition timing by turning camshaft EL
position sensor after loosening securing bolts
which secures camshaft position sensor.
H
H
IDX
q
A
Connect throttle position sensor harness Eq
B
connector.
SEF212U
EC-43
q
A
H
Connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
H
Check target idle speed.
SEF043T
-
---
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check idle speed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
650±50 rpm (in “N” position)
OK NG
H
Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector.
SEF392X
H
Adjust base idle speed by turning idle speed adjusting screw.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
600±25 rpm (in “N” position)
H
1) Connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
2) Erase diagnostic trouble code, EC-67.
H H
SEF212U q
B
Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for
about 2 minutes under no-load. F q
H
H
q
D
SEF115T
SEF247F
EC-44
q
D
H
Set on board diagnostic system of ECM to Diagnostic Test Mode II
GI
(Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).*
MA
H
Monitor does not fluc-
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) signal.
SEF957D
1) See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and (B2) (left
tuate. Malfunction EM
indicator lamp does
and right sides)” in “Data monitor” mode.
not blink.
2) Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under
no-load (engine is warmed up LC
sufficiently.), check that the monitor fluc-
tuates between “LEAN” and “RICH”
more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
1 cycle: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 cycles: RICH → LEAN → RICH → H
LEAN → RICH qF
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FE
Make sure that malfunction indicator lamp
goes on and off more than 5 times during
10 seconds at 2,000 rpm.
SEC042C
AT
OK Less than 5 times
H
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1). F q
J PD
F q
E
OK
H
NG
FA
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) signal.
F
1) See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and (B2) (right
and left sides)” in “Data monitor” mode.
RA
no-load (engine is warmed up
H
q
K
tuates between “LEAN” and “RICH” BR
SEF217U more than 5 times during 10 seconds.
2 cycles: RICH → LEAN → RICH →
LEAN → RICH ST
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
goes on and off more than 5 times during RS
H
q
L
BT
HA
*: If the battery is weak, heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor may not function
properly. Use this function after fully charging battery.
EL
IDX
EC-45
q
L
H
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) signal. Monitor does not fluc-
1) See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and (B2) (left tuate.
and right sides)” in “Data monitor” mode. Malfunction indicator
2) Maintaining engine at 2,000 rpm under lamp does not blink.
SEC042C
H
LEAN → RICH q
C
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OK
H Less than 5 times

SEF217U
END
H
Replace heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B2). q
E
G
H
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B2) signal. NG
1) See “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) and (B2) (left
and right sides)” in “Data monitor” mode.
LEAN → RICH
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OK
H
END
EC-46
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B2) harness:

F q
C
1) Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable
GI
2) Disconnect ECM harness connector from ECM.
3) Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B2) harness connec-
tor. MA
4) Check for continuity between terminal No. 82 of ECM harness
connector and harness connector for heated oxygen sensor 1
SEF213UA (front). EM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Continuity exists. ........................................................................OK
Continuity does not exist. ..........................................................NG LC
OK
q
H
G
H
Repair or replace ECM harness. FE
H
SEF214UA
Connect ECM harness connector to ECM. AT
H
q
G
PD
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) harness:
F q
F
1) Turn off engine and disconnect battery ground cable FA
2) Disconnect ECM harness connector from ECM.
3) Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (B1) harness connec-
tor. RA
4) Check for continuity between terminal No. 83 of ECM harness
connector and harness connector for heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). BR
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Continuity exists. ........................................................................OK
Continuity does not exist. ..........................................................NG ST
OK NG
RS
q
H
G
H
BT
Repair or replace ECM harness.
H
HA
Connect ECM harness connector to ECM.
EL
H
q
G IDX
EC-47
q
G
H
1) Select “ENG COOLANT TEMP” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2) Set “COOLANT TEMP” to 5°C (41°F) by touching “DWN”
and “Qd”.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness
connector.
2) Connect a resistor (4.4 kΩ) between terminals of engine
SEF760X coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
H
Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature indica-
tor points to the middle of gauge.
H
Race engine two or three times under no-load, then run engine at
idle speed.
H
SEF858QA q
J
Check “CO” %. G
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idle CO: 0.4 - 9.4% with engine running smoothly
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
After checking CO%,
1) Disconnect the resistor from terminals of engine coolant tempera- OK
ture sensor.
2) Connect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector to
engine coolant temperature sensor.
NG
H
Connect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) harness connectors to
heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
SEF246F
H
Check fuel pressure regulator. F q
K
H
Check mass air flow sensor.
H
Check injector.
Clean or replace if necessary.
SEF248F H
Check engine coolant temperature sensor. q
H
G
H
Check ECM function* by substituting another known-good ECM.
*: ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.
Note: If a vehicle contains a part which is operating outside of design specifications with no MIL
illumination, the part shall not be replaced prior to emission testing unless it is determined that
the part has been tampered with or abused in such a way that the diagnostic system cannot
reasonably be expected to detect the resulting malfunction.
EC-48
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
I Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .................................................................................Mode 3 of SAE J1979
I Freeze Frame data .....................................................................................................Mode 2 of SAE J1979 GI
I System Readiness Test (SRT) code ..........................................................................Mode 1 of SAE J1979
I 1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC).......................................................Mode 7 of SAE J1979
I 1st Trip Freeze Frame data MA
I Test values and Test limits .........................................................................................Mode 6 of SAE J1979
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
Freeze Frame 1st trip Freeze EM
DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code Test value
data Frame data
Diagnostic test LC
mode II (Self-
X X*1 — — — —
diagnostic
results)
CONSULT-II X X X X X —
GST X X*2 X — X X
FE
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
*2: 1st trip DTCs for self-diagnoses concerning SRT items cannot be shown on the GST display.
AT
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected
in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-98.).
PD
Two Trip Detection Logic
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
FA
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored
in the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
RA
during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to light up or blink the MIL
and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below. BR
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip ST
Blinking Lighting up lighting up displaying displaying displaying displaying
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst

damage) RS
X — — X — X —
— DTC: P0300 - P0308 (0701,
0608 - 0601) is being detected
BT
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage)
— X — X — X —
— DTC: P0300 - P0308 (0701, HA
0608 - 0601) has been detected
Closed loop control — DTC: P1148
(0307), P1168 (0308)
— X — X — X — EL
Fail-safe items (Refer to EC-98.) — X X*1 — X*1 —
Except above — — X X X X IDX
*1: Except “ECM”.
EC-49
Emission-related Diagnostic Information

DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the first trip DTC did not reoccur, the first trip
DTC will not be displayed. If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM
memory. The MIL will not light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd
trip (meeting the required driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same mal-
function is detected in the 2nd trip, both the first trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the
MIL lights up. In other words, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same
malfunction occurs in two consecutive trips. If a first trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is per-
formed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that
blink or light up the MIL during the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”. Refer to EC-63.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-60. These items are required by legal
regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-continuously
are also displayed on CONSULT-II.
1st trip DTC is specified in Mode 7 of SAE J1979. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without lighting up the MIL
and therefore does not warn the driver of a problem. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent the
vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to page EC-89. Then perform “Diagnostic trouble code
confirmation procedure” or “Overall function check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is
duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to read DTC and 1st trip DTC

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
1. The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnos-
tic Results) Examples: 0101, 0201, 1003, 1104, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
2. CONSULT-II or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0340, P1320, P0705, P0750, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II and GST do not indicate whether the
malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC is shown at left. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed
in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was
driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SEF698X
EC-50
(Cont’d)
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant
temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment a mal-
function is detected. GI
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and are displayed on CONSULT-II
or GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, not on the GST. For MA
details, see EC-77.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior- EM
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol- LC
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0308 (0701, 0608 - 0601)
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114)
FE
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data

AT
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was stored in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal- PD
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data
or 1st trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory
FA
and freeze frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains
unchanged in the ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
RA
memory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”. Refer to EC-63. BR
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Mode 1 of SAE J1979. ST
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed. RS
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”,
use the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT BT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer’s HA
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM EL
memory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector
will continue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the IDX
SRT items the vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
If MIL is “ON” during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer
untested even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check
SRT (“CMPLT”) and DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
EC-51
(Cont’d)
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item Performance Required self-diagnostic items to set the
Corresponding DTC No.
(CONSULT-II indication) Priority*2 SRT to “CMPLT”
CATALYST 3 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
EVAP control system (small leak) (nega-
2 P0440
tive pressure)
EVAP control system (small leak) (positive
EVAP SYSTEM — P1440*1
pressure)
EVAP control system purge flow monitor-
3 P1447
ing
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (circuit) P0130, P0150
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (lean shift
P0131, P0151
monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (rich shift
P0132, P0152
monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (response
P0133, P0153
monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) (high volt-
P0134, P0154
O2 SENSOR 3 age)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (min. volt-
P0137, P0157
age monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (max. volt-
P0138, P0158
age monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (response
P0139, P0159
monitoring)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) (high volt-
P0140, P0160
age)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) P0135, P0155
O2 SEN HEATER 3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) P0141, P0161
EGR function (close) P0400
3
EGR SYSTEM EGRC-BPT valve function P0402
1 EGR function (open) P1402
*1: P1440 [EVAP control system (small leak) (positive pressure) diagnosis] is one type of SRT related diagnosis. This diagnosis, however,
does not contribute to setting the SRT as “CMPLT”, when no malfunction exists in the EVAP system. Therefore, P0440 must be used
instead of P1440.
*2: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority
for models with CONSULT-II.
EC-52
(Cont’d)
SRT Set Timing
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is done
regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and is
shown in the table below. GI
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle MA
Diagnosis
+ ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON , OFF + ON ,
P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2) EM
Case 1
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
All OK LC
P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
Case 2
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
FE
NG
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive AT
NG exists Case 3
NG)
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL “ON”) PD
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK. FA

NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT RA
will indicate “CMPLT”. , Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses showed OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indi-
cate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. , Case 2 above BR
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses showed NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indi-
cate “CMPLT”. , Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is one (1) for each ST
self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in preparation for the state
emissions inspection, it is unnecessary of each self-diagnosis to be executed twice (Case 3) for the following
reasons:
RS
I The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
I The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
I When, during SRT driving pattern, 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT, the self-diag-
BT
nosis memory must be erased from ECM after repair.
I If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”. HA
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried
out prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”. EL
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review IDX
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next page.
EC-53
(Cont’d)
SEF573XA
*1 EC-50 *2 EC-54 *3 EC-55
How to display SRT code

1. Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-II
For items whose SRT codes are set, a “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen; for items
whose SRT codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
2. Selecting Mode 1 with GST (Generic Scan Tool)
EC-54
(Cont’d)
A sample of CONSULT-II display for SRT code is shown at left.
“INCMP” means the self-diagnosis is incomplete and SRT is not
set. “CMPLT” means the self-diagnosis is complete and SRT is set.
GI
MA
PEF215U EM
How to Set SRT Code
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnosis for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times. Each LC
diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
With CONSULT-II
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on “Performance Priority” in the table
on EC-52.
Without CONSULT-II FE
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained on the next page. The
driving pattern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes. AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-55
(Cont’d)
Driving pattern
SEF676Y
EC-56
(Cont’d)
I The time required for each diagnosis varies with road sur- Suggested transmission gear position
face conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving habits,
etc. Set the selector lever in the “D” position with “OD”
Zone A refers to the range where the time required, for the ON.
diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the shortest. Zone B GI
refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be per-
formed if the diagnosis is not completed within zone A. Suggested maximum speed in each gear
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
— Sea level
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running MA
— Flat road smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
— Ambient temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F) Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
— Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under nor- (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, EM
mal conditions. use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient tempera-
ture is other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagnosis may Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
also be performed. according to the road conditions, which will ensure LC
Pattern 1: I The engine is started at the engine coolant tem- safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when
perature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F) (where the shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine dam-
voltage between the ECM terminal q 67 and
ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V.) age or loss of vehicle control.
I The engine must be operated at idle speed until Gear km/h (MPH)
the engine coolant temperature is greater than
70°C (158°F) (where the voltage between the
1st 50 (30) FE
ECM terminal q 67 and ground is lower than 1.4 V.) 2nd 95 (60)
I The engine is started at a fuel tank temperature 3rd 145 (90)
warmer than 0°C (32°F) (where the voltage
4th — AT
between the ECM terminal q 91 and ground is less
than 4.1V). 5th —
Pattern 2: I When steady-state driving is performed again
even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can PD
be conducted. In this case, the time required for
diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3: I The driving pattern outlined in *2 must be FA
repeated at least 3 times.
Pattern 4: I Tests are performed after the engine has been
operated for at least 17 minutes.
I The accelerator pedal must be held very steady RA
during steady-state driving.
I If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must
be conducted all over again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90
BR
km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and
keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the
accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) ST
again.
*2: Operate the vehicle in the following driving pattern.
1) Decelerate vehicle to 0 km/h (0 MPH) and let it idle.
2) Repeat driving pattern shown below at least 10 times. RS
I During acceleration, hold the accelerator pedal
as steady as possible.
3) Repeat steps and 2 until the EGR system SRT is set. BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF414S
*3: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
EC-57
(Cont’d)
TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST only — not applicable to CONSULT-II)
The following is the information specified in Mode 6 of SAE J1979.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is “OK” or “NG” while
being monitored by ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
Items for which these data (test value and test limit) are displayed are the same as SRT code items (14 test
items).
These data (test limit) are specified by Test ID (TID) and Component ID (CID). These data can be displayed
on the GST screen.
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
Self-diagnostic test Test value

SRT item Test limit Application
item TID CID
Three way catalyst
function 01H 01H Max. X
(Left bank)
CATALYST
Three way catalyst
function 03H 02H Max. X
(Right bank)
EVAP control sys-
tem 05H 03H Max. X
(Small leak)
EVAP SYSTEM
EVAP control sys-
tem purge flow 06H 83H Min. X
monitoring
09H 04H Max. X
0AH 84H Min. X
Heated oxygen sen-
0BH 04H Max. X
sor 1 (front) (B1)
0CH 04H Max. X
0DH 04H Max. X
11H 05H Max. X
12H 85H Min. X
Heated oxygen sen-
13H 05H Max. X
sor 1 (front) (B2)
14H 05H Max. X
O2 SENSOR
15H 05H Max. X
19H 86H Min. X
Heated oxygen sen- 1AH 86H Min. X

sor 2 (rear) (B1) 1BH 06H Max. X
1CH 06H Max. X
21H 87H Min. X
Heated oxygen sen- 22H 87H Min. X

sor 2 (rear) (B2) 23H 07H Max. X
24H 07H Max. X
EC-58
(Cont’d)
Self-diagnostic test Test value

SRT item Test limit Application
item TID CID
GI
Heated oxygen sen- 29H 08H Max. X
sor 1 heater (front)
(B1) 2AH 88H Min. X MA
Heated oxygen sen- 2BH 09H Max. X
sor 1 heater (front)
(B2) 2CH 89H Min. X EM
O2 SENSOR
HEATER Heated oxygen sen- 2DH 0AH Max. X
sor 2 heater (rear) LC
(B1) 2EH 8AH Min. X
Heated oxygen sen- 2FH 0BH Max. X

sor 2 heater (rear)
(B2) 30H 8BH Min. X
31H 8CH Min. X FE

32H 8CH Min. X
EGR function 33H 8CH Min. X
AT
EGR SYSTEM 34H 8CH Min. X
35H 0CH Max. X
PD
EGRC-BPT valve 36H 0CH Max. X
function 37H 8CH Min. X
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-59
(Cont’d)
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*4 Test value/
Items
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC*4 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2 (GST only)
NO DTC IS DETECTED,
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0505 — — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0102 — — X EC-124
ABSL PRES SEN/CIRC P0105 0803 — — X EC-132
AIR TEMP SEN/CIRC P0110 0401 — — X EC-140
COOLANT T SEN/CIRC P0115 0103 — — X EC-145
THRTL POS SEN/CIRC P0120 0403 — — X EC-150
*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 0908 — — X EC-161
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 0303 X X X*3 EC-166
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 0411 X X X*3 EC-174
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0410 X X X*3 EC-180
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 0409 X X X*3 EC-187
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0412 X X X*3 EC-196

HO2S1 HTR (B1) P0135 0901 X X X*3 EC-204
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 0511 X X X*3 EC-210
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 0510 X X X*3 EC-218
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 0707 X X X*3 EC-226
HO2S2 (B1) P0140 0512 X X X*3 EC-233
HO2S2 HTR (B1) P0141 0902 X X X*3 EC-239

HO2S1 (B2) P0150 0503 X X X*3 EC-204
HO2S1 (B2) P0151 0415 X X X*3 EC-174
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 0414 X X X*3 EC-180
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 0413 X X X*3 EC-187
HO2S1 (B2) P0154 0509 X X X*3 EC-196
HO2S1 HTR (B2) P0155 1001 X X X*3 EC-204
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 0314 X X X*3 EC-210
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 0313 X X X*3 EC-218
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 0708 X X X*3 EC-226

HO2S2 (B2) P0160 0315 X X X*3 EC-233
HO2S2 HTR (B2) P0161 1002 X X X*3 EC-239

FUEL SYS LEAN/BK1 P0171 0115 — — X EC-245
FUEL SYS RICH/BK1 P0172 0114 — — X EC-251

FUEL SYS LEAN/BK2 P0174 0210 — — X EC-245
FUEL SYS RICH/BK2 P0175 0209 — — X EC-251
FUEL TEMP SEN/CIRC P0180 0402 — — X EC-257
MULTI CYL MISFIRE P0300 0701 — — X EC-262
CYL 1 MISFIRE P0301 0608 — — X EC-262
CYL 2 MISFIRE P0302 0607 — — X EC-262
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). These numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*3: These are not displayed with GST.
EC-60
(Cont’d)
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*4 Test value/
Items
SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC*4 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II
ECM*1 (GST only)
GI
GST*2
CYL 3 MISFIRE P0303 0606 — — X EC-262
CYL 4 MISFIRE P0304 0605 — — X EC-262 MA

CYL 5 MISFIRE P0305 0604 — — X EC-262
CYL 6 MISFIRE P0306 0603 — — X EC-262 EM

CYL 7 MISFIRE P0307 0602 — — X EC-262
CYL 8 MISFIRE P0308 0601 — — X EC-262

LC
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0304 — — X EC-267
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B2 P0330 0212 — — X EC-267

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0802 — — X EC-270
CMP SEN/CIRCUIT P0340 0101 — — X EC-275

EGR SYSTEM P0400 0302 X X X*3 EC-281 FE
EGRC-BPT VALVE P0402 0306 X X X*3 EC-290
TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0702 X X X*3 EC-295 AT

TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0703 X X X*3 EC-295
EVAP SMALL LEAK P0440 0705 X X X*3 EC-298

PD
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P0443 1008 — — X EC-309
VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 0903 — — X EC-315

FA
EVAPO SYS PRES SEN P0450 0704 — — X EC-320
EVAP GROSS LEAK P0455 0715 — X X*3 EC-326
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0104 — — X EC-335 RA

IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0205 — — X EC-340
CLOSED TP SW/CIRC P0510 0203 — — X EC-346 BR
A/T COMM LINE P0600 0504 — — — EC-352
ECM P0605 0301 — — X EC-355

ST
PNP SW/CIRC P0705 1101 — — X AT-81
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC P0710 1208 — — X AT-85
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT P0720 1102 — — X AT-89

RS
ENGINE SPEED SIG P0725 1207 — — X AT-92
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN P0731 1103 — — X AT-95 BT

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN P0732 1104 — — X AT-100
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN P0733 1105 — — X AT-104 HA

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN P0734 1106 — — X AT-108
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC P0740 1204 — — X AT-114

EL
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 1107 — — X AT-118
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC P0745 1205 — — X AT-125
SFT SOL A/CIRC P0750 1108 — — X AT-129

IDX
SFT SOL B/CIRC P0755 1201 — — X AT-133
MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR P1105 1302 — — X EC-358
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P1110 0805 — — X EC-367
EC-61
(Cont’d)
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
DTC*4 Test value/
Items
CONSULT-II SRT code Test limit 1st trip DTC*4 Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2 (GST only)
TP SEN2/CIRCUIT P1120 0406 — — X EC-375
MOT THRT SEN/CT P1125 0110 — — X EC-381
INT/V TIM CONT-B2 P1135 1301 — — X EC-367
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B1 P1140 1303 — — X EC-382
INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 P1145 1304 — — X EC-382
CLOSED LOOP-B1 P1148 0307 — — X EC-388
CLOSED LOOP-B2 P1168 0308 — — X EC-388
TACM SW SIGNALS P1210 0106 — — X EC-390

FPCM/CIRCUIT P1220 1305 — — X EC-393
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 0201 — — X EC-399

CKP SENSOR (COG) P1336 0905 — — X EC-407
EGRC SOLENOID/V P1400 1005 — — X EC-412
EGR TEMP SEN/CIRC P1401 0305 — — X EC-417
EGR SYSTEM P1402 0514 X X X*3 EC-423
EVAP SMALL LEAK P1440 0213 X X X EC-432
PURG VOLUME CONT/V P1444 0214 — — X EC-444
EVAP PURG FLOW/MON P1447 0111 X X X*3 EC-457
VC/V BYPASS/V P1490 0801 — — X EC-470
VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 0311 — — X EC-475

PURG CONT S/V P1492 0807 — — X EC-481
PURG CONT/V & S/V P1493 0312 — — X EC-487
A/T DIAG COMM LINE P1605 0804 — — X EC-352
TP SEN/CIRC A/T P1705 1206 — — X AT-137
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1003 — — X EC-494
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1203 — — X AT-143
EC-62
(Cont’d)
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to erase DTC (With CONSULT-II)
Note: If the diagnostic trouble code is not for A/T related items (see EC-4), skip steps 2 through 4. GI
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT-II “ON” and touch “A/T”. MA
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. [The DTC in the TCM (Transmission Control Module) will be erased.] And touch “BACK”
twice. EM
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.) LC
I If DTCs are displayed for both ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module), they need to be erased
individually for both ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module).
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF823YE
EL
The emission-related diagnostic information can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
IDX
How to erase DTC (With GST)

Note: If the diagnostic trouble code is not for A/T related items (see page EC-4), skip step 2.
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
EC-63
(Cont’d)
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
How to erase DTC (No Tools)

Note: If the diagnostic trouble code is not for A/T related items (see EC-4), skip step 2.
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” again.
2. Perform “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (Without CONSULT-II)” in AT section titled “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS”, “Self-diagnosis”. (The engine warm-up step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis
only to erase the DTC.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by turning the mode selector on the ECM. (See
EC-66.)
NOTE:
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours.
I Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information, using CONSULT-II or GST is easier and
quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM.
The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data
5. System readiness test (SRT) codes
6. Test values
7. Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but
all of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
EC-64
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

The malfunction indicator lamp is located on the instrument panel.
1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a bulb
check. GI
I If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to EL
section WARNING LAMPS or see EC-535.
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp MA
should go off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
SEF217U detected an engine system malfunction. EM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions. LC
Diagnostic Test Mode I

1. BULB CHECK : This function checks the bulb for damage (blown, open circuit, etc.) of
the malfunction indicator lamp.
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit and ECM test mode. FE
(See next page.)
2. MALFUNCTION : This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is detected twice
WARNING in two consecutive driving cycles (2 trip detection logic), the MIL will AT
light up to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up or blink the MIL in the 1st trip.
I “Misfire (possible three way catalyst damage)” PD
I “Closed loop control”
I Fail-safe mode
Diagnostic Test Mode II FA
3. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC : This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
RESULTS RA
4. HEATED OXYGEN : This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich), monitored
SENSORS 1 MONI- by heated oxygen sensors 1 monitor (front), to be read.
TOR (FRONT) BR
MIL Flashing without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, the MIL may flash when the engine is running. In this case, check ST
ECM test mode selector following “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES” on next page.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes and details of the above functions are described later. (See
page EC-66.)
RS
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Condition
Test Mode I Test Mode II BT
Engine
stopped
BULB CHECK
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC HA
RESULTS
Ignition switch
in “ON” posi-
tion Engine
EL
running HEATED OXYGEN
MALFUNCTION
SENSOR 1 MONI-
WARNING
TOR (FRONT) IDX
EC-65
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) (Cont’d)
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES
NG
Turn ignition switch Check MIL circuit. (See E Repair harness or connector
“ON”. (Do not start E EC-535.)
engine.)
OK
H
Check whether ECM test No
Yes mode selector can be E Repair or replace ECM test mode selector.
turned counterclockwise.
H
Diagnostic Test Mode I
Mode I — MALFUNCTION INDICA- NG
E TOR LAMP CHECK. Refer to EC-65. G E — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL should come on. F E
Start engine. NG
E Repair harness or connectors.
OK
H OK
NG
E Check MIL circuit. (See
EC-535.)
Diagnostic Test Mode II*1
E — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONI-
OK TOR (FRONT) (B1)
H
(Turn diagnostic test mode selector Check ECM fail-safe. (See H
on ECM fully clockwise.) EC-98.) Turn diagnostic test mode selector on ECM
MIL should come off. fully clockwise.
OK
OK
H H
Wait at least 2 seconds. F F Wait at least 2 seconds.
H H
Turn diagnostic test mode selector on ECM
fully counterclockwise.
H
Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Turn diagnostic test mode selector — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONI-
fully counterclockwise.) TOR (FRONT) (B2)
H
H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II
— SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
E G fully clockwise.
Start engine.
(ERASING ECM H
MEMORY.) Wait at least 2 seconds.
H
H
fully counterclockwise.
*1: If the battery is weak, heated oxygen sensors 1 monitor (front) may not func-
tion properly. Use this function after fully charging battery.
H
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared
Wait at least 2 seconds.
when the ECM memory is erased.
H
6. Test values
7. Others
If the selector is turned fully I Switching the modes is not possible when the engine is
counterclockwise at this time, running.
the emission-related diagnostic
information will be erased from
I When ignition switch is turned off during diagnosis,
the backup memory in the ECM. power to ECM will drop after approx. 5 seconds.
The diagnosis will automatically return to Diagnostic Test
Mode I.
I Turn back diagnostic test mode selector to the fully coun-
terclockwise position whenever vehicle is in use.
EC-66
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I—BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains
OFF, check the bulb. (See the WARNING LAMPS in the EL section. Or see EC-535.)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I—MALFUNCTION WARNING

GI
MALFUNCTION
Condition
INDICATOR LAMP
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM’s CPU is malfunctioning. MA
OFF No malfunction
I These Diagnostic Trouble Code Numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC EM
RESULTS).
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II—SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LC

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MALFUNCTION INDI-
CATOR LAMP as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode 1 (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTC’s. If only one code is displayed when the
MIL illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes
are displayed, they may be either DTC’s or 1st trip DTC’s. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These FE
unidentified codes can be identified by using the consult or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how
to read a code.
AT
PD
FA
RA
SEF298Q
BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF162PA
HA
Long (0.6 second) blinking indicates the two LH digits of number and short (0.3 second) blinking indicates the
two RH digits of number. For example, the malfunction indicator lamp blinks 10 times for 6 seconds (0.6 sec
x 10 times) and then it blinks three times for about 1 second (0.3 sec x 3 times). This indicates the DTC “1003” EL
and refers to the malfunction of the park/neutral position switch.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their diagnostic trouble code numbers. The DTC
“0505” refers to no malfunction. (See DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX, refer to page EC-4.) IDX
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (Self-diagnostic results)
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode
is changed from Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOS-
TIC TEST MODES”.)
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost from the backup
memory within 24 hours.
I Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
EC-67
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II—HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT)
In this mode, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich)
which is monitored by the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
Air fuel ratio feedback control
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas
condition
ON Lean
Closed loop control
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop control
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm
it up until engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP comes ON more than 5 times every 10 seconds when measured at 2,000
rpm under no-load.
If the battery is weak, heated oxygen sensors 1 monitor (front) may not function properly. Use this
function after fully charging battery.
How to switch monitored sensor from left bank to right bank or vice versa
I The following procedure should be performed while the engine is running.
1. Turn diagnostic test mode selector on ECM fully clockwise.
2. Wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn diagnostic test mode selector on ECM fully counterclockwise.
SEF134M
EC-68
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS)
I If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch
in the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is dis-
played on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-
diagnostic results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS pro- GI
gram card. Refer to “IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem — NATS” in EL section.
I Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed MA
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF543X I When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and EM
registration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried
out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. LC
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS
ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation
manual, NATS.
OBD System Operation Chart

FE
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
I When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory. AT
I When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on. For details, refer to “Two Trip Detection Logic” on
EC-49. PD
I The MIL will go off after the vehicle is driven 3 times with no malfunction. The drive is counted only when
the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs while counting,
the counter will reset. FA
I The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A)
without the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel injection system). For Misfire and Fuel
Injection System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driv-
RA
ing pattern C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” IN “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”
mode of CONSULT-II will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
I The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in “OK” for the 2nd trip.
BR
SUMMARY CHART ST
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (goes off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) RS
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
BT
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear) HA
For details about patterns “B” and “C” under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see EC-71.
For details about patterns “A” and “B” under “Other”, see EC-71.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected. EL
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
IDX
EC-69
OBD System Operation Chart (Cont’d)
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF392S
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st
trips, MIL will light up. trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) in ECM.
without any malfunctions. *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive cleared at the moment OK is detected.
trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when vehicle is driven a time
any longer after vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) with- (pattern C) without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
out the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
EC-70
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving pattern B>
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system. GI
I The B counter will reset when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
I The B counter will count up times driving pattern B is satisfied without the malfunction.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”) MA
<Driving pattern C>
Driving pattern C means the vehicle operation as follows:
(1) The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time: EM
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition: LC
I When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), “T” should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
I When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), “T” should be higher than or
equal to 70°C (158°F).
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as follows:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) FE
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more
than 70°C (158°F) AT
I The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1).
I The C counter will be counted up when (1) is satisfied without the same malfunction.
I The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80. PD
I The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted a time without the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-71
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR
“MISFIRE” <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
SEF393S
*1: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive *5: When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st
trips, MIL will light up. trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data will be stored
*2: MIL will go off after vehicle is driven 3 times (pattern B) in ECM.
without any malfunctions. *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehicle is driven a time
*3: When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive (pattern A) without the same malfunction.
trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored in *7: When the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip, the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data will be cleared.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data will not be displayed
any longer after vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data still remain in ECM.)
EC-72
EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS EXCEPT FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”
<Driving pattern A>
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
AEC574
I The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
I The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction. FA
I The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
<Driving pattern B> RA
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as follows:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
I The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. BR
I The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
I The MIL will go off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”).
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-73
CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
1. Turn off ignition switch.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector which is located
beside the hood lock release handle.
SEF046TA
3. Turn on ignition switch.

4. Touch “START”.
PBR455D
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
PEF895K
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual.
SEF824Y
EC-74
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
WORK RESULTS*1 CONFIRMATION
Item DATA ACTIVE
SUP-
PORT
FREEZE
FRAME
MONITOR TEST SRT STA-
DTC
WORK
GI
TUS
DATA*2 SUPPORT
Camshaft position sensor X X X
Mass air flow sensor X X
MA
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) X X X X
EM
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X X
Throttle position sensor X X X LC
Fuel tank temperature sensor X X X
EVAP control system pressure sensor X X
Absolute pressure sensor X X
EGR temperature sensor X X
Intake air temperature sensor X X
INPUT
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) X FE
Knock sensor X
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Ignition switch (start signal) X

Closed throttle position switch X
AT
Closed throttle position switch (throttle
X
position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch X
PD
Park/Neutral position switch X X
Power steering oil pressure switch X
FA
Air conditioner switch X
Battery voltage X
Ambient air temperature switch X RA
Injectors X X
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition
signal)
X X BR
IACV-AAC valve X X X X
EVAP canister purge volume control valve X X X X
ST
Air conditioner relay X
Fuel pump relay X X X
OUTPUT EGRC-solenoid valve X X X RS
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) X X X
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) X X X
EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve X X X BT
EVAP canister vent control valve X X X
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve X X X X
MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve X X X HA
Calculated load value X X
X: Applicable EL
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame
data mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-51.
IDX
EC-75
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some

Work support devices faster and more accurately by following the
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs

Self-diagnostic results and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives

Active test some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts
some parameters in a specified range.
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-

DTC & SRT confirmation
diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECM part numbers ECM part numbers can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
6. Test values
7. Others
WORK SUPPORT MODE

WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ I FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION IN THE SERVICE When adjusting the idle throttle posi-
MANUAL. tion.
IACV-AAC/V ADJ SET ENGINE SPEED AT THE SPECIFIED VALUE UNDER THE When adjusting ignition timing and idle
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS. speed
I ENGINE WARMED UP
I NO-LOAD
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE I FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DURING When releasing fuel pressure from
IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
SELF-LEARNING CONT I THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL MIXTURE When releasing fuel pressure from
RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEFFICIENT. fuel line
EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE OPEN THE VACUUM CUT VALVE BYPASS VALVE AND CLOSE When detecting EVAP vapor leak
THE EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE IN ORDER TO point of EVAP system
MAKE THE EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE UNDER THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS.
I IGN SW “ON”
I ENGINE NOT RUNNING
I AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 0°C (32°F).
I NO VACUUM AND NO HIGH PRESSURE IN EVAP SYSTEM
I FUEL TANK TEMP. IS MORE THAN 0°C (32°F).
I WITHIN 10 MINUTES AFTER STARTING “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE”
I WHEN TRYING TO EXECUTE “EVAP SYSTEM CLOSE”
UNDER THE CONDITION EXCEPT ABOVE, CONSULT-II WILL
DISCONTINUE IT AND DISPLAY APPROPRIATE INSTRUC-
TION.
NOTE:
WHEN STARTING ENGINE, CONSULT-II MAY DISPLAY “BAT-
TERY VOLTAGE IS LOW. CHARGE BATTERY”, EVEN IN
USING CHARGED BATTERY.
EC-76
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
DTC and 1st trip DTC
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX” (See
EC-4.).
GI
Freeze frame data and 1st trip freeze frame data
Freeze frame data

MA
Description
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
I Engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. [Refer to
EM
CODE
“Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (EC-4).]
[PXXXX]
I “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
LC
FUEL SYS-B1*2 I One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
FUEL SYS-B2*2 “MODE 4”: Closed loop - using heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
FE
CAL/LD VALUE [%] I The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP
I The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. AT
[°C] or [°F]
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] I “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel PD
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] schedule.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] I “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
I The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule FA
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] than short-term fuel trim.
ENGINE SPEED RA
I The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED
I The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph] BR
ABSOL PRESS [kPa]
I The absolute pressure at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [kg/cm2] or [psi]
ST
B/FUEL SCHDL
I The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] RS
I The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data. BT
*2: Regarding model Y33, “B1” indicates left bank and “B2” indicates right bank.
HA
EL
IDX
EC-77
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored item ECM
Main
[Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
I Indicates the engine speed computed
q q
CMPS⋅RPM
(POS) [rpm] from the POS signal (1° signal) of the
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MAS AIR/FL SE [V]
q q I The signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor is displayed.
I When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
B/FUEL SCHDL I “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
[msec]
q injection pulse width programmed into
ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]
q I The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- I When the engine is stopped, a certain
back correction factor per cycle is indi- value is indicated.
q
cated. I This data also includes the data for the
A/F ALPHA-B2 [%]
air-fuel ratio learning control.
COOLAN TEMP/S I The engine coolant temperature (deter- I When the engine coolant temperature
q q
[°C] or [°F] mined by the signal voltage of the engine sensor is open or short-circuited, ECM
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. enters fail-safe mode. The engine coolant
temperature determined by the ECM is
displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V]
q q I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensors 1 (front) is displayed.
HO2S1 (B2) [V]
q q
HO2S2 (B1) [V]
q q I The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 (rear) is displayed.
HO2S2 (B2) [V]
q q
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) I Display of heated oxygen sensors 1 I After turning ON the ignition switch,
[RICH/LEAN]
q q (front) signal during air-fuel ratio feed-
back control:
“RICH” is displayed until air-fuel mixture
ratio feedback control begins.
RICH ... means the mixture became I When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
“rich”, and control is being affected clamped, the value just before the clamp-
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) toward a leaner mixture. ing is displayed continuously.
[RICH/LEAN]
q q LEAN ... means the mixture became
“lean”, and control is being affected
toward a rich mixture.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) I Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I When the engine is stopped, a certain
[RICH/LEAN]
q signal during air-fuel ratio feedback con-
trol:
value is indicated.
RICH ... means the amount of oxygen

HO2S2 MNTR (B2) after three way catalyst is relatively large.
[RICH/LEAN]
q q LEAN ... means the amount of oxygen
after three way catalyst is relatively
small.
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph] q q I The vehicle speed computed from the
vehicle speed sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
q q I The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
played.
THRTL POS SEN [V]
q q I The throttle position sensor signal volt-
age is displayed.
THRTL/P SEN2 [V]
q I Secondary throttle position sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
I The fuel tank temperature judged from
q
FUEL T/TMP SE [°C]
or [°F] the tank fuel temperature sensor signal
voltage is displayed.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
Regarding Y33 model, “B1” indicates left bank and “B2” indicates right bank.
EC-78
Monitored item ECM
Main
signals
signals
EGR TEMP SEN [V]
q I The signal voltage of the EGR tempera-
ture sensor is displayed.
I The intake air temperature determined by
GI
q q
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
or [°F] the signal voltage of the intake air tem-
perature sensor is indicated.
MA
START SIGNAL
[ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
starter signal.
I After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
played regardless of the starter signal.
I Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
q q
CLSD THL POS
[ON/OFF] puted by ECM according to the throttle EM
position sensor signal.
I Indicates mechanical contact [ON/OFF]
q
CLSD THL/P SW
[ON/OFF] condition from the closed throttle position LC
switch signal.
I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
q q
AIR COND SIG
[ON/OFF] conditioner switch as determined by the
air conditioner signal.
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF] q q I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
park/neutral position switch signal.
FE
PW/ST SIGNAL I [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering
[ON/OFF]
q q oil pressure switch determined by the
power steering oil pressure signal is indi- AT
cated.
LOAD SIGNAL I Indicate [ON/OFF] condition from the
q q
[ON/OFF] electrical load signal and/or lighting PD
switch.
ON ... rear defogger is operating.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating.
AMB TEMP SW I Indicate [ON/OFF] condition from the FA
[ON/OFF] ambient temperature signal.
q ON ... When the ambient temperature is
lower than specified value. RA
OFF ... When the ambient temperature is
higher than specified value.
IGNITION SW I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
[ON/OFF] tion switch. BR
A/C PRESS SW I Indicate [ON/OFF] condition of air condi-
[ON/OFF] tioner pressure switch signal. ST
ON ... A/C pressure is higher than speci-
fied value.
OFF ... A/C pressure is lower than speci-
fied value. RS
INJ PULSE-B1 [msec]
q I Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse
width compensated by ECM according to
computed value is indicated.
INJ PULSE-B2 [msec]
the input signals. BT
IGN TIMING [BTDC]

q I Indicates the ignition timing computed by
ECM according to the input signals.
value is indicated.
HA
I Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control
q
IACV-AAC/V [step]
value computed by ECM according to the EL
input signals.
PURG VOL C/V [step] I Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control valve computed by the ECM
according to the input signals.
IDX
I The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
EVAP SYS PRES [V]
q I The signal voltage of EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor is displayed.
AIR COND RLY I The air conditioner relay control condition
[ON/OFF] (determined by ECM according to the
input signal) is indicated.
EC-79
Monitored item ECM
Main
signals
signals
FUEL PUMP RLY I Indicates the fuel pump relay control con-
[ON/OFF] dition determined by ECM according to
the input signals.
INT/V SOL-B1 I The control condition of the intake valve
INT/V SOL-B2 timing control solenoid valve is indicated.
[ON/OFF] ON ... Intake valve timing control is oper-
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
INT/V TIM-B1 I Indicate [deg] of intake camshaft
INT/V TIM-B2 advanced angle.
[deg]
COOLING FAN I The control condition of the cooling fan
[HI/OFF] (determined by ECM according to the
input signal) is indicated.
HI ... High speed operation
OFF ... Stop
EGRC SOL/V I The control condition of the EGRC-sole-
[ON/OFF] (flow/cut) noid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signal) is indicated.
I OFF ... EGR is cut-off
ON ... EGR is operational
VENT CONT/V I The control condition of the EVAP canis-
[ON/OFF] ter vent control valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated.
I ON ... Closed
OFF ... Open
HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
[ON/OFF] oxygen sensors 1 (front)’s heater deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
HO2S1 HTR (B2) signals.
[ON/OFF]
HO2S2 HTR (B1) I Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
[ON/OFF] oxygen sensor 2 (rear)’s heater deter-
mined by ECM according to the input
HO2S2 HTR (B2) signals.
[ON/OFF]
VC/V BYPASS/V I The control condition of the vacuum cut
[ON/OFF] valve bypass valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signal) is indicated.
I ON ... Open
OFF ... Closed
PURG CONT S/V I The control condition of the EVAP canis-
[ON/OFF] ter purge control solenoid valve (com-
puted by the engine control module
according to the input signals) is indi-
cated.
I ON ... Canister purge is operational
OFF ... Canister purge operation is cut-
off
CAL/LD VALUE [%] I “Calculated load value” indicates the
value of the current airflow divided by
peak airflow.
ABSOL TH⋅P/S [%] I “Absolute throttle position sensor” indi-
cates the throttle opening computed by
ECM according to the signal voltage of
the throttle position sensor.
MASS AIRFLOW I Indicates the mass airflow computed by
[g⋅m/s] ECM according to the signal voltage of
the mass airflow sensor.
FPCM DR VOLT [V] I The voltage between fuel pump and
FPCM is displayed.
EC-80
Monitored item ECM
Main
signals
signals
FPCM [LOW/HI] I The control condition of the fuel pump
control module (FPCM) (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is GI
indicated.
LOW ... Low amount of fuel flow
HI ... High amount of fuel flow
MA
MAP/BARO SW/V I The control condition of the MAP/BARO
[MAP/BARO] switch solenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input signal) is
indicated. EM
MAP ... Intake manifold absolute pressure
BARO ... Barometric pressure
ABSOL PRES/SE [V]
q I The signal voltage of the absolute pres-
sure sensor is displayed.
LC
VOLTAGE I Voltage measured by the voltage probe.
[V]
Frequency I Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle I Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
[msec] or [Hz] or [%] measured by the pulse probe. be measured.
I Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
They are the same figures as an actual FE
piece of data which was just previously
measured.
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-81
ACTIVE TEST MODE
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
I Engine: Return to the original trouble
I Harness and connector
condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
FUEL INJECTION I Fuel injectors
I Change the amount of fuel injection CHECK ITEM.
I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
using CONSULT-II.
condition
If trouble symptom disappears, see I Adjust ignition timing (by moving
IGNITION TIMING I Timing light: Set
CHECK ITEM. camshaft position sensor)
I Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
I Engine: After warming up, idle the
IACV-AAC/V engine. Engine speed changes according to the I Harness and connector
OPENING I Change the IACV-AAC valve opening opening percent. I IACV-AAC valve
step using CONSULT-II.
I Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
I Compression
I A/C switch “OFF”
POWER BALANCE Engine runs rough or dies. I Injectors
I Shift lever “N”
I Ignition coil with power transistor
I Cut off each injector signal one at a
I Spark plugs
time using CONSULT-II.
I Ignition switch: ON
COOLING FAN I Turn the cooling fan “ON” and “OFF” Cooling fan moves and stops.
I Cooling fan motor
using CONSULT-II.
ENG COOLANT condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
TEMP I Change the engine coolant CHECK ITEM.
I Fuel injectors
temperature using CONSULT-II.
I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
I Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and Fuel pump relay makes the operating I Harness and connector
FUEL PUMP RELAY
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and listen to sound. I Fuel pump relay
operating sound.
EGRC SOLENOID I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness and connector
VALVE with CONSULT-II and listen to sound. I EGRC-solenoid valve
operating sound.
I Turn solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” Solenoid valve makes an operating
VALVE TIMING SOL I Intake valve timing control solenoid
with CONSULT-II and listen to sound.
valve
operating sound.
I Engine: After warming up, run engine
at 1,500 rpm. I Harness and connector
Engine speed changes according to the
PURG VOL CONT/V I Change the EVAP canister purge I EVAP canister purge volume control
opening step.
volume control valve opening step valve
using CONSULT-II.
FUEL/T TEMP SEN I Change the fuel tank temperature using CONSULT-II.
I Turn the VENT CONT/V “ON and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness or connector
VENT CONTROL/V
OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for sound. I EVAP canister vent control valve
operating sound.
EVAP canister purge control solenoid
I Engine: Run engine at 2,000 rpm.
valve makes an operating sound. I Harness and connector
I Turn the EVAP canister purge control
Check vacuum signal for EVAP canister I EVAP canister purge control solenoid
PURG CONT S/V solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF” using
purge control valve. valve
CONSULT-II and listen for operating
VC ON ... Vacuum exists. I Vacuum hose
sound.
VC OFF ... Vacuum does not exist.
(Engine stopped)
I Turn the MAP/BARO switch solenoid MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve makes I Harness and connector
MAP/BARO SW/V
valve between “MAP” and “BARO” an operating sound. I MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
using CONSULT-II and listen for
operating sound.
I Ignition switch: ON “FPCM D/R VOLT” of CONSULT-II
I Select “LOW” and “HI” with changes as follows; I Harness and connector
FPCM
CONSULT-II and check that “FPCM LOW ... Approx. 4.7V I FPCM
D/R VOLT” of CONSULT-II changes. HI ... Approx. 0.4V
I Turn the VC/V BYPASS/V “ON and Solenoid valve makes an operating I Harness or connector
VC/V BYPASS/V
OFF” with CONSULT-II and listen for sound. I Vacuum cut bypass valve
operating sound.
EC-82
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE
SRT STATUS mode
For details, refer to “SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE”, EC-51.
SRT WORK SUPPORT mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
GI
DTC WORK SUPPORT mode MA

Test mode Test item Condition Reference page
EVAP SML LEAK P0440 EC-298
EVAP SML LEAK P1440 EC-432
EM
EVAPORATIVE PURG VOL CN/V P1444 EC-444
SYSTEM PURGE FLOW P1447 EC-457 LC
VC CUT/V BP/V P1491 EC-475
PURG CN/V & S/V P1493 EC-488
HO2S1 (B1) P0130 EC-166
HO2S1 (B1) P0131 EC-174
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 EC-180
FE
HO2S1 (B1) P0133 EC-187
HO2S1
HO2S1 (B2) P0150 EC-166
Refer to corresponding trouble diagnosis
HO2S1 (B2) P0151
for DTC.
EC-174 AT
HO2S1 (B2) P0152 EC-180
HO2S1 (B2) P0153 EC-187
HO2S2 (B1) P0137 EC-210
PD
HO2S2 (B1) P0138 EC-218
HO2S2
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 EC-226 FA
HO2S2 (B2) P0157 EC-210
HO2S2 (B2) P0158 EC-218
HO2S2 (B2) P0159 EC-226 RA
EGR SYSTEM P0400 EC-281
EGR SYSTEM EGRC-BPT/VLV P0402 EC-290
BR
EGR SYSTEM P1402 EC-423
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-83
DATA MONITOR
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE
Recording Data...11% NO DTC
(Recording Vehicle Data)
CMPS-RPM (POS) XXX rpm
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by
MAS AIR/FL SE XXX V touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
COOLAN TEMP/S XXX ˚C 1) “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
HO2S1 (B1) XXX V
I The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
VHCL SPEED SE XXX km/h
inreal time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR”
SEF974Z in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data
...xx%” as shown at left, and the data after the malfunction
detection is recorded. Then when the percentage reached
100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is
touched on the screen during “ Recording Data ... xx%”,
“REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION
MANUAL.
2) “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
I DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
SEF707X
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1) “AUTO TRIG”
I While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the
“DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA
MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunc-
tion at the moment it is detected.
I While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II
should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode, espe-
cially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twist-
ing) the suspicious connectors, components and harness in
the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction
is found the DTC/1st trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to GI
Section, “Incident Simulation Tests”.)
2) “MANU TRIG”
I If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR”
is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”. By selecting
“MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data
can be utilized for further diagnosis, such as a comparison with
the value for the normal operating condition.
EC-84
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
SEF720X
FA
RA
BR
Generic Scan Tool (GST) ST

DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBDII scan tool) complying with SAE J1978 RS
has 8 different functions explained on the next page.
ISO9141 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service BT
manual.
HA
SEF139P
GST INSPECTION PROCEDURE EL

1. Turn off ignition switch.
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector which is located under IDX
LH dash panel near the hood lock release handle.
SEF046TA
EC-85
Generic Scan Tool (GST) (Cont’d)
3. Turn ON ignition switch.
4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual.
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
SEF398S
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service pro-

cedure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of the
tool maker.
SEF416S
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode gains access to current emission-related data values, including analog
MODE 1 READINESS TESTS
inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This mode gains access to emission-related data value which were stored by ECM
MODE 2 (FREEZE DATA)
during the freeze frame. [For details, refer to “Freeze Frame Data” (EC-77).]
This mode gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which were
MODE 3 DTCs
stored by ECM.
This mode can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This includes:
I Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 1)
I Clear diagnostic trouble codes (MODE 3)
MODE 4 CLEAR DIAG INFO I Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (MODE 1)
I Clear freeze frame data (MODE 2)
I Reset status of system monitoring test (MODE 1)
I Clear on board monitoring test results (MODE 6 and 7)
This mode accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of specific
MODE 6 (ON BOARD TESTS)
components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This mode enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-related
MODE 7 (ON BOARD TESTS) powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal driv-
ing conditions.
This mode can close EVAP system in ignition switch “ON” position (Engine stopped).
When this mode is performed, the following parts can be opened or closed.
I EVAP canister vent control open
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve closed
In the following conditions, this mode cannot function.
MODE 8 — I Low ambient temperature
I Low battery voltage
I Engine running
I Ignition switch “OFF”
I Low fuel temperature
I Too much pressure is applied to EVAP system
This mode enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle information
MODE 9 (CALIBRATION ID)
such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction
Introduction
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel
control, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators.
It is essential that both input and output signals are proper and GI
stable. At the same time, it is important that there are no problems
such as vacuum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with
the engine. MA
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
MEF036D caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this EM
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road LC
test with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-89.
Before undertaking actual checks, take just a few minutes to talk
with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The
customer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and FE
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example below should be used.
SEF233G
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. AT
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically
controlled engine vehicle.
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF234G
Diagnostic Worksheet ST
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunctions
of engine components. A good knowledge of such conditions can
make troubleshooting faster and more accurate. RS
In general, each customer may feel differently about a given prob-
lem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions
for a customer complaint. BT
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to HA
SEF907L come on steady or blink and DTC to be detected. Examples:
I Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused engine misfire.
I Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing
EL
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere [for models with EVAP
(SMALL LEAK)] diagnosis.
IDX
EC-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Introduction
Diagnostic Worksheet (Cont’d)
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN
Engine # Trans. Mileage
Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date
l Vehicle ran out of fuel causing misfire.
Fuel and fuel filler cap
l Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on.
l Impossible to start l No combustion l Partial combustion
l Partial combustion affected by throttle position
l Startability
l Partial combustion NOT affected by throttle position
l Possible but hard to start l Others [ ]
l No fast idle l Unstable l High idle l Low idle
l Idling
l Others [ ]
Symptoms
l Stumble l Surge l Knock l Lack of power
l Driveability l Intake backfire l Exhaust backfire
l Others [ ]
l At the time of start l While idling
l Engine stall l While accelerating l While decelerating
l Just after stopping l While loading
l Just after delivery l Recently
Incident occurrence
l In the morning l At night l In the daytime
Frequency l All the time l Under certain conditions l Sometimes
Weather conditions l Not affected
Weather l Fine l Raining l Snowing l Others [ ]
Temperature l Hot l Warm l Cool l Cold l Humid °F
l Cold l During warm-up l After warm-up
Engine conditions Engine speed
Road conditions l In town l In suburbs l Highway l Off road (up/down)

l Not affected
l At starting l While idling l At racing
l While accelerating l While cruising
Driving conditions l While decelerating l While turning (RH/LH)
Vehicle speed
Malfunction indicator lamp l Turned on l Not turned on
EC-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow
Work Flow
CHECK IN
H
CHECK INCIDENT CONDITIONS. ................................................. STEP I GI
Listen to customer complaints. (Get symptoms.)
H MA
CHECK DTC and FREEZE FRAME DATA. *3
Check and PRINT OUT (write down), (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and ........................................... STEP II
Freeze Frame Data (Pre-check). Then clear. Paste it in repair order sheet.
If DTC is not available even if MIL lights up, check ECM fail-safe. (Refer to EC-98.)
EM
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Symptoms collected No symptoms, except MIL
lights up, or (1st trip)
LC
DTC exists at STEP II.
H
Verify the symptom by driving in the condition the cus- *1
tomer described. ............................................................................................. STEP III
Normal Code Malfunction Code
(at STEP II) (at STEP II) FE
H H
*1
...........................................
INCIDENT INFORMATION STEP IV
Verify the (1st trip) DTC by performing the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”. AT
H
Choose the appropriate action. ........................................... STEP V PD
E *2
Malfunction Code (at STEP II or IV) Normal Code (at both STEP II and IV)
H
BASIC INSPECTION FA
SYMPTOM BASIS (at STEP I or III)
...............................................................E
H RA
Perform inspections accord-
ing to Symptom Matrix
Chart. BR
H H
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX. *4 STEP VI
ST
H
REPAIR/REPLACE
RS
H
NG FINAL CHECK
Confirm that the incident is completely fixed by performing BASIC INSPECTION and ........................................... STEP VII BT
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE (or OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK).
Then, erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTCs in ECM and TCM (Transmission
Control Module).
HA
OK
H
CHECK OUT
If completion of SRT is needed, drive the vehicle EL
under the specific pattern. Refer to EC-56.
IDX
*1: If the incident cannot be duplicated, see “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
*2: If the on board diagnostic system cannot be performed, check main power supply and ground circuit (See TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY, EC-118).
*3: If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” is other than “0” or “1t” refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT”, EC-117.
*4: If the malfunction part cannot be found, refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
EC-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Work Flow
Description for Work Flow

STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-87.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or Generic Scan Tool) the Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) and the (1st trip) freeze frame data, then erase the code and the data. (Refer to
EC-63.) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP
STEP II III & IV.
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The “Symptom Matrix Chart” will be useful. See page EC-99.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CON-
STEP III SULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI section.)
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) Diagnostic Trouble Code by driving in (or performing) the “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE”. Check and read the (1st trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or Generic
Scan Tool.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS. (Refer to GI section.)
In case the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” is not available, perform the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK”
instead. The (1st trip) DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alter-
native.
The “NG” result of the “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION on next page. Then perform inspections
according to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-99.)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect
the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CON-
STEP VI
SULT-II. Refer to EC-102.
The “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short
circuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to GI
section (“HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, “Circuit Inspection”).
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions
and circumstances which resulted in the customer’s initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” and confirm the normal code (Diagnostic trouble code No.
STEP VII P0000 or 0505) is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different
method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in
ECM and TCM (Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-63.)
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspection
Basic Inspection
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical
loads applied;
I Headlamp switch is OFF, GI
I Air conditioner switch is OFF,
I Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
I Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. MA
SEF142I
BEFORE STARTING
EM
1. Check service records for recent
repairs of related problems, or the cur-
rent need for scheduled maintenance.
LC
2. Open engine hood and check the fol-
lowing:
I Harness connectors for improper con-
nections
I Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or FE
improper connections
I Wiring for improper connections,
pinches, or cuts AT
SEF046TA
H PD
CONNECT CONSULT-II TO THE
VEHICLE.
Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link FA
connector and select “ENGINE” from the
menu. (Refer to page EC-74.)
RA
H BR
THROTTLE OPENER INSPECTION NG Refer to “INSPECTION”,
SEF960X E
1. Start engine and let it idle. “Throttle Opener”, EC-39.
2. Confirm the throttle drum becomes free ST
from the rod of the throttle opener.
OK
RS
H
CHECK FI CAM. NG Check FI cam, refer to
Warm up engine to normal operating tem-
E
EC-40.
BT
perature and make sure there is clearance
between FI cam and roller (pin).
HA
OK
SEF219U H
qA EL
(Go to next page.)
IDX
EC-91
Basic Inspection (Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK IGNITION TIMING. NG Adjust ignition timing by
E
1. Warm up engine to normal turning camshaft position
operating temperature. sensor. Refer to EC-42.
2. Select “IACV-AAC/V ADJ”
in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Touch “START”.
4. Check ignition timing at idle
SEF263Y
using timing light.
Ignition timing:
15°±2° BTDC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Warm up engine to normal
operating temperature.
2. Stop engine and disconnect
throttle position sensor harness
connector.
3. Start engine.
4. Check ignition timing at idle
using timing light.
SEF212U
Ignition timing:
15°±2° BTDC
OK
H
CHECK BASE IDLE SPEED. NG Adjust base idle speed by
E
1. Select “IACV-AAC/V ADJ” in turning idle speed adjust-
“WORK SUPPORT” mode. ing screw.
2. When touching “START”, does Refer to “Idle Speed/
engine speed fall to Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture
600±50 rpm Ratio Adjustment” in
(in “P” or “N” position)? EC-42.
SEF043T
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Does engine run at
600±50 rpm
(in “P” or “N” position)?
OK
H
qB
(Go to next page.)
SEF263Y
SEF115T
EC-92
q
B
H
NG
CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
E
SWITCH IDLE POSITION. (Check throttle Refer to “THROTTLE POSI-
position sensor idle position.) TION SENSOR IDLE POSI-
I Always check ignition timing and base idle TION ADJUSTMENT”.
GI
speed before performing the followings. Go to EC-95.
1. Warm up engine to normal operating tem-
perature. OK MA
2. Check FI cam, refer to procedure .
3. Stop engine.
4. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the
SEF793W throttle opener. EM
5. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum
pump and the throttle opener as shown in the
figure. LC
6. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300
mmHg, −11.81 inHg)] until the throttle drum
become free from the rod of the throttle
opener. During the TPS adjustment, the
vacuum should be applied (Until step ).
8. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
FE
9. Select “CLSD THL/P SW” from the
menu.
SEF975Z
10. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal AT
under the following conditions.
I Insert a 0.2 mm (0.008 in) and 0.3 mm (0.012
in) feeler gauge alternately between the
throttle adjust screw (TAS) and throttle drum
PD
as shown in the figure and check the signal.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain
“ON” while inserting 0.2 mm (0.008 in) feeler FA
gauge.
“CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain
“OFF” while inserting 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
feeler gauge.
RA
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Disconnect closed throttle position
switch harness connector. BR
SEF402W 8. Connect the tester probe to closed
throttle position switch terminals q 6
and q 8 .
9. Check harness continuity under the ST
following conditions.
I Insert the 0.2 mm (0.008 in) and 0.3 mm
(0.012 in) feeler gauge alternately between RS
the throttle adjust screw (TAS) and throttle
drum as shown in the figure and check conti-
nuity.
“Continuity should exist” while inserting 0.2 BT
mm (0.008 in) feeler gauge.
“Continuity should not exist” while inserting
0.3 mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge. HA
OK
SEF800W
F
H EL
I Reconnect throttle position sensor
harness connector and closed throttle
position switch harness connector.
I Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) 2 or
IDX
3 times under no-load and then run
H
qC
(Go to next page.)
EC-93
q
C
H
RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE
POSITION MEMORY.
Note: Always warm up engine to normal
operating temperature. If engine is
cool, the throttle position sensor idle
position memory will not be reset cor-
rectly.
1. Start engine.
2. Warm up engine to normal operating tem-
SEF864V
perature.
3. Select “CLSD THL POS” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode (Manual trigger)
with CONSULT-II.
4. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
5. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5
seconds.
6. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5
seconds.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until “CLSD
THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II changes to
“ON”.
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6, 20 times.
SEF395X
H
Stop engine, release vacuum then remove the
vacuum hose and handy vacuum pump from
the throttle opener. Reinstall the original
vacuum hose to the throttle opener securely.
H
NG
CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED. E Adjust idle speed. Refer to
Read the engine idle speed in “DATA “Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. Mixture Ratio Adjustment” in
SEF396X 650±50 rpm EC-42.
(in “P” or “N” position)
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------
Check target idle speed.
650±50 rpm
(in “P” or “N” position)
OK
H
After this inspection, unnecessary diag-
nostic trouble code No. might be dis-
played.
I Erase the stored memory in ECM
and TCM (Transmission Control
Module).
Refer to “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION” (EC-63)
and “HOW TO ERASE DTC” in AT
section.
I Erase the store memory in ABS/TCS
control unit. Refer to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR ABS/TCS C/U
SIGNAL”, EC-499 or refer to
(“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”, HOW TO
ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS”) in BR section.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-94
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION ADJUST-
MENT
Note:
I Never adjust throttle adjust screw (TAS).
I Do not touch throttle drum when checking “CLSD THL/P
SW” signal or “continuity”, doing so may cause an incor- GI
rect adjustment.
1. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature. MA
2. Check FI cam. Refer to procedure .
3. Stop engine.
SEF246F Note: If handy vacuum pump is a already set, go to step 7. EM
4. Remove the vacuum hose connected to the throttle opener.
5. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the
throttle opener as shown in the figure. LC
6. Apply vacuum [more than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81
inHg)] until the throttle drum become free from the rod of the
throttle opener. During the TPS adjustment the vacuum should
be applied.
7. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
8. Turn ignition switch “ON”. FE
9. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
10. Select “CLSD THL/P SW” from the menu.
SEF793W 11. Read “CLSD THL/P SW” signal under the following con- AT
ditions.
I Insert 0.2 mm (0.008 in) feeler gauge between throttle
adjust screw and throttle drum as shown in the figure PD
and check the following.
I Open throttle valve and then close.
I “CLSD THL/P SW” signal should remain “OFF” FA
when the throttle valve is closed. (If signal is “ON”,
turn throttle position sensor body counterclock-
wise until the signal switches to “OFF”.)
RA
12. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and BR
SEF402W
stop it when “CLSD THL/P SW” signal switches
from “OFF” to “ON”, then tighten sensor body fix-
ing bolts. ST
13. Make sure the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is
closed and “OFF” when it is opened. Repeat it 2 or 3
times. RS
14. Remove 0.2 mm (0.008 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.3
mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge and check the following.
Make sure the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle BT
valve is closed. Repeat it 2 or 3 times.
15. Tighten throttle position sensor.
Check that the “CLOSED THL/SW” signal remains HA
“OFF” while closing throttle valve. If NG, repeat from the
SEF975Z
step 4.
After this adjustment, go to procedure RESET EL
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
MEMORY.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IDX
8. Disconnect closed throttle position sensor harness con-
nector.
9. Connect tester prove to the closed throttle position
switch terminals q 6 and q 8 and check continuity under
the following conditions.
SEF976Z
EC-95
I Insert the 0.2 mm (0.008 in) feeler gauge between the
throttle adjust screw and throttle drum as shown in the
figure and check the following.
I Open throttle valve then close.
I The continuity should not exist while closing the
throttle valve. If the continuity exists, turn throttle
position sensor body counterclockwise until the
continuity does not exist.
10. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
I Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and
stop it when the continuity comes to exist, then
SEF403W
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
11. Make sure the continuity exists when the throttle valve
is closed and continuity does not exist when it is
opened. Repeat it 2 or 3 times.
12. Remove 0.2 mm (0.008 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.3
mm (0.012 in) feeler gauge and check the following.
Make sure the continuity does not exist when the
throttle valve is closed. Repeat it 2 or 3 times.
13. Tighten throttle position sensor.
Check that the continuity does not exist while closing
the throttle valve. If NG, repeat from the step 5.
After this adjustment, go to procedure RESET
SEF300T THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
MEMORY.
EC-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — General Description
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Inspection

Priority Chart
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following prior-
ity chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)
GI
1 I ECM (P0605, 0301) I Vehicle speed sensor I Engine coolant temperature sensor
(P0500, 0104) (P0115, 0103) (P0125, 0908) MA
I Mass air flow sensor I Intake air temperature sensor I Ignition signal circuit (P1320, 0201)
(P0100, 0102) (P0110, 0401)
EM
I Throttle position sensor (P0120, I Knock sensor (P0325, 0304), I Park/Neutral position switch
0403) (P0330, 0212) (P1706, 1003)
I EGRC-solenoid (P1400, 1005) I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) I Camshaft position sensor (P0340, LC
circuit (P0335, 0802) (P1336, 0101)
0905)
I A/T communication line (P0600, I Fuel tank temperature sensor
0504), (P1605, 0804) (P0180, 0402)
2 I EGR temperature sensor (P1401, I Heated oxygen sensors 2 (rear) I EVAP control system pressure FE
0305) (P0137 - P0140) (0150 - 0152, sensor (P0450, 0704)
0707), (P0157 - P0160) (0313 -
0315, 0708) AT
I A/T related sensors, solenoid I Heated oxygen sensors 1 heater I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
valves and switches (P0705 - (front) (P0135, 0901) (P0155, (P1491, 0311) (P1490, 0807)
P0725, 1101 - 1208) (P0740, 1108 1001)
PD
- 1206)
I Absolute pressure sensor (P0105, I Closed throttle position switch I EVAP canister vent control valve FA
0803) (P0510, 0203) (P0446, 0903) (P1446, 0215)
(P1448, 0309)
I MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve I Intake valve timing control position I EVAP canister purge volume con-
RA
(P1105, 1302) sensor circuit (P1140, 1303), trol valve (P1444, 0214) (P0443,
(P1145, 1304) 1008)
BR
I Tandem throttle position sensor I Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) I EVAP control system purge flow
(P1125, 0110) (P0130 - P0134, 0303, 0409 - monitoring (P1447, 0111)
0412) (P0150 - P0154, 0413 - ST
0415, 0503, 0509)
I Secondary throttle position sensor I Heated oxygen sensors 2 heater I EVAP canister purge control valve/
(P1120, 0406) (rear) (P0141, 0902), (P0161, solenoid valve (P1493, 0312), RS
1002) (P1492, 0807)
3 I EGR function (P0400, 0302) I TCS signal (P1210, 0106) I Fuel pump control module (FPCM) BT
(P1402, 0514) (P1220, 1305)
I EVAP control system (SMALL I Misfire (P0300 - P0308, 0701 - I Fuel injection system function
LEAK) (P0440, 0705) (P1440, 0601) (P0172, 0114), (P0171, 0115), HA
0213) (GROSS LEAK) (P0455, (P0175, 0209), (P0174, 0210)
0715)
EL
I EGRC-BPT valve function I Closed loop control I Three way catalyst function
(P0402, 0306) (P1148, 0307) (P1168, 0308) (P0420, 0702) (P0430, 0703)
I IACV-AAC valve I A/T function (P0731 - P0734, 1103 I Intake valve timing control function IDX
(P0505, 0205) - 1106) (P0744, 1107) (P1110, 0805), (P1135, 1301)
EC-97
Fail-Safe Chart
The ECM enters fail-safe mode, if any of the following malfunctions are detected due to the open or short cir-
cuit.
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No.
CONSULT-II Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM*
GST
P0100 0102 Mass air flow sensor cir- Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
cuit
P0115 0103 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time
ture sensor circuit after turning ignition switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided

Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or

40°C (104°F)
Start
More than 4 minutes after ignition Start 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)

Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
P0120 0403 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the amount of mass air flow
circuit and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P1210 0106 TCS signal circuit TCS does not operate.

For details, refer to BR section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR TCS”).
Unable to Unable to ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
access ECM access Diag- The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
nostic Test When the fail-safe system activates, i.e. if the ECM detects a malfunction
Mode II condition in the CPU of ECM, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on
the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However, it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with ECM fail-safe
When the fail-safe system is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel
pump operation, IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are
controlled under certain limitations.
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm.
Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset value.
Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running and

Fuel pump
“OFF” when engine stalls.
Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condition) when
Cooling fans
engine is running, and “OFF” when engine stalls.
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.

*: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
EC-98
Symptom Matrix Chart

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
GI
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

SYSTEM
MA
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Basic engine control system Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
EM
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
OVERCOOLS
LC
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM 1P 1X HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 EC-523
Fuel pressure regulator system 2 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-37
Injector circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-515 FE
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-26
Air Positive crankcase ventilation system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-36
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-42 AT
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-340
IACV-FICD solenoid circuit 3 2 3 3 2 EC-527
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-42 PD
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-399
EGR EGRC-solenoid valve 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-412
EGR system 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 EC-423 FA
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 EC-118
Cooling Cooling fan circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 EC-503
Air conditioner circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 HA section RA
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-99
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM




SYSTEM
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine control system Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
OVERCOOLS
Engine con- Camshaft position sensor circuit 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 EC-275
trol Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-124
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit (front) 2 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-196, 166
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 EC-145, 161
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-150
Incorrect throttle position sensor adjust-
2 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 EC-91
ment
Intake valve timing control system 3 3 3 3 3 EC-367, 382
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-335
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 EC-267
ECM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-355, 98
Start signal circuit 2 EC-521
Park/Neutral position switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-494
FPCM 2 2 2 2 2 EC-393
Power steering oil pressure switch circuit 2 3 3 EC-527
EC-100
Symptom Matrix Chart (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM



GI


SYSTEM
MA
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
— Engine mechanical & other Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERCHARGING
ENGINE STALL
EM
OVERCOOLS
LC
Fuel Fuel tank 5 FE section
Fuel piping 2 5 5 2 5 5 5
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
FE
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, Low
octane) —
Air Air duct 5
Air cleaner
AT
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle body) 5 5 5 5 5 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire 5 5 5 5 5 FE section PD
Air leakage from intake manifold/
—
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FA
Alternator circuit
EL section
Starter circuit
3
Theft warning circuit RA
PNP switch 4 AT section
Drive plate 6 EM section
Engine Cylinder head BR
Cylinder head gasket 4
Cylinder block
6
Piston
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ST
Piston ring
Connecting rod
EM section
Bearing RS
Crankshaft 6
Valve Timing chain 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
mechanism Camshaft 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BT
Intake valve
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/Gasket
Three way catalytic converter
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
EM section &
FE section
HA
Lubrication Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil filter/Oil
gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
EL
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap LC section
Thermostat 5 5 2
Water pump IDX
5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery
Cooling fan 5 5 2 EC section
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated coolant MA section
IVIS (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System — NATS) EC-69 or EL
1 1
section
EC-101

Mode
Remarks:
I Specification data are reference values.
I Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data
in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the
ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor (POS) and other ignition timing related sensors.
I If the real-time diagnosis results are NG and the on board diagnostic system results are OK when diagnosing the mass air flow
sensor, first check to see if the fuel pump control circuit is normal.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CMPS⋅RPM (POS) I Tachometer: Connect Almost the same speed as the CON-
I Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II value. SULT-II value.
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 1.7V
MAS AIR/FL SE I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
I Shift lever: “N”
I No-load 2,500 rpm Approx. 2.1V
COOLAN TEMP/S I Engine: After warming up More than 82°C (180°F)
HO2S1 (B1)
.................................. 0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) LEAN ) RICH
.................................. Changes more than 5 times
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) during 10 seconds.
HO2S2 (B1)
.................................. 0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) Revving engine from idle to 2,000 rpm
I Engine: After warming up quickly
HO2S2 MNTR (B1)
.................................. LEAN ) RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
VHCL SPEED SE I Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CONSULT-II Almost the same speed as
value the CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
I Engine: After warming up
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL POS SEN I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg,
−11.81 inHg) of vacuum is applied to
the throttle opener with a handy Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
vacuum pump.

THRTL/P SEN2 (Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully open 4.3 - 4.7V
EGR TEMP SEN I Engine: After warming up Less than 4.5V
START SIGNAL I Ignition switch: ON , START , ON OFF , ON , OFF
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: Idle position ON
(Engine stopped)
CLSD THL POS I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg,
the throttle opener with a handy Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
vacuum pump.
Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF
AIR COND SIG I Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine Air conditioner switch: “ON” ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON
P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF
Steering wheel in neutral position OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL I Engine: After warming up, idle the (forward direction)
engine
The steering wheel is turned ON
Ambient air temperature more than ON
23.5°C (74°F)
AMB TEMP SW I Engine: Running
Ambient air temperature less than OFF
20.5°C (69°F)
Rear window defogger or headlamp ON
LOAD SIGNAL I Engine: Running “ON”
Except above OFF
A/C pressure is more than 1,422 - 1,618 ON
kPa (14.5 - 16.5 kg/cm2, 206 - 235 psi)
A/C PRESS SW I Engine: Running
A/C pressure is less than 1,128 - 1,422 OFF
kPa (11.5 - 14.5 kg/cm2, 164 - 206 psi)
Note: B1 indicates Left bank, B2 indicates Right bank.
EC-102
Mode (Cont’d)
IGNITION SW I Ignition switch: ON , OFF ON , OFF
INJ PULSE-B1 Idle 2.4 - 3.2 msec.
.................................. I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” GI
INJ PULSE-B2 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.8 msec.
I No-load
B/FUEL SCHDL ditto

Idle 1.0 - 1.6 msec MA
2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
Idle 15° BTDC
IGN TIMING ditto
2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
EM
Idle 0 - 10 step
IACV-AAC/V ditto
2,000 rpm —
LC
A/F ALPHA-B1
.................................. I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 50 - 159%
A/F ALPHA-B2
EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V
AIR COND RLY I Air conditioner switch: OFF , ON OFF , ON
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second)
ON
FE
FUEL PUMP RLY I Engine running and cranking
Except as shown above OFF
INT/V SOL-B1 I Engine is running

OFF , ON (Using “INT/V TIM-B1(-2)”,
AT
.................................. I Engine speed is more than 2,000 rpm
the difference of degree between “OFF”
I Quickly depressed accelerator pedal.
INT/V SOL-B2 and “ON” is approximately 20 deg.)
I Vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
PD
INT/V TIM-B1
.................................. I Engine is running Advanced angle (degree signal) of the
intake camshaft should be displayed.
INT/V TIM-B2 FA
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
I After warming up engine, idle the

Engine coolant temperature is between RA
95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) at
COOLING FAN engine. HIGH
vehicle speed less than 80 km/h (50
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
MPH)
BR
HIGH
(221°F) or more
Idle OFF (Cut) ST
EGRC SOL/V
I Shift lever: “D” Revving engine up from idle to 3,000
ON (Flow)
I No-load rpm
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF RS
HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Engine speed: Idle ON
..................................
I Engine speed: Above 3,200 rpm
HO2S1 HTR (B2) OFF
BT
HO2S2 HTR (B1) I Engine speed: Idle [after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h (43 MPH) or more] ON
.................................. I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
OFF
HO2S2 HTR (B2) I Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) HA
VC/V BYPASS/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
Idle OFF
PURG CONT S/V I Engine: After warming up EL
2,000 rpm ON
Idle 13.0 - 32%
CAL/LD VALUE
I Shift lever: “N” IDX
2,500 rpm 13.0 - 25.5%
I No-load
I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve fully closed 0.0%
(Engine stopped)
ABSOL TH⋅P/S I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg,
the throttle opener with a handy Throttle valve fully opened Approx. 88%
vacuum pump.
EC-103
Mode (Cont’d)
Idle 3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
2,500 rpm 12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/s
I No-load
I Within 16 seconds after starting engine, when engine coolant temperature is
FPCM HIGH , LOW
more than 100°C (212°F)
I Within 16 seconds after starting engine, when engine coolant temperature is
FPCM D/R VOLT Approx. 5V , Approx. 0.4V
I For 5 seconds after starting engine BARO
MAP/BARO SW/V I More than 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”
MAP
I More than 5 seconds after starting engine
For 5 seconds after starting engine Approx. 4.4V
ABSOL PRES/SE I Engine: After warming up More than 5 seconds after starting
Approx. 1.2V
engine
EC-104

Mode
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
(Select “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” with CONSULT-II.)
GI
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH⋅P/S, CLSD THL/P SW
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH⋅P/S” and “CLSD THL/P SW” when depressing the
accelerator pedal with the ignition switch “ON”. MA
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH⋅P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL/P SW” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
EM
LC
FE
SEF877X
AT
CMPS⋅RPM (POS), MAS AIR/FL SE, THRTL POS SEN, HO2S2 (B1), (B2), HO2S1 (B1), (B2),
INJ PULSE
PD
Below is the data for “CMPS⋅RPM (POS)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE”, “THRTL POS SEN”, “HO2S2 (B1), (B2)”, “HO2S1
(B1), (B2)” and “INJ PULSE” when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up
engine to normal operating temperature. FA
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
SEF878XA
IDX
EC-105
Mode (Cont’d)
SEF242YA
EC-106
ECM Terminals and Reference Value

PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind right side front pillar lower garnish. For
this inspection, remove the glove box.
GI
MA
SEF408W EM
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
LC
FE
AEC913
AT
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connectors con-
nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily. PD
I Open harness securing clip to make resting easier.
I Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
I Data is for comparison and may not be exact. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SEF367I
ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
EL
IDX
SEF218U
EC-107
ECM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground.
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition)
Idle speed
1 R/B Injector No. 1
2 R/W Injector No. 8
3 R/Y Injector No. 7
SEF388X
14 R/L Injector No. 3
4 W/R Injector No. 6 BATTERY VOLTAGE
5 PU/R Injector No. 5 (11 - 14V)
6 GY/L Injector No. 4
7 LG Injector No. 2
Engine is running.
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF526Y
Lift up drive wheels and rev engine from idle 0 - 0.7V

10 L/Y EGRC-solenoid valve to 3,000 rpm in “D” position.
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Idle speed (11 - 14V)
8 GY/L
11 PU Engine is running.
IACV-AAC valve 0.1 - 14V
12 G/Y Idle speed
13 Y
Engine is cranking. Approximately 0.4V
15 R/L Fuel pump control module Engine is running.
Approximately 12V
Idle speed
Engine is running.
Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - 0.5V
16 L/Y heater (front) (bank 2) Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
17 G/W Heated oxygen sensor 1 Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
heater (front) (bank 1)
Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. (11 - 14V)
EC-108
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
0 - 0.5V
GI
At idle [after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h (43
Heated oxygen sensor 2 MPH) or more]
18 Y/R heater (rear) (bank 2)
Ignition switch “ON” MA
19 L Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (rear) (bank 1) Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine is running. (11 - 14V) EM
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
20 P/B
EVAP canister vent con-
Ignition switch “ON”
BATTERY VOLTAGE LC
trol valve (11 - 14V)
Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
EVAP canister purge con-
22 Y
trol solenoid valve Engine is running.
Approximately 0V FE
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
Engine is running.
Approximately 0V
AT
Intake valve timing control Intake valve timing control solenoid is operat-
24 BR/Y solenoid valve (right bank) ing.
25 BR Intake valve timing control Engine is running. PD
solenoid valve (left bank)
Intake valve timing control solenoid is not Battery voltage
operating. FA
(11 - 14V)
34 LG Cooling fan relay-2 Cooling fan is not operating. RA
27 LG/R Cooling fan relay-1 and -3 Engine is running.
0 - 1V
Cooling fan is operating. BR
28 BR/Y
Engine is running. 0 - 0.4V or
29 G EVAP canister purge vol-
BATTERY VOLTAGE ST
35 G/OR ume control valve Idle speed (11 - 14V)
36 L/B
Ignition switch “ON” RS
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
“ON” Approximately 0V
Engine is running. BT
MAP/BARO switch sole-
41 W For 5 seconds after starting engine
noid valve
Engine is running. HA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Idle speed (For 5 minutes after starting
(11 - 14V)
engine) EL
More than 5 seconds after starting engine
0 - 1V
IDX
For 5 second after turning ignition switch “ON”
42 B/P Fuel pump relay Engine is running.
Ignition switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE

5 second after turning ignition switch “ON” (11 - 14V)
EC-109
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0.38V
Engine is running.
Idle speed
43 Y/R Ignition signal (No. 1)
44 G/R Ignition signal (No. 8)
46 L/R Ignition signal (No. 7)
SEF538T
47 GY Ignition signal (No. 3)
50 PU/W Ignition signal (No. 6) Approximately 0.55V
51 GY/R Ignition signal (No. 5)
53 W/R Ignition signal (No. 4)
54 R/L Ignition signal (No. 2)
Engine is running.
SEF539T
Vacuum cut valve bypass BATTERY VOLTAGE

45 LG/B Ignition switch “ON”
valve (11 - 14V)
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0.1V
48 PU/W Malfunction indicator lamp Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine is running.
Both air conditioner switch and blower switch 0 - 1V

49 B/R Air conditioner relay are “ON”.
Air conditioner switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V)
Approximately 7V
Engine is running.
Idle speed
SEF540T
52 W/G Tachometer
Approximately 0 - 14V
SEF541T
EC-110
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0.6 - 1.0V
GI
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition) MA

Idle speed
EM
SEF389X
55 Crankshaft position sen- LC
P
58 sor (REF) Approximately 0.8 - 0.9V
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. FE
AT
SEF390X
BATTERY VOLTAGE
56 W/L Power supply (Back-up) Ignition switch “OFF” PD
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 1.7V
(AC voltage) FA
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition) RA

Idle speed
BR
Crankshaft position sen-

SEF391X ST
57 B/R
sor (OBD) Approximately 0V
( — ) RS
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition) BT

HA
SEF546T EL
IDX
EC-111
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 2.5V
Idle speed
SEF547T
59 L
(POS) Approximately 2.4V
SEF548T
Ignition switch “ON” (Warmed-up condition)*

Approximately 0.5V
Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal released
61 L/W
signal Ignition switch “ON” (Warmed-up condition)*
Approximately 4.2V
Accelerator pedal fully depressed
Mass air flow sensor Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition)

62 B Approximately 0V
ground Idle speed
0.15 - 0.85V
Accelerator pedal fully released
63 G Throttle position sensor
Ignition switch “ON” (Warmed-up condition)
3.5 - 4.7V
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch

“ON” Approximately 4.4V
Engine is running.
64 W Absolute pressure sensor
For 5 seconds after starting engine
Approximately 1.2V
1.0 - 1.4V
Idle speed
65 W Mass air flow sensor
Approximately 2.1V
*: More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg) of vacuum is applied to the throttle opener with a handy vacuum pump.
EC-112
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 3.4V GI
Approximately 3 seconds after ignition switch
Secondary throttle posi- “ON” and thereafter
66 L
tion sensor Ignition switch “ON” MA
Approximately 0.4V
Disconnect throttle motor harness connector.
Fully close secondary throttle valve by hand.
0 - 4.8V
EM
Engine coolant tempera- Output voltage varies with
67 Y/B Engine is running.
ture sensor engine coolant tempera-
LC
ture.
Approximately 5.2V
Engine is running.
68 P/L Vehicle speed sensor
FE
Jack up rear wheels and run engine at idle in
“D” position.
AT
SEF542T
0 - 4.8V
PD
Intake air temperature
69 W/PU Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
sensor
intake air temperature.
FA
Approximately 0V
RA
Engine is running.
Idle speed BR
Intake valve timing control ST

position sensor (right SEF551T
70 R/L
bank)
71 L/W Approximately 0V
Intake valve timing control RS
position sensor (left bank)
Engine is running. BT
HA
SEF552T
EL
Engine is running.
0V
Headlamp switch is “OFF”.
72 R/Y Headlamp switch IDX
Engine is running.
Battery voltage
Headlamp switch is “ON”.
EC-113
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 5V
73 R TCS signal Ignition switch “ON”

Approximately 0V
Ignition switch “ON” (Warmed-up condition)* BATTERY VOLTAGE
Accelerator pedal released (11 - 14V)
Closed throttle position
74 GY/L
switch Ignition switch “ON” (Warmed-up condition)
Approximately 0V
Accelerator pedal depressed
Less than 4.5V
Idle speed
75 W EGR temperature sensor
0 - 1.0V
EGR system is operating.
Engine is running.
Ambient air temperature is more than 23.5°C Approximately 5V

Ambient air temperature (74°C)
76 L/R
switch Engine is running.
Ambient air temperature is less than 20.5°C 0V

(69°F)
Ignition switch “OFF” 0V
78 W Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
Engine is running.
0V
Rear window defogger switch is “OFF”.
Headlamp switch is “OFF”.
79 L/R Electrical load signal
Engine is running.
Battery voltage
Rear window defogger switch is “ON”.
Headlamp switch is “ON”.
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 0V
80 SB Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
Ignition switch “START”
(11 - 14V)
Air conditioner pressure Engine is running.

81 G/B Approximately 5V
switch At idle speed
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Engine is running.
82 R (front) (bank 2) 0 - Approximately 1.0V
83 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 After warming up to normal operating tem- (periodically change)
(front) (bank 1) perature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Engine is running.

89 W (rear) (bank 2)
After warming up to normal operating tem- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
90 Y Heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear) (bank 1) perature and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
*: More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg) of vacuum is applied to the throttle opener with a handy vacuum pump.
EC-114
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Fuel tank temperature GI
91 R/L Engine is running. Output voltage varies with
sensor
fuel temperature.
EVAP control system
92 LG
pressure sensor
Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 3.4V MA
When cranking the engine Approximately 0V
Fuel pump control module
93 G/R
(FPCM) check
EM
After starting the engine Approximately 5V
98 BR/W Sensor’s power supply Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V

LC
A/T communication line Engine is running.
99 R/L Approximately 2V
(LAN) Idle speed
Engine is running.
0 - 1.5V
Steering wheel is being turned.
100 G
Power steering oil pres- FE
sure switch Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Steering wheel is not being turned. (11 - 14V)
AT
Approximately 0V
Gear position is “N” or “P”.
101 G/OR PNP switch PD
Approximately 5V
Except the above gear position
FA
105 W Knock sensor (LH) Engine is running.
2.0 - 3.0V
108 W Knock sensor (RH) Idle speed
RA
106 R Data link connector 6 - 10V
CONSULT-II or GST is disconnected.
BR
121 B Engine is running.
ECM ground Engine ground
122 B Idle speed
ST
123 W Current return
RS
Engine is running.
Ignition switch “OFF”
0 - 1V BT
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch
124 W/B ECM relay (Self-shutoff) “OFF”
Ignition switch “OFF” HA
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF” EL
125 Engine is running.
B ECM ground Engine ground
126 Idle speed IDX
B ECM ground Engine ground
128 Idle speed
129 B Sensor’s ground 0V
Idle speed
EC-115
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
130 BATTERY VOLTAGE
R/G Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “ON”
131 (11 - 14V)
EC-116
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Description
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the custom-
er’s complaint often do not recur on DTC (1st trip) visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I
occurrences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred GI
may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indi-
cate the specific problem area.
MA
Common I/I Report Situations
EM
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “1t”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
LC
IV (1st trip) DTC data does not appear during the DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
VI The TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
FE
Diagnostic Procedure
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION” (EC-63).
AT
H
Check ground terminals. Refer to “Circuit Inspection”, “GROUND INSPECTION” (GI section).
PD
H
FA
Perform “Incident Simulation Tests” (GI section).
RA
H
Check connector terminals. Refer to “How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal” (GI section). BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-117
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
TEC040M
EC-118
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC014M
EC-119
(Cont’d)
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
56 W/L Power supply (Back-up) Ignition switch “OFF”
(11 - 14V)
Engine is running.
121 B ECM ground Engine ground
Idle speed
Engine is running.
Idle speed
123 W Current return
Engine is running.
0 - 1V
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF”
Engine is running.
Idle speed
Engine is running.
Idle speed
Engine is running.
Idle speed
130 BATTERY VOLTAGE
131 (11 - 14V)
EC-120
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H GI
Start engine. Yes Go to “CHECK
E
Is engine running? POWER SUPPLY-II” on
No
next page. MA
SEF961X H EM
CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Yes Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
E
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. NOSIS FOR P1320”, EC-399.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” LC
3. Turn ignition switch to “START”
for at least 5 seconds.
Is the (1st trip) DTC P1320
detected?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- FE
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”
for at least 5 seconds.
SEF370U 2. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode AT
II (Self-diagnostic results)” with
ECM.
Is the DTC 0201 detected? PD
No
FA
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-I. NG Check the following.
E
I Harness connectors
RA
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal M49 , F63
q78 and ground with CONSULT-II or I 15A fuse
tester. I Harness for open or
BR
Voltage: Battery voltage short between ECM and
fuse
OK
If NG, repair harness or
ST
connectors.
H RS
Go to “CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT”,
on EC-123.
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-121
(Cont’d)
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II. NG Check the following.

E
1. Stop engine. I Harness connectors
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals F2 , E13
q
56 , 123 and ground with CONSULT-II I Harness connectors
or tester. F1 , E14
Voltage: Battery voltage I 7.5A fuse
I 10A fuse
OK
I Harness for open or
SEF371U
short between ECM and
battery
connectors.
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-III. OK Go to “CHECK ECM
E
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then turn RELAY” on next page.
“OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals
130 , 131 and ground with CON-
SEF372U SULT-II or tester.

Voltage: Case-1: Battery voltage does
After turning ignition switch “OFF”, not exist.
battery voltage will exist for a few Case-2: Battery voltage exists
seconds, then drop to approximately for more than a few
0V. seconds.
NG
Case-2 Go to “CHECK ECM

Case-1 E
RELAY” on next page.
SEF393WB
H
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY NG Repair open circuit or short
E
BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM. to ground or short to power
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. in harness or connectors.
2. Disconnect ECM relay.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM
terminals 130 , 131 and terminal q3 .
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to
ground and short to power.
OK
SEF890V
H
CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN ECM NG Check the following.
E
RELAY AND GROUND. I Harness for open or
1. Check voltage between terminals q
2 , short between ECM relay
q5 and ground with CONSULT-II or and harness connector
tester. F2
Voltage: Battery voltage If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF891V
EC-122
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
GI
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair open circuit or short
E
1. Check harness continuity between ECM to ground or short to power
terminal 124 and relay terminal q 1 . in harness or connectors. MA
SEF892V ground and short to power. EM
OK
H
LC
CHECK ECCS RELAY. NG Replace ECM relay.
E
1. Apply 12V direct current between relay
terminals q
1 and q 2 .
2. Check continuity between relay termi-
nals q
3 and q 5 ,q6 and q 7 .
FE
12V (q1 -q 2 ) applied:
Continuity exists.
No voltage applied: AT
SEC202B No continuity
OK
PD
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
FA
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground F61 , F62
screws. I Harness for open or
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. short between engine
RA
4. Check harness continuity between ECM grounds F24 and F25
terminals 121 , 122 , 125 , 126 , If NG, repair open circuit or
127 , 128 and engine ground. short to power in harness
BR
SEF461U
Continuity should exist. or connectors.
If OK, check harness for short to power.
ST
OK
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR RS
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
BT
H
INSPECTION END
HA
EL
IDX
EC-123
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0100
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS)

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric
current from the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled
by the ECM a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film
is reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to the hot
SEF260Q film as air flow increases. This maintains the temperature of the hot
film. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Specification data are reference values.
I Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 1.7V
MAS AIR/FL SE
I No-load 2,500 rpm Approximately 2.1V
I Engine: After warming up Idle 13.0 - 32%

CAL/LD VALUE
I No-load 2,500 rpm 13.0 - 25.5%
I Engine: After warming up Idle 3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/s

MASS AIRFLOW
I No-load 2,500 rpm 12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/s

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
1.0 - 1.7V
Idle speed
65 W Mass air flow sensor
Approximately 2.1V
Mass air flow sensor Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition)
62 B Approximately 0V
ground Idle speed
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC

Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P0100 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM
0102 when engine is not running.* I Harness or connectors
........................................................................................................ (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
C) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under light I Mass air flow sensor
load driving conditions.
B) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM*
I Harness or connectors
when engine is running.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
........................................................................................................
I Intake air leaks
D) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under heavy
I Mass air flow sensor
load driving conditions.
*: When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. (Refer to EC-98.)
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
EC-124
Mass Air Flow Sensor (MAFS) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first.
If 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for
malfunction B”. GI
If there is problem in “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform
“Procedure for malfunction C”. If there is no problem on “Pro-
cedure for malfunction C”, perform “Procedure for malfunc- MA
tion D”.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. EM
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition LC
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
FE
AT
Procedure for malfunction A
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
PD
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Wait at least 6 seconds. FA
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, EC-129.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
RA
BR
SEF399X
Procedure for malfunction B ST

3) Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most. RS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BT
HA
SEF400X
EL
IDX
EC-125
Procedure for malfunction C
NOTE:
If the engine will not start or stop soon, wait at least 10 sec-
onds with engine off (ignition switch “ON”), instead of running
3) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
4) Wait at least 10 seconds at idle speed.
SEF261Y 5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-126
Procedure for malfunction D
2) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to nor-
mal operating temperature.
If engine cannot be started, go to “DIAGNOSTIC GI
PROCEDURE, EC-129.
4) Check the voltage of MAS AIR/FL SE with “DATA MONI- MA
TOR”.
5) Increases engine speed to about 4,000 rpm.
6) Monitor the linear voltage rise in response to engine EM
speed increases.
If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-129.
If OK, go to following step. LC
7) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con-
secutive seconds.
CMPS-RPM (POS): More than 2,000 rpm
THRTL POS SEN: More than 3V
Selector lever: Suitable position
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased FE
engine load) will help maintain
the driving conditions required
for this test. AT
SEF697TA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PD
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the mass air flow
sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be con- FA
firmed.
RA
Procedure for malfunction D
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- BR
SEF534P perature.
3) Select “MODE 1” with GST.
4) Check the mass air flow with “MODE 1”. ST
5) Check for linear mass air flow rise in response to
increases to about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
6) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-130. RS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- BT
perature.
3) Check the voltage between ECM terminal q 65 and
ground. HA
SEF375U
4) Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to
about 4,000 rpm in engine speed.
5) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-130. EL
IDX
EC-127
TEC015M
EC-128
If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction A
or C, perform “Procedure A” below. If the trouble is duplicated
after “Procedure for malfunction B or D”, perform “Procedure
B” on next page. GI
Procedure A
INSPECTION START MA
H
SEF395W EM
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground
screws.
LC
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. E Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness for open or
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor har- short between mass air
ness connector. flow sensor and ECM FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness for open or
4. Check voltage between terminal q3 and short between mass air
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. flow sensor and ECM
SEF377U Voltage: Battery positive voltage relay
AT
OK connector.
PD
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Repair harness or connec-
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. tors. FA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ter-
minal q2 and ECM terminal q 62 . RA
OK BR
SEF536P
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Repair harness or connec- ST
Check harness continuity between termi- tors.
nal q
1 and ECM terminal q 65 .
If OK, check harness for short to ground RS
and short to power.
OK
BT
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace mass air flow sen-
(Mass air flow sensor). sor. HA
SEF378U EC-131.
OK EL
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. IDX
H
INSPECTION END
SEF379U
EC-129
Procedure B
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM E Reconnect or repair.
Check the followings for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between intake air duct
to collector
If disconnected, reconnect the parts or repair.
SEF395W
OK
H
screws.
H
NG
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness for open or short
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness between mass air flow
connector. sensor and ECM
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness for open or short
4. Check voltage between terminal q3 and between mass air flow
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. sensor and ECM relay
SEF377U Voltage: Battery positive voltage If NG, repair harness or con-
nector.
OK
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Repair harness or connec-
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. tors.
3. Check harness continuity between termi-
nal q
2 and ECM terminal q 62 .
OK
H
NG
SEF536P CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Repair harness or connec-
Check harness continuity between terminal tors.
q1 and ECM terminal q 65 .
If OK, check harness for short to ground and
short to power.
OK
H
NG
(Mass air flow sensor). sor.
next page.
OK
H
SEF378U Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
H
INSPECTION END
SEF379U
EC-130
Mass air flow sensor
2. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal q 65 and ground. GI
Conditions Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Less than 1.0 MA
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating tem-
1.0 - 1.7
perature.)
SEF743W EM
2,500 rpm Approximately 2.1
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0
LC
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increase to about 4,000 rpm in engine
speed.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow

sensor harness connector and connect it again. Repeat above
check.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot FE
film for damage or dust.
SEF301T
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-131
Absolute Pressure Sensor

The absolute pressure sensor is connected to the MAP/BARO
switch solenoid valve by a hose. The sensor detects ambient baro-
metric pressure and intake manifold pressure and sends the volt-
age signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage
rises.
SEF327V
SEF946S
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Diagnostic Trouble Check Items
Malfunction is detected when ....
Code No. (Possible Cause)
P0105 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sen- I Harness or connectors
0803 sor is sent to ECM. (Absolute pressure sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
I Absolute pressure sensor
B) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM I Hoses
under light load driving conditions. (Hoses between the intake manifold and absolute
pressure sensor are disconnected or clogged.)
I Intake air leaks
I MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
C) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM I Absolute pressure sensor
under heavy load driving conditions.

PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
If the 1st trip DTC is not confirmed on “Procedure for malfunc-
tion B”, perform “Procedure for malfunction C”.
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
the next test.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
EC-132
Absolute Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
3) Wait at least 6 seconds.
PROCEDURE”, EC-136. GI
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MA
SEF392X EM
Procedure for malfunction B
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- LC
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR”
4) Start engine and let it idle.
5) Wait at least 15 seconds. FE
SEF261Y --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
Procedure for malfunction C ST

CAUTION:
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. RS
The voltage of “ABSOL PRES/SE” should be more than
1.74 [V]. BT
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, EC-136. If the check result is OK, go to
following step. HA
SEF262Y 3) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to nor-
EL
5) Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds.
7) Drive the vehicle at least 3 consecutive seconds under
IDX
the following conditions,
B/FUEL SCHDL: More than 5.6 ms
CMPS-RPM (POS): 3,000 - 4,800 rpm
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
the driving conditions required
for this test.
EC-133
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the absolute
pressure sensor circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not
be confirmed.
2) Select “MAP” in “MODE 1” with GST.
3) Make sure that the pressure of “MAP” is more than 46
kPa (0.47 kg/cm2, 6.7 psi).
4) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-138.
SEF518R --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Make sure that the voltage between ECM terminal q 64
and engine ground is more than 1.74 [V].
SEF636U
EC-134
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC041M
EC-135
If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction A
or C”, perform “Procedure A” below. If the trouble is dupli-
cated after “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Proce-
dure B” on next page.
Procedure A
INSPECTION START
H
SEF383U
screws.
H
NG
2. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor short between ECM and
harness connector. absolute pressure sensor
3. Check sensor connector for water. If NG, repair or replace
Water should not exist. harness or connectors.
If OK, go to step 4. If NG, repair or
replace harness connector.
SEF377U 4. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
5. Check voltage between terminal q 3 and
engine ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- F63 , M49
minal q1 and engine ground. I Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. M4 , B3
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Joint connector-16
SEF095S OK short between ECM and
absolute pressure sensor
short between TCM
(Transmission control
module) and absolute
pressure sensor
short between absolute
pressure sensor and
TAC module
If NG, repair open circuit or
short to power in harness
or connectors.
H
SEF096S NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Repair harness or connec-
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. tors.
terminal q
64 and terminal q2 .
H OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF384U
EC-136
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace absolute pressure
(Absolute pressure sensor). sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, GI
EC-139.
OK
H
MA
EM
H
INSPECTION END
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-137
Procedure B
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE TO ABSO- E
CHECK VACUUM HOSE.
LUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. Check vacuum hose for
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal clogging, cracks, discon-
operating temperature. nection or improper con-
SEF385U 2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. nection.
3. Connect MAP/BARO switch solenoid If NG, repair or replace the
valve and absolute pressure sensor hose.
with a rubber tube that has vacuum
gauge. OK
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. H
5. Select “MAP/BARO SW/V” in Check vacuum port for
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with clogging.
CONSULT-II. If NG, clean it.
7. Touch “MAP” and “BARO” alter- OK
nately and check for vacuum. H
CHECK COMPONENT
MAP/BARO
SEF761X Vacuum (MAP/BARO switch sole-
SW/V
noid valve).
BARO Should not exist. Refer to “COMPONENT
MAP Should exist. INSPECTION” of
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR DTC P1105”, EC-358.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. OK NG
5. Start engine and check for
H
vacuum.
For 5 seconds after starting Replace
engine: MAP/BARO
Vacuum should not exist. switch sole-
6. More than 5 seconds after start- noid valve.
SEF109L ing engine.
Vacuum should exist.
H
OK
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.
Check intake system for air
leaks.
H
NG
CHECK HOSE BETWEEN ABSOLUTE E
Repair or reconnect hose.
PRESSURE SENSOR AND MAP/BARO
SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE.
2. Check hose for clogging, cracks, dis-
connection or improper connection.
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-138
q
A
H
NG
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” GI
below.
OK
H MA
EM
H
INSPECTION END
LC
FE
AT
PD
Absolute pressure sensor
1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector
connected. FA
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between
terminal q
64 and engine ground. RA
The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8V.
4. Use pump to apply vacuum of −26.7 kPa (−200 mmHg, −7.87
inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and BR
SEF359W
check the output voltage.
The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4V lower than the value
measured in step 3. ST
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. RS
I Do not apply below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg, −27.56 inHg)
or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor. BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-139
Intake Air Temperature Sensor

The intake air temperature sensor is mounted to the intake air duct.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor, which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
SEF050T
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature Voltage*
Resistance kΩ
°C (°F) (V)
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 1.23 0.27 - 0.38
* These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
q
69 (Intake air temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage.
SEF012P Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a
ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground.
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0110 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0401 sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
........................................................................................... I Intake air temperature sensor
B) Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor is sent to
ECM, compared with the voltage signal from engine
coolant temperature sensor.

PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first.
If 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for
malfunction B”.
NOTE:
the next test.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF399X
EC-140
Intake Air Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the GI
shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected to be
easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1) Wait until engine coolant temperature is less than 90°C MA
(194°F).
(a) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
SEF176Y (b) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EM
(c) Check the engine coolant temperature.
(d) If the engine coolant temperature is not less than
90°C (194°F), turn ignition switch “OFF” and cool LC
down engine.
I Perform the following steps before engine coolant tem-
perature is above 90°C (194°F).
4) Start engine and turn TCS switch “OFF”. FE
5) Hold vehicle speed more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) for
100 consecutive seconds.
SEF549P 6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-141
TEC042M
EC-142
INSPECTION START
H GI
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. E Repair harness or connec-
2. Disconnect intake air temperature sen- MA
sor harness connector.
4. Check voltage between terminal q 2
SEF051T and ground. EM
Voltage:
Approximately 5V
OK
LC
H
NG
Continuity should exist. M4 , B3 FE
If OK, check harness for short to I Joint connector-16
power. I Harness for open or
SEF321R OK intake air temperature
AT
sensor
short between air tem- PD
perature sensor and
throttle actuator control
(TAC) module
I Harness for open or FA
short between TCM
(Transmission Control
Module) and intake air RA
temperature sensor
or connectors. BR
SEF322R
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace intake air tem-
(Intake air temperature sensor).
E
perature sensor.
ST
next page.
RS
OK
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. BT
H
INSPECTION END
HA
EL
IDX
EC-143
Intake air temperature sensor
Check resistance as shown in the figure.
SEF947Q
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature
Resistance kΩ
°C (°F)
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
80 (176) 0.27 - 0.38
If NG, replace intake air temperature sensor.
SEF012P
EC-144
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ECTS)

The engine coolant temperature sensor is located near the No. 2
injector. The sensor is used to detect the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The GI
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor MA
decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K EM
<Reference data>
Engine coolant tempera- LC
Voltage* Resistance
ture
V kΩ
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
FE
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
q
67 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. AT
SEF012P CAUTION:
Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a PD
FA
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause)
No. RA
P0115 I An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0103 sent to ECM.* (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Engine coolant temperature sensor
BR
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
ST
Engine coolant temperature decided
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Condition
(CONSULT-II DISPLAY)
Engine coolant temperature will be determined Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
RS
by ECM based on the time after turning igni-
tion switch “ON” or “START”. More than 4 minutes after ignition Start 80°C (176°F)
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant tem- Except as shown above 40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F) BT
perature decided by ECM. (Depends on the time)
HA
EL
IDX
EC-145
(Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
SEF399X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-146
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC043M
EC-147
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
NG
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature F26 , F106
sensor harness connector. I Harness for open or
SEF052T 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. short between ECM and
4. Check voltage between terminal q2 and engine coolant tempera-
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. ture sensor
Voltage: If NG, repair harness or
Approximately 5V connectors.
OK
H
NG
2. Check harness continuity between ter- F26 , F106
Continuity should exist. F63 , M49
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Harness connectors
SEF541P M4 , B3
OK I Joint connector-16
engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
short between TCM
Module) and engine
coolant temperature sen-
sor
short between engine
SEF542P sor and throttle actuator
control (TAC) module
short to ground or short to
power in harness or con-
nectors.
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace engine coolant
(Engine coolant temperature sensor). temperature sensor.
next page.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-148
(Cont’d)
Check resistance as shown in the figure. GI
MA
SEF152P EM
<Reference data>
LC
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
FE
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
SEF012P
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-149
Throttle Position Sensor

NOTE: If DTC P0510 (0203) is displayed with DTC P0120, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC
P0510 first (See EC-346.).
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiom-
eter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal
to the ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This one controls engine operation such as fuel cut. The throttle position sensor unit has a built-in “Wide
open and closed throttle position switch”.
SEF121TA


(Engine stopped)
THRTL POS SEN I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg,
the throttle opener with a handy Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
vacuum pump.

I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve fully closed 0.0%
(Engine stopped)
ABSOL TH⋅P/S I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg,
the throttle opener with a handy Throttle valve fully opened Approx. 88%
vacuum pump.
EC-150
Throttle Position Sensor (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. GI
TER-
WIRE DATA
NO.
COLOR (DC voltage) MA
0.15 - 0.85V
Throttle position sensor Accelerator pedal fully released EM
63 G
signal Ignition switch “ON”
3.5 - 4.7V
Accelerator pedal fully depressed LC
98 BR/W Sensor’s power supply Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V

129 B Sensor’s ground 0V
Idle speed
*: More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 inHg) of vacuum is applied to the throttle opener with a handy vacuum pump FE
AT
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
PD
P0120 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is I Harness or connectors
0403 sent to ECM.* (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor FA
B) A high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under I Harness or connectors
light load driving condition. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
RA
I Fuel injector
I Camshaft position sensor
BR
C) A low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM under I Harness or connectors
heavy load driving condition. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.) ST
I Intake air leaks
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
RS
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Condition Driving condition BT

Throttle position will be determined based on the When engine is idling Normal
amount of mass air flow and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor. When accelerating Poor acceleration HA
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the DTC cannot EL

be confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”. If there
is no problem on “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform
“Procedure for malfunction C”. IDX
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
EC-151
CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that
battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
I This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is
expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
SEF264Y mode with CONSULT-II.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at
least 5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever: Suitable position except “P” or “N”
position
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. If idle
speed is over 1,100 rpm, maintain the following condi-
tions for at least 10 seconds to keep engine speed
below 1,100 rpm.
Selector lever: Suitable position except “P” or “N”
Brake pedal: depressed
Vehicle speed: 0 km/h (0 MPH)
SEF261Y 4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Procedure for malfunction C

perature.
4) Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
5) Select “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH⋅P/S” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF177Y
EC-152
6) Press RECORD on CONSULT-II screen at the same
time accelerator pedal is depressed.
7) Print out the recorded graph and check the following:
I The voltage rise is linear in response to accelerator
pedal depression.
I The voltage when accelerator pedal is fully depressed GI
is approximately 4V.
If OK, go to following step. MA
8) Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
9) Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 con- EM
secutive seconds.
CMPS-RPM (POS): More than 2,000 rpm
MAS AIR/FL SE: More than 3V LC
COOLAN TEMP/S: More than 70°C (158°F)
Driving location: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
the driving conditions required FE
for this test.
PROCEDURE”, EC-158. AT
SEF021P --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
secutive seconds. PD
Gear position: Suitable position
Engine speed: More than 2,000 rpm
Voltage between ECM terminal q 65 and 128 (ECM
FA
ground):
More than 3V
RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BR
SEF265Y
secutive seconds.
Gear position: Suitable position
Engine speed: More than 2,000 rpm ST
ground):
More than 3V RS
ground):
Less than 1.5V BT
2) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least
5 seconds and then turn “ON”.
3) Perform “DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE (Self-diagnostic HA
SEF351W results)” with ECM.
PROCEDURE”, EC-158. EL
IDX
EC-153
TEC044M
EC-154
If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction
A”, perform “Procedure A” below. If the trouble is duplicated
after “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure B”
on the next page. If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure
for malfunction C”, perform “Procedure C” on EC-158. GI
Procedure A
INSPECTION START MA
H
SEF053T EM
screws.
LC
H
NG
2. Disconnect throttle position sensor har-
ness connector.
ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEF119T
AT
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT.
NG
Check the following.
PD
E
minal q2 and engine ground. I Harness connectors FA
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Joint connector-16
OK short between throttle RA
position sensor and ECM
short between throttle
position sensor and TCM BR
SEF122T Module)
short between throttle ST
position sensor and
(TAC) module
RS
or connectors.
H
BT
NG
2. Check harness continuity between ECM HA
terminal q
SEF123T Continuity should exist.
ground and short to power. EL
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
E Replace throttle position IDX
(Throttle position sensor). sensor. To adjust it, per-
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, form “BASIC
EC-159. INSPECTION”, EC-91.
H OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF387U
EC-155
q
A
H
H
INSPECTION END
Procedure B
INSPECTION START
H
screws.
SEF119T
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor har- tors.
ness connector.
OK
H
qA
SEF053T (Go to next page.)
SEF122T
EC-156
q
A
H
NG
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors GI
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Joint connector-16 MA
OK short between throttle
SEF123T I Harness for open or EM
position sensor and TCM
Module) LC
position sensor and
(TAC) module
or connectors. FE
H
SEF387U CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
Repair harness or connec-
AT
E
terminal q
63 and terminal q1 . PD
OK
FA
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace throttle position
(Throttle position sensor). sensor. To adjust it, per- RA
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, form “Basic Inspection”,
EC-159. EC-91.
OK BR
H
NG
(Mass air flow sensor).
sor. ST
EC-131.
OK RS
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace camshaft position
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, BT
EC-280.
OK
H HA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace fuel injector.
(Fuel injector).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EL
EC-520.
OK
H IDX
H
INSPECTION END
EC-157
Procedure C
INSPECTION START
H
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SEN-
SOR.
Perform “Basic Inspection”, EC-91.
OK
H
NG
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM. E Reconnect the parts.
SEF119T Check the followings for connection.
I Air duct
I Vacuum hoses
I Intake air passage between air duct to
collector
If disconnected, reconnect the parts.
OK
H
screws.
H
SEF053T
NG
1. Disconnect throttle position sensor har- tors.
ness connector.
OK
H
NG
SEF122T If OK, check harness for short to power. I Joint connector-16
OK short between throttle
Module)
position sensor and
(TAC) module
or connectors.
SEF123T
H
NG
terminal q
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF387U
EC-158
q
A
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace throttle position
E
(Throttle position sensor). sensor. To adjust it, per-
GI
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” form “Basic Inspection”,
below. EC-91.
OK MA
H
EM
H LC
INSPECTION END
FE
AT
PD
Throttle position sensor
2. Stop engine (Ignition switch “OFF”). FA
opener. RA
throttle opener. BR
SEF793W
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”. ST

8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle posi- RS
tion sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions THRTL POS SEN
BT
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Partially open Between (a) and (b)
HA
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7
SEF266Y
If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic
Inspection”, EC-91. EL
9. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch
in “Basic Inspection”, replace throttle position sensor.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- IDX
EC-159
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal q
63 (Throttle posi-
tion sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle posi-
Throttle valve conditions Voltage V
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7
SEF795W If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to “Basic

Inspection”, EC-91.
EC-160
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor

The engine coolant temperature sensor is located near the No. 2
injector. The sensor is used to detect the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The GI
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor MA
decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K EM
<Reference data>
Engine coolant LC
Voltage* Resistance
temperature
V kΩ
°C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
FE
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P *: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal AT
q
67 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. PD
Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a
FA
Diagnostic RA
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P0125 I Voltage sent to ECM from the sensor is not practical, I Harness or connectors
BR
0908 even when some time has passed after starting the (High resistance in the circuit)
engine. I Engine coolant temperature sensor
ST
I Engine coolant temperature is insufficient for closed I Thermostat
loop fuel control.
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-161
(Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Do not overheat engine.
NOTE:
I If DTC P0115 (0103) is displayed with P0125 (0908), first
perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0115, EC-145.
I If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn
SEF399X ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before
conducting the next test.
2) Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
3) Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 10°C (50°F).
If it is above 10°C (50°F), the test result will be OK.
If it is below 10°C (50°F), go to following step.
4) Start engine and run it for 65 minutes at idle speed.
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” increases to more than 10°C
(50°F) within 65 minutes, stop engine because the test
result will be OK.
5) If 1st DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-162
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC642
EC-163
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
NG
2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature F26 , F106
sensor harness connector. I Harness for open or
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. short between ECM and
SEF052T 4. Check voltage between terminal q2 and engine coolant tempera-
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. ture sensor
Voltage: If NG, repair harness or
Approximately 5V connectors.
OK
H
NG
M4 , B3
SEF541P short between ECM and
engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor
short between TCM
Module) and engine
sor
short between engine
sor and throttle actuator
control (TAC) module
SEF542P or connectors.
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace engine coolant
(Engine coolant temperature sensor). temperature sensor.
next page.
OK
H
NG
CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION. E CHECK COMPONENT.
When the engine is cold [lower than 75°C (Thermostat)
(167°F)], grasp lower radiator hose and Refer to LC section (“Ther-
confirm the engine coolant does not flow. mostat”).
If NG, replace it.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-164
(Cont’d)
Check resistance as shown in the figure. GI
MA
SEF152P EM
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ LC

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. FE
SEF012P
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-165
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130 (B1), P0150 (B2)
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Front) (P0130: Bank

1), (P0150: Bank 2) (Circuit)
The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) is placed into the exhaust
manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas com-
pared to the outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) has a
closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions. The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) signal is sent to the
ECM. The ECM adjusts the injection pulse duration to achieve the
SEF463R
ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical
change from 1V to 0V.
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2)
LEAN ) RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
Changes more than 5 times
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
during 10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
82 (B2) R Engine is running.

Heated oxygen sensors 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(front) After warming up to normal operating tempera- (periodically change)
83 (B1) W ture and engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
EC-166
1), (P0150: Bank 2) (Circuit) (Cont’d)
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
signal is not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approxi-
mately 0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output GI
voltage is within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diag-
nosis checks that this time is not inordinately long.
MA
SEF237U EM
Code No.
Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible Cause) LC
P0130, 0303 I The voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 0.3V. I Harness or connectors
(Bank 1) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0150, 0503 I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(Bank 2)
FE
AT
PROCEDURE PD
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. FA
NOTE:
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn RA
ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before
TESTING CONDITION: BR
SEF979Z
I Always drive vehicle at temperature of more than −10°C
(14°F).
I Before performing the following procedure, confirm that ST
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- RS
perature.
2) Stop engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1) BT
P0130, (B2) (P0150)” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”. HA
5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle for at
SEF980Z least 3 minutes.
NOTE: EL
Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this
step. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, return to
step 5). IDX
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will
be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 10 to 60 sec-
onds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,600 - 2,200 rpm
Vehicle speed: More than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
SEF645Y
EC-167
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.4 - 5 msec
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-171.
During this test, P1148 and P1168 may be stored in
ECM.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal q 82 (B2), q
83
(B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
3) Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000
SEF353WA rpm constant under no load.
I The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
EC-168
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC783
EC-169
BANK 2
TEC784
EC-170
INSPECTION START
GI
H
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground MA
screws.
SEF054TI EM
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. Repair harness or connec-
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. tors. LC
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 (front) harness connector
and ECM harness connector.
and sensor terminals.
Bank
FE
Terminals
(Harness
DTC
protector
SEF056TH
ECM Sensor color) AT
Bank 1
P0130 83 2
(Black)
Bank 2
PD
P0150 82 2
(Blue)
Continuity should exist. FA

and sensor or ground.
RA
Terminals Bank
(Harness
DTC
ECM or protector
sensor
Ground
color) BR
SEF377U
Bank 1
P0130 83 or 2 Ground
(Black)
ST
Bank 2
P0150 82 or 2 Ground
(Blue)
Continuity should not exist.

RS
BT
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
E
REPLACE HO2S1 (front). HA
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)]. 1. Check front HO2S har-
SEF409WA Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on ness protector color.
next page. Black: Left bank (B1)
Blue: Right bank (B2)
EL
OK 2. Replace malfunctioning
HO2S1 (front).
IDX
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF390UA
EC-171
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
perature.
2) Select “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode with CONSULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)
(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during
SEF977Z the following steps.
4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
5) Check the following.
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
changes from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10
seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown below:
cycle | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R-L-R
R = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”, “RICH”

L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”, “LEAN”
I “HO2S1 (B1) (B2)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least
once.
I “HO2S1 (B1) (B2)” voltage goes below 0.30V at least
once.
I “HO2S1 (B1) (B2)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys-
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant.
SEF978Z
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal q 82 (B2), q 83
rpm constant under no load.
I Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times
within 10 seconds in Diagnostic Test Mode II [HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT), EC-68].
I The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
SEF353WA
I The minimum voltage is below 0.30V at least one time.
EC-172
I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
CAUTION:
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. GI
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- MA
cant.
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-173

1), (P0151: Bank 2) (Lean shift monitoring)
SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2)
LEAN ) RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
during 10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.

Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V
EC-174
(Cont’d)
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen- GI
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high and whether the “lean” output is sufficiently low.
When both the outputs are shifting to the lean side, the malfunc- MA
tion will be detected.
SEF300U EM
Diagnostic Trouble
Check Items LC
P0131 I The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0411 specified voltage. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(Bank 1) I Fuel pressure
P0151 I Injectors
0415 I Intake air leaks FE
(Bank 2)
AT
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PD

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- RA
the next test. BR
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF982Z
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat- ST
tery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
perature. RS
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S1 (B1)
P0131, (B2) P0151” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUP- BT
4) Touch “START”.
5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle for at HA
least 3 minutes.
SEF983Z NOTE:
Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm after this EL
step 5).
6) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will IDX
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 50 seconds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,200 rpm
Vehicle speed: 0 - 100 km/h (0 - 62 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.4 - 5.0 ms
SEF651Y
EC-175
(Cont’d)
from step 2).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not be confirmed.
perature.
82
EC-176
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START GI
H
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sen- MA
sors 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N⋅m
SEF833UA (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb) EM
H
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
Yes
Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
LC
E
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0171,
operating temperature. P0174”, EC-245.
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING
CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT”
3. Clear the self-learning control
coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
4. Run engine for at least 10 min- FE
utes at idle speed.
Are the 1st trip DTCs P0171,
P0174 detected? Is it difficult
to start engine?
SEF409WA ------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
AT
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor
harness connector, and restart
and run engine for at least 3
PD
seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect
mass air flow sensor harness
connector. FA
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble
code No. 0102 is displayed in
Diagnostic Test Mode II.
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode RA
II (Self-diagnostic results)
memory. Make sure diagnostic
trouble code No. 0505 is dis-
played in Diagnostic Test Mode BR
II.
SEF985Z 7. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Are the 1st trip DTCs 0115,
0210 detected? Is it difficult to ST
start engine?
H No
NG RS
CHECK COMPONENT E
REPLACE HO2S1 (front).
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 heaters (front)]. 1. Check HO2S1 (front)
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on harness protector color.
BT
HO2S1 (front)
H HA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace corresponding
SEF395W [Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front)]. heated oxygen sensor 1
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on (front).
next page. EL
OK
H
IDX
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0130 (B1), P0150 (B2)” for circuit,
EC-166.
H
INSPECTION END
EC-177
(Cont’d)
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
Check resistance between terminals q 3 and q 1 .
Resistance: 2.3 - 4.3Ω at 25°C (77°F)
Check continuity between terminals q2 and q 1 ,q 3 and q
2 .
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
AEC158A CAUTION:
cant.

perature.
(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”.
the following steps.
SEF977Z I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
seconds.
cycle 1 2 3 4 5

once.
once.
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-178
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
SEF978Z
LC
FE
AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- PD
perature.
(B1) (sensor signal) and ground. FA
I Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times RA
OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT)]. See
EC-68. BR
SEF353WA
I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. ST
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been RS
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- BT
cant. HA
EL
IDX
EC-179

1), (P0152: Bank 2) (Rich Shift Monitoring)
SEF463R
SEF288D

0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V

HO2S1 (B1)
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ) RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times
HO2S1 MNTR (B2) during 10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.

Heated oxygen sensors 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V
EC-180
(Cont’d)
To judge the malfunction, the output from the heated oxygen sen- GI
sor 1 (front) is monitored to determine whether the “rich” output is
sufficiently high. The “lean” output is sufficiently low. When both the
outputs are shifting to the rich side, the malfunction will be MA
detected.
SEF299U EM
Diagnostic Trouble
Check Items LC
P0132 I The maximum and minimum voltages from the sensor are not I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0410 around the specified voltages. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
(Bank 1) I Fuel pressure
P0152 I Injectors
0414 FE
(Bank 2)
AT
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PD

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- RA
the next test. BR
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF986Z
I Always perform at a temperature above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat- ST
perature. RS
P0132, (B2) P0152” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUP- BT
5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle for at HA
least 3 minutes.
SEF987Z NOTE:
EL
step 5). IDX
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,200 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.4 - 5.0 ms
SEF655Y
EC-181
(Cont’d)
from step 2).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not be confirmed.
perature.
83
EC-182
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START GI
MA
H
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sen-
SEF833UA sor 1 (front). EM
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N⋅m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37
ft-lb) LC
H
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA Yes Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
E
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal NOSIS FOR DTC P0172, FE
SEF985Z CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” AT
coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. PD
4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Are the 1st trip DTCs P0172, FA
to start engine?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
RA
BR
SEF395W
ST
connector.
RS
Diagnostic Test Mode II. BT
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
memory. Make sure diagnostic HA
played in Diagnostic Test Mode
II. EL
utes at idle speed.
Are the 1st trip DTCs 0114, IDX
0209 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
No
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-183
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG REPLACE HO2S1 (front).
E
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)]. 1. Check HO2S1 (front)
OK
2. Replace malfunctioning
HO2S1 (front).
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Repair or replace harness
E
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)]. and/or connectors or
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. replace corresponding
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector heated oxygen sensor 1
and check for water. (front).
Water should not exist.
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(B1), (B2).
next page.
OK
H
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0130 (B1), P0150 (B2)” for circuit,
EC-166.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
2 .
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensors 1 (front).
CAUTION:
AEC158A
cant.
EC-184
(Cont’d)
perature. GI
(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”.
MA
SEF267Y
EM
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode LC
seconds.
cycle 1 2 3 4 5
FE
L = “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”, “LEAN” AT
once.
I “HO2S1 (B1) (B2)” voltage goes below 0.30V at least PD
once.
CAUTION: FA
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. RA
cant. BR
ST
RS
BT
SEF978Z HA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EL
perature.
IDX
EC-68.
SEF353WA
EC-185
(Cont’d)
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-186

1), (P0153: Bank 2) (Response monitoring)
manifold. It detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas com- GI
MA
SEF463R
EM
LC
FE
SEF288D
AT
PD
FA
HO2S1 (B1)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2)
I Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm RA
LEAN ) RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
during 10 seconds.
BR
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. ST
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. RS
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION BT
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.

Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V HA
EL
IDX
EC-187
(Cont’d)
To judge the malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front), this
diagnosis measures response time of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed
and load), fuel feedback control constant, and heated oxygen sen-
sor 1 (front) temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the
compensated time [heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) cycling time
index] is inordinately long or not.
SEF010V
Diagnostic Trouble Code No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0133 I The response of the voltage I Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0409 signal from the sensor takes I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(Bank 1) more than the specified time. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
I Fuel pressure
I Injectors
P0153 I Intake air leaks
0413 I Exhaust gas leaks
(Bank 2) I PCV

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF989Z
I Always perform at a temperature of above −10°C (14°F).
I Before performing following procedure, confirm that bat-
perature.
P0133, (B2) (P0153)” of “HO2S1” in “DTC WORK SUP-
least 3 minutes.
SEF990Z
NOTE:
step 5).
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 40 to 50 sec-
onds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,500 rpm
SEF658Y
EC-188
(Cont’d)
Vehicle speed: More than 50 km/h (31 MPH)
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.4 - 5.0 msec
Selector lever: Suitable position GI
from step 2).
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF- MA
EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK LC
not be confirmed.
perature.
83 FE
SEF353WA rpm constant under no load. AT
OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR (FRONT)]. See PD
EC-68.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-189
(Cont’d)
BANK 1
TEC783
EC-190
(Cont’d)
BANK 2
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC784
EC-191
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
screws.
SEF833UA H
sor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N⋅m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37
ft-lb)
H
NG
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace.
Start engine and run it at idle. Listen for an
exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
H
OK
NG
SEF377U
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace.
intake air leak between the mass air flow
sensor and the intake manifold.
OK
H
Yes
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA E Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
operating temperature. P0172”, P0174, P0175,
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING EC-245, 251.
SEF099P utes at idle speed.
P0174 or P0172, P0175
detected? Is it difficult to start
engine?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
connector.
SEF985Z 6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II.
utes at idle speed.
0210 or D114, 0209 detected?
Is it difficult to start engine?
No
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF395W
EC-192
(Cont’d)
q
A
H GI
NG
gen sensor 1 (front) harness connector MA
SEF054TI
Bank
EM
Terminals
(Harness
DTC
protector
ECM Sensor color)
LC
P0133 83 2 B1 (Black)
P0153 82 2 B2 (Blue)

FE
Terminals Bank
(Harness
DTC ECM or
Ground protector
SEF056TH
sensor color) AT
P0133 83 or 2 Ground B1 (Black)
P0153 82 or 2 Ground B2 (Blue)

PD
FA
H OK
NG
CHECK COMPONENT REPLACE HO2S1 (front).
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)].
E
1. Check HO2S1 (front) RA
OK 2. Replace malfunctioning BR
SEF409WA HO2S1 (front)
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)].
E
REPLACE HO2S1 (front).
1. Check HO2S1 (front)
ST
Blue: Right bank (B2) RS
HO2S1 (front)
H
NG BT
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace mass air flow sen-
EC-131.
HA
H OK
SEF390UA NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Repair or replace PCV
(PCV valve).
valve. EL
EC-36.
H OK IDX
OK
H
INSPECTION END
EC-193
(Cont’d)
2 .
AEC158A
CAUTION:
cant.

perature.
(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”.
SEF977Z I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
seconds.
cycle 1 2 3 4 5

once.
once.
CAUTION:
cant.
EC-194
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
SEF978Z
LC
FE
AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- PD
perature.
(B1) (sensor signal) and ground. FA
I Malfunction indicator lamp goes on more than 5 times RA
EC-68. BR
SEF353WA
I The voltage never exceeds 1.0V. ST
CAUTION:
I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been RS
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust sys- BT
cant. HA
EL
IDX
EC-195

1), (P0154: Bank 2)
SEF463R
SEF288D

HO2S1 (B1)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2)
LEAN ) RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)
HO2S1 MNTR (B2)
during 10 seconds.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.

Heated oxygen sensor 1 0 - Approximately 1.0V

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated
oxygen sensor 1 (front) output is not inordinately high.
SEF301UA
EC-196
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)

P0134 I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors GI
0142 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
P0154 MA
0509
(Bank 2)
EM
PROCEDURE LC
NOTE:
the next test.
With CONSULT-II FE
perature.
SEC026C 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
AT
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. PD
5) Restart engine and let it idle for 32 seconds.
PROCEDURE”, EC-200. FA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wtih GST
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- RA
perature.
3) Restart engine and let it idle for 32 seconds. BR
6) Select “MODE 3” with GST. ST
7) If DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RS
Not Tools
perature. BT
4) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and HA
then turn “ON”.
5) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic
results)” with ECM. EL
I When using GST, “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” IDX
should be performed twice as much as when using CON-
SULT-II or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II) because GST can-
not display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagno-
sis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II or ECM (Diagnostic Test
Mode II) is recommended.
EC-197
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
BANK 1
TEC783
EC-198
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
BANK 2
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC784
EC-199
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
sor 1 (front).
Tightening torque:
40 - 50 N⋅m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37
SEF833UA ft-lb)
H
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
gen sensor 1 (front) harness connector
SEF377U Bank
Terminals
(Harness
DTC
protector
ECM Sensor color)
P0134 83 2 B1 (Black)
P0154 82 2 B2 (Blue)

Terminals Bank
(Harness
DTC
ECM or protector
SEF054TI Ground
sensor color)
P0134 83 or 2 Ground B1 (Black)
P0154 82 or 2 Ground B2 (Blue)

OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF056TH
SEF409WA
EC-200
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
E
REPAIR OR REPLACE GI
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)]. HO2S1 (front).
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. Repair or replace harness
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector and/or connectors as fol- MA
and check for water. lows.
Water should not exist. 1. Check HO2S1 (front)
SEF390UA If OK, go to step 3. harness protector color. EM
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 1 (front). Black: Left bank (B1)
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on Blue: Right bank (B2)
next page. 2. Repair or replace mal- LC
functioning HO2S1
OK
(front).
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. FE
OK
H
INSPECTION END
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-201
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
perature.
(B2)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)”.
SEF977Z
I “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
seconds.
cycle 1 2 3 4 5

once.
once.
CAUTION:
cant.
SEF978Z
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
EC-68.
SEF353WA
EC-202
1), (P0154: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a GI
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool MA
cant.
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-203
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater (Front) (P0135:

Bank 1), (P0155: Bank 2)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed Heated
Camshaft position sensor E oxygen
ECM E sensor 1
Amount of intake air heater

Mass air flow sensor E (front)
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated OPERATION

oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) corresponding to the
Heated oxygen sensor 1
engine speed. Engine speed rpm
heater (front)
Above 3,200 OFF
Below 3,200 ON

HO2S1 HTR (B1) I Engine speed: Idle ON

HO2S1 HTR (B2) I Engine speed: Above 3,200 OFF

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
G/W 0 - 0.5V
(B1) Engine speed is below 3,200 rpm.
heater (front) Engine is running.
16 BATTERY VOLTAGE
L/Y
(B2) Engine speed is above 3,200 rpm. (11 - 14V)

P0135 I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor I Harness or connectors
0901 1 heater (front) circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front) circuit is
(Bank 1) [The improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
P0155 through the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front).] I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
1001
(Bank 2)
EC-204
Bank 1), (P0155: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- GI
the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat-
SEC027C
tery voltage is more than 10.5.
EM
mode with CONSULT-II. LC
2) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle
speed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle FE
speed.
3) Restart engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle AT
speed.
5) If DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PD
I When using GST, “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CON- FA
FIRMATION PROCEDURE” should be performed twice as
much as when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot
display MODE 7 (1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. RA
Therefore, using CONSULT-II is recommended.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-205
BANK 1
TEC785
EC-206
BANK 2
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC786
EC-207
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxy- F1 , E14
gen sensor 1 (front) harness connector. I 7.5A fuse
SEF054TI 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness for open or short
4. Check voltage between terminal q 3 and between heated oxygen
ground. sensor 1 (front) and fuse
connectors.
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
3. Check harness continuity between termi-
nal and sensor.
SEF056TH Terminals Bank

(Harness
DTC
protector
ECM Sensor color)
B1
P0135 17 1
(Black)
P0155 16 1 B2 (Blue)

If OK, check harness for short to ground
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG REPLACE HO2S1 (front).
E
SEF646P [Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)]. 1. Check HO2S1 (front)
HO2S1 (front)
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF409WA
SEF391UA
EC-208
Check resistance between terminals q 3 and q 1 . GI
2 .
Continuity should not exist. MA
CAUTION:
AEC158A I Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped EM
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
I Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system LC
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-209
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Rear) (P0137: Bank

1), (P0157: Bank 2) (Min. Voltage Monitoring)
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, moni-
tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric,
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner
conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) is not
used for engine control operation.

HO2S2 (B1) Revving engine from idle up to 2,000

I Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 (B2) rpm

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
89 (B2) W
Heated oxygen sensor 2 After warming up to normal operating tempera- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
(rear) ture and revving engine from idle up to 2,000
90 (B1) Y
rpm.

The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) has a much longer switching
time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1
(front). The oxygen storage capacity before the three way catalyst
causes the longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the mini-
mum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently low during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF304UA
EC-210
(Cont’d)
GI
P0137 I The minimum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the I Harness or connectors
0511 specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open.)
(Bank 1) I Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
I Fuel pressure
MA
P0157
I Injectors
0314
(Bank 2) EM
PROCEDURE LC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-II screen when all
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
I If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO- FE
SEC028C conducting the next test. AT
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped,
reperform this test from step 2).
PD
Procedure for COND1
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- FA
perature.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “HO2S2 (B1) RA
P0137, (B2) P0157” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUP-
4) Touch “START”. BR
SEC029C
least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under
no load.
ST
If “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-II screen, go
to step 10).
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II RS
screen, go to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes. BT
be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen.
Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” HA
SEC030C changes to “COMPLETED” (It will take approximately
60 seconds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,500 rpm EL
Selector lever: Suitable position IDX
NOTE:
I If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry
from step 2).
I If “COMPLETED” already appears at “COND2” on
CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND2”
is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 9).
SEC031C
EC-211
(Cont’d)
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving release accelerator pedal completely with
“OD” OFF from the above condition (step 8) until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen
has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately
4 seconds.)
from step 2).
SEF835Y
Procedure for COND3
10) Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of
“COND3” on CONSULT-II screen has turned to “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6
minutes.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
gen sensor 2 (rear) circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might
not be confirmed.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
2) Stop vehicle with engine running.
3) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals q 89 (B2),
q90 (B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
SEF354WA 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm
under no load at least 10 times.
(depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos-
sible)
The voltage should be below 0.43V at least once
during this procedure.
If the voltage can be confirmed in step 4, step 5 is
not necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the
voltage. Or check the voltage when coasting from 80
km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF.
The voltage should be below 0.43V at least once
EC-212
(Cont’d)
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC787
EC-213
(Cont’d)
BANK 2
TEC788
EC-214
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START GI
H
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MA
screws.
SEF055TA EM
H
Yes Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
LC
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA
E
mode with CONSULT-II. FE
SEF377U
4. Run engine for at least 10 min- AT
utes at idle speed.
P0175 detected? Is it difficult PD
to start engine?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. FA
and run engine for at least 3 RA
mass air flow sensor harness BR
SEF985Z connector.
code No. 0102 is displayed in ST
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode
II (Self-diagnostic results) RS
played in Diagnostic Test Mode BT
II.
utes at idle speed. HA
SEF395W Are the 1st trip DTCs 0114,
0209 detected? Is it difficult to
start engine?
EL
No
H
IDX
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-215
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxy- F3 , E12 (LH) or
gen sensor 2 (rear) harness connector F14 , F131 (RH)
and ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors
SEC032C 3. Check harness continuity between ECM E19 , E102 (LH)
terminals and sensor. If NG, repair open circuit or
Terminals Bank power in harness or con-
(Harness nectors.
DTC
protector
ECM Sensor color)
P0137 90 2 B1 (White)
P0157 89 2 B2 (Red)

and sensor or ground terminals.
SEF392UA Terminals Bank

(Harness
DTC
ECM or protector
Ground
sensor color)
P0137 90 or 2 Ground B1 (White)
P0157 89 or 2 Ground B2 (Red)

If OK, check harness for short to ground or
short to power.
OK
H
SEF129T
E
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws. F3 , E12 (LH) or
3. Check harness continuity between termi- F14 , F131 (RH)
nal q
3 and engine ground. I Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. E19 , E102 (LH)
F62 , F61
OK
I Harness for open or short
between heated oxygen
sensor 2 (rear) and
engine ground
or connectors.
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG REPLACE HO2S2 (rear).
E
[Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)]. 1. Check HO2S2 (rear) har-
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on ness protector color.
next page. White: Left bank (B1)
Red: Right bank (B2)
HO2S2 (rear).
H
qB
(Go to next page.)
EC-216
(Cont’d)
q
B
H
GI
OK MA
H
INSPECTION END
EM
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) LC
3) Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode,
and select “HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT-II. FE
4) Check “HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” at idle speed when adjusting
“FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
SEC033C
“HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” should be above 0.48V at least AT
once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” should be below 0.43V at least
once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%. PD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. FA
q 90 (B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under RA
no load at least 10 times.
sible) BR
SEF354WA The voltage should be above 0.48V at least once.
If the voltage is above 0.48V at step 4, step 5 is not
necessary. ST
km/h (50 MPH) in D position with “OD” OFF. RS
The voltage should be below 0.43V at least once.
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a BT
tem threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool HA
cant.
EL
IDX
SEF244Y
EC-217

1), (P0158: Bank 2) (Max. Voltage Monitoring)
tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
conditions.


I Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S1 (B2) rpm

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
90 (B1) Y
Heated oxygen sensor 2 After warming up to normal operating tempera- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
89 (B2) W
rpm.

heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the maxi-
mum voltage of the sensor is sufficiently high during the various
driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF303UA
EC-218
(Cont’d)
GI
P0138 (B1) I The maximum voltage from the sensor is not reached to the I Harness or connectors
0510 specified voltage. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Fuel pressure
MA
P0158 (B2)
I Injectors
0313
I Intake air leaks
(Bank 2) EM
PROCEDURE LC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed.
I If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PRO- FE
SEC034C conducting the next test.
AT
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped, PD
Procedure for COND1
perature.
SEC035C 5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle for at
least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under no ST
load.
to step 10). RS
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II
screen, go to the following step.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) BT
for 2 consecutive minutes.
be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen. HA
SEC036C Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING”
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately
60 seconds.) EL
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,500 rpm
IDX
NOTE:
from step 2).
SEC037C is conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 9).
EC-219
(Cont’d)
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with
“OD” OFF from the above condition [step 8] until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen is
turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 4
seconds.)
NOTE:
If “COMPLETED” is already appears at “COND3” on
SEF665Y
CONSULT-II screen before “Procedure for COND3” is
conducted, it is unnecessary to conduct step 10).
Procedure for COND3
PLETED”. (It will take maximum of approximately 6 min-
utes.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not be confirmed.
SEF354WA 4) Check the voltage when revving engine up to 4,000 rpm
under no load at least 10 times.
sible)
The voltage should be above 0.48V at least once
not necessary.
The voltage should be above 0.48V at least once
EC-220
(Cont’d)
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC787
EC-221
(Cont’d)
BANK 2
TEC788
EC-222
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START GI
H
MA
screws.
SEF055TA EM
H
LC
CLEAR THE SELF-LEARNING DATA Yes Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
E
FE
coefficient by touching “CLEAR”. AT
SEF377U 4. Run engine for at least 10 min-
utes at idle speed.
Are the 1st trip DTCs P0171, PD
to start engine?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- FA
harness connector, and restart RA
4. Stop engine and reconnect BR
SEF985Z mass air flow sensor harness
connector.
5. Make sure diagnostic trouble ST
6. Erase the diagnostic test mode RS
trouble code No. 0505 is dis- BT
II.
7. Run engine for at least 10 min- HA
SEF395W
utes at idle speed.
0210 detected? Is it difficult to EL
start engine?
No IDX
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-223
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 F3 , E12 (LH) or
(rear) harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector. F14 , F131 (RH)
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness connectors
terminals and sensor. E19 , E102 (LH)
SEC032C
If OK, check harness for
Terminals Bank short to ground and short to
(Harness power.
DTC
protector
ECM Sensor color)
P0138 90 2 B1 (White)
P0158 89 2 B2 (Red)
and sensor or ground terminals.
Terminals Bank
(Harness
SEF392UA DTC
ECM or protector
Ground
sensor color)

and short to power.
OK
H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. E
2. Loosen and retighten ground screws. F3 , E12 (LH) or
SEF129T 3. Check harness continuity between termi-
nal q
3 and engine ground. F14 , F131 (RH)
Continuity should exist. I Harness connectors
If OK, check harness for short to ground E19 , E102 (LH)
and short to power. I Harness connectors
OK F62 , F61
sensor 2 (rear) and
engine ground
If OK, check harness for
short to ground and short to
power.
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT [Heated oxygen E
REPLACE HO2S2 (rear).
sensor 2 (rear)]. Refer to “COMPONENT 1. Check HO2S2 (rear) har-
INSPECTION” on next page. ness protector color.
White: Left bank (B1)
OK Red: Right bank (B2)
2. Replace malfunctioning
HO2S2 (rear).
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-224
(Cont’d)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) GI
2) Stop vehicle with engine running. MA
SEC033C CONSULT-II. EM
“HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” should be above 0.48V at least LC
once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes. FE
SEF354WA q 90 (B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
AT
4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under
(depress and release accelerator pedal as soon as pos- PD
sible)
The voltage should be above 0.48V at least once.
FA
necessary.
5) Keep vehicle at idling for 10 minutes, then check the RA
The voltage should be below 0.43V at least once. BR
CAUTION:
dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a ST
J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubri- RS
cant.
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF244Y
EC-225

1), (P0159: Bank 2) (Response Monitoring)
tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on left and right bank.
by the signal from the each heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
conditions.

HO2S2 (B1)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) rpm
LEAN ) RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)

CAUTION:
TER- WIRE DATA
MINAL COLOR ITEM CONDITION (DC voltage)
NO.
89 (B2) W Engine is running.

(rear) After warming up to normal operating tempera- 0 - Approximately 1.0V
90 (B1) Y ture and revving engine from idle up to 2,000
rpm.

heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the switch-
ing response of the sensor’s voltage is faster than specified during
the various driving condition such as fuel-cut.
SEF302U
EC-226
(Cont’d)
I It takes more time for the sensor to respond between rich and lean I
P0139
0707 than the specified time.
Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
GI
P0159 I Fuel pressure
0708 I Injectors MA
(Bank 2) I Intake air leaks
EM
PROCEDURE LC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are completed. FE
ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before AT
SEC038C conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Never stop engine during this test. If the engine is stopped, PD
Procedure for COND1
perature.
SEC039C
least 30 seconds.
6) Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm 2 or 3 times quickly under ST
no load.
to the following step.
RS
7) Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 70 km/h (43 MPH)
for 2 consecutive minutes. BT
be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-II screen.
Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” HA
changes to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately
SEC040C 60 seconds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,500 rpm EL
Selector lever: Suitable position IDX
NOTE:
from step 2).
SEC041C
EC-227
(Cont’d)
Procedure for COND2
9) While driving, release accelerator pedal completely with
“OD” OFF from the above condition [step 8)] until
“INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-II screen
has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately
4 seconds.)
NOTE:
SEF668Y
Procedure for COND3
PLETED”. (It will take a maximum of approximately 6
minutes.)
DIAG RESULTS”.
If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not be confirmed.
SEF354WA 4) Check the voltage when racing up to 4,000 rpm under
sible)
The voltage should be changed at more than 0.06V
for 1 second during this procedure.
not necessary.
The voltage should be changed at more than 0.06V
for 1 second during this procedure.
EC-228
(Cont’d)
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC787
EC-229
(Cont’d)
BANK 2
TEC788
EC-230
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START GI
H
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. MA
H
SEF055TA
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
NG
EM
E
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I Harness connectors
harness connector and ECM harness connec- F3 , E12 (B1) or
tor.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM and F14 , F131 (B2) LC
sensor terminals. I Harness connectors
E19 , E102 (B1)
Bank If NG, repair open circuit or
Terminals short to ground or short to
(Harness
DTC power in harness or connec-
protector
ECM Sensor tors.
color)
P0139 90 2 B1 (White) FE
P0159 89 2 B2 (Red)
SEF377U
Continuity should exist. AT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM sen-
sor or ground terminals.
Terminals Bank PD
(Harness
DTC ECM or
Ground protector
sensor color)
FA

RA
short to power.
OK
BR
SEC032C H
NG
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. Check the following.
E
Check harness continuity between terminal q
3 I Harness connectors ST
and engine ground. F3 , E12 (LH) or
If OK, check harness for short to power. F14 , F131 (RH)
OK
RS
E19 , E102 (LH)
F62 , F61
between heated oxygen sen- BT
sor 2 (rear) and engine
ground
short to power in harness or HA
connectors.
SEF398UA H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
[Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)].
E
REPLACE HO2S2 (rear).
1. Check HO2S2 (rear) harness
EL
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on next protector color.
page. White: Left bank (B1)
Red: Right bank (B2)
OK 2. Replace malfunctioning IDX
HO2S2 (rear).
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTER-
MITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
H OK
INSPECTION END
SEF135T
EC-231
(Cont’d)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
SEC033C CONSULT-II.
“HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” should be above 0.48V at least
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF354WA q 90 (B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
sible)
necessary.
km/h (50 MPH) in D position.
CAUTION:
cant.
SEF244Y
EC-232

1), (P0160: Bank 2) (High voltage)
The heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), after three way catalyst, moni- GI
tors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on left and right bank.
(front) are shifted, the air fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, MA
by the signal from the each heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
SEF327R voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner EM
conditions.
used for engine control operation. LC
HO2S2 (B1)
HO2S2 (B2)
0 - 0.3V ) 0.6 - 1.0V FE
Revving engine from idle up to 2,000
I Engine: After warming up rpm
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) LEAN ) RICH
HO2S2 MNTR (B2)
AT
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. PD
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. FA
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION RA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
89 (B2) W Engine is running.

After warming up to normal operating tempera- 0 - Approximately 1.0V BR
90 (B1) Y
rpm.
ST
RS
BT
HA
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC EL

time between rich and lean than the heated oxygen sensor 1 IDX
heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear), ECM monitors whether the voltage
is unusually high during the various driving condition such as fuel-
cut.
SEF305UA
EC-233
1), (P0160: Bank 2) (High voltage) (Cont’d)
P0140 I An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors
0512 (The sensor circuit is open.)
P0160
0315
(Bank 2)

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
SEF270Y mode with CONSULT-II.
3) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecu-
tive seconds.
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,500 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE: 64 - 100 km/h (40 - 62 MPH)
SEF354WA PROCEDURE”, EC-237.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
not be confirmed.
perature.
sible)
The voltage should be below 1.4V during this pro-
cedure.
EC-234
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC787
EC-235
BANK 2
TEC788
EC-236
INSPECTION START
H GI
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
MA
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E
SEF055TA 1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) I Harness connectors EM
harness connector and ECM harness connec- F3 , E12 (B1) or
tor.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM and F14 , F131 (B2)
sensor terminals. I Harness connectors
E19 , E102 (B1) LC
Terminals Bank If NG, repair open circuit or
DTC (Harness short to ground or short to
protector power in harness or connec-
ECM Sensor color) tors.
P0140 90 2 (B1) (White)
P0160 89 2 (B2) (Red)
Continuity should exist. FE
3. Check harness continuity between ECM sen-
sor or ground terminals.
SEF377U
Terminals Bank AT
DTC (Harness
ECM or Ground protector
sensor color)
P0140 90 or 2 Ground (B1) (White) PD
P0160 89 or 2 Ground (B2) (Red)

If OK, check harness for short to ground and FA
short to power.
OK
H
NG
RA
Check harness continuity between terminal q
3 I Harness connectors
and engine ground. F3 , E12 (B1) or
F14 , F131 (B2)
BR
SEC032C I Harness connectors
OK E19 , E102 (B1)
I Harness connectors ST
F62 , F61
between heated oxygen sen-
sor 2 (rear) and engine RS
ground
short to power in harness or
connectors. BT
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Repair or replace harness
[Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)]. and/or connectors or replace
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. corresponding heated oxygen HA
2. Disconnect sensor harness connector and sensor.
SEF398UA check for water.
3. Check heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).
EL
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on next
page.
H OK IDX
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTER-
MITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
H OK
INSPECTION END
SEF135T
EC-237
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear)
CONSULT-II.
SEC033C 4) Check “HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” at idle speed when adjusting
“HO2S2 (B1) (B2)” should be above 0.48V at least
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
q 90 (B1) (sensor signal) and ground.
SEF354WA
sible)
necessary.
CAUTION:
cant.
SEF244Y
EC-238
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heaters (Rear)

(P0141: Bank 1), (P0161: Bank 2)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed Heated GI

E oxygen
E sensor 2
ECM
Amount of intake air heater MA
Mass air flow sensor E (rear)
EM
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated OPERATION
oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) corresponding to the
Heated oxygen sensor 2 LC
engine speed. Engine speed rpm
heater (rear)
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine
OFF
stopped)
At idle [after driving for 2 min-
utes at a speed of more than ON
70 km/h (43 MPH)]
FE
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE AT

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION PD
I Engine speed: At idle [after driving for 2 minutes at a speed of more than 70
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) km/h (43 MPH)]
HO2S2 HTR (B2) I Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
FA
OFF
I Ignition “ON” with engine stopped
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE RA

CAUTION: BR
TER-
ST
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
RS
Engine is running.
At idle [after driving 2 minutes at 70 km/h (43 0 - 0.5V

Heated oxygen sensor 2 MPH) or more]
BT
18 Y/R heater (rear) (B1) Ignition switch “ON”
19 L Heated oxygen sensor 2
heater (rear) (B2) Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
HA
Engine is running. (11 - 14V)
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. EL
IDX
EC-239
(P0141: Bank 1), (P0161: Bank 2) (Cont’d)
P0141 I The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor I Harness or connectors
0902 2 heater (rear) circuit is out of the normal range. [The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear) circuit is
(B1) [The improper voltage drop signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.]
P0161 through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear).] I Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
1002
(B2)

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
tery voltage is more than 10.5V.
SEF261Y 1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR”
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
When using GST, “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” should be performed twice as much as
when using CONSULT-II because GST cannot display MODE 7
(1st trip DTC) concerning this diagnosis. Therefore, using
CONSULT-II is recommended.
EC-240
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC789
EC-241
BANK 2
TEC790
EC-242
INSPECTION START
GI
H
E
I Harness connectors MA
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 E102 , E19 (B1) or
(rear) harness connector. F14 , F131 (B2)
SEF055TA 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness connectors EM
4. Check voltage between terminal q
4 and E14 , F1 (B1)
ground. I Harness connectors
Voltage: Battery voltage F63 , M49
LC
I 7.5A fuse
OK I Harness for open or short
sensor 2 (rear) and fuse
connectors.
FE
H
E
SEF130T
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors AT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. F3 , E12 (B1) or
3. Check harness continuity between termi- F14 , F131 (B2)
nal q
1 and ECM terminals q 19 (B1), q
18 I Harness connectors PD
(B2). E19 , E102 (B1)
If OK, check harness for short to ground F62 , F61
and short to power. I Harness for open or short FA
between sensor and
OK ECM.
If NG, repair open circuit or RA
nectors. BR
SEF801WA H
CHECK COMPONENT NG REPLACE HO2S2 (rear).
E
[Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)]. 1. Check HO2S2 (rear) har- ST
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on ness protector color.
next page. White: Left bank (B1)
Red: Right bank (B2) RS
HO2S2 (rear).
H
BT
HA
H
SEC032C INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-243
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater (rear)
1. Check resistance between terminals q4 and q
1 .
2. Check continuity.
Terminal No. Continuity
q
2 and q
1 ,q
3 ,q
4
No
q
3 and q
1 ,q
2 ,q
4
If NG, replace the heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear).

CAUTION:
cant.
SEF132T
EC-244
Fuel Injection System Function (Lean side)

(P0171: Bank 1), (P0174: Bank 2)
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the GI
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios. MA
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
EM
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) E ECM E Injectors
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
LC
P0171 I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I Intake air leaks
0115 I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
(Bank 1) mixture ratio is too lean.) I Injectors
I Exhaust gas leaks FE
P0174 I Incorrect fuel pressure
0210 I Lack of fuel
(Bank 2) I Mass air flow sensor
AT

PROCEDURE PD
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- FA
the next test. RA
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds. BR
SEF985Z 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN
CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II. ST
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching
“CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC BT
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6), the fuel injec-
tion system has a malfunction. HA
SEC042C 8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If
engine starts, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-249. If engine does not start, visually check for EL
exhaust and intake air leak.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IDX
EC-245

perature.
3) Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
4) Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor har-
ness connector.
SEF395W 5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC
P0100 is detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC
P0100.
7) Start engine again and run it for at least 10 minutes at
idle speed.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-249.
9) If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection
system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-249.
If the engine does not start, visually check for exhaust
and intake air leak.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
Then restart engine and run it at least 3 seconds at idle
speed.
ness connector.
results)” with ECM. Make sure DTC 0102 is detected.
7) Erase the DTC 0102 by changing from Diagnostic Test
Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I.
idle speed.
The DTC 0115 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
system also has a malfunction.
11) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-249.
If the engine does not start, visually check for exhaust
and intake air leak.
EC-246
BANK 1
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC791
EC-247
BANK 2
TEC793
EC-248
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace.
exhaust air leak before three way catalyst.
MA
H OK
NG
SEF099P CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace. EM
intake air leak between the mass air flow sensor
and the intake manifold.
OK LC
H
NG
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 E Repair harness or connectors.
(FRONT).
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM and
sensor terminals. FE
Terminals Bank
(Harness
SEF054TI
DTC
protector AT
ECM Sensor color)
P0171 83 2 (B1) (Black)
P0174 82 2 (B2) (Blue) PD
4. Check harness continuity between ECM and
sensor or ground.
FA
Terminals Bank
(Harness
DTC ECM or protector
sensor
Ground
color)
RA
P0171 83 or 2 Ground (B1) (Black)
P0174 82 or 2 Ground (B2) (Blue)
BR
SEF056TH Continuity should not exist.
short to power.
ST
H OK
NG
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Check the following.
E I Fuel pump and circuit
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to
EC-37. Refer to EC-523. RS
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel I Fuel pressure regulator
pressure. Refer to EC-37.
At idle: I Fuel lines
Approx. 235 kPa Refer to EC-38.
(2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) I Fuel lines BT
A few seconds after ignition switch is Refer to “ENGINE MAINTE-
turned OFF to ON: NANCE” in MA section.
Approx. 294 kPa I Fuel filter for clogging
(3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi) If NG, repair or replace.
HA
H OK
SEF409WA NG
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. Check connectors for rusted
E terminals or loose connections
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA
in the mass air flow sensor cir-
EL
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/sec: at idling cuit or engine grounds. Refer to
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm EC-124.
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------
Check “mass air flow” in MODE 1 with IDX
GST.
3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/sec: at idling
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
-------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------
Check mass air flow sensor output
voltage, refer to EC-131.
Approximately 2.1V: at 2,500 rpm
H OK
qA
SEF390UA (Go to next page.)
EC-249
q
A
H
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS. NG Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
E
1. Install all parts removed. NOSIS FOR NON-DE-
2. Start engine. TECTABLE ITEMS,
3. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “Injectors”, EC-515.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- Repair harness or connec-
SEF793X
SULT-II. tors.
4. Make sure that each circuit pro-
duces a momentary engine
speed drop.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Listen to each injector operating
sound.
Clicking noise should be
heard.
OK
H
Confirm that the engine is cooled down
and there are no fire hazards near the
MEC703B vehicle.
H
2. Remove injector gallery assembly.
Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors con-
nected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should
remain connected.
H
SEF595Q 1. Disconnect all ignition coil harness con- NG Replace injectors from
E
nectors. which fuel does not spray
2. Place pans or saucers under each injec- out. Always replace O-ring
tor. with new one.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make
sure that fuel sprays out vigorously from
injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for
each cylinder.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-250
Fuel Injection System Function (Rich side)

(P0172: Left bank), (P0175: Right bank)
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the GI
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1 (front).
The ECM calculates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical
ratios. MA
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
EM
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) E ECM E Injectors
LC
P0172 I Fuel injection system does not operate properly. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
0114 I The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too large. (The I Injectors
(Bank 1) mixture ratio is too rich.) I Exhaust gas leaks
P0175
I Incorrect fuel pressure FE
0209
(Bank 2)
AT

PROCEDURE PD
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- FA
the next test. RA
perature.
SEF985Z 3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARN
CONTROL” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II. ST
4) Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching
“CLEAR”.
5) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
6) Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this
stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC BT
7) If it is difficult to start engine at step 6), the fuel injec-
tion system has a malfunction. HA
SEC042C 8) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If
EC-255. If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs EL
and check for fouling, etc.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IDX
EC-251
(Cont’d)
perature.
Then restart and run engine for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
ness connector.
SEF395W 5) Select “MODE 7” with GST. Make sure 1st trip DTC
P0100 is detected.
6) Select “MODE 4” with GST and erase the 1st trip DTC
P0100.
idle speed.
8) Select “MODE 7” with GST. The 1st trip DTC P0171
should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists.
If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-255.
system has a malfunction.
10) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If
EC-255. If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
4) Then restart engine and run it for at least 3 seconds at
idle speed.
ness connector.
8) Erase the DTC 0102 by changing from Diagnostic Test
Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I.
idle speed.
The DTC 0114 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
11) If it is difficult to start engine at step 10, the fuel injec-
tion system also has a malfunction.
12) Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If
EC-255. If engine does not start, remove ignition plugs
EC-252
BANK 1 (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC791
EC-253
BANK 2 (Cont’d)
TEC793
EC-254
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace. MA
exhaust air leak before the three way cata-
lyst.
SEF099P
OK
EM
H
NG
CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 Repair harness or connec-
(FRONT).
E
tors. LC
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1
(front) harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
FE
Bank
Terminals
(Harness
DTC
protector
SEF054TI
ECM Sensor
color) AT
P0172 83 2 (B1) (Black)
P0175 82 2 (B2) (Blue)
PD
FA
Terminals Bank
(Harness
DTC ECM or
Ground protector RA
sensor color)
P0172 83 or 2 Ground (B1) (Black)
P0175 82 or 2 Ground (B2) (Blue) BR
SEF056TH
If OK, check harness for short to ground ST
and short to power.
H
OK
CHECK FUEL PRESSURE.
NG
Check the following. RS
E
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to I Fuel pump and circuit
EC-37. Refer to EC-523.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check I Fuel pressure regulator
fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37. BT
At idle: If NG, repair or replace.
Approx. 235 kPa
(2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
A few seconds after ignition switch is HA
turned OFF to ON:
SEF409WA Approx. 294 kPa
(3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
EL
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.) IDX
SEF390UA
EC-255
(Cont’d) qA
H
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. NG Check connectors for
E
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA rusted terminals or loose
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. connections in the mass air
3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/sec: at idling flow sensor circuit or engine
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm grounds. Refer to EC-124.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Check “mass air flow” in MODE 1
SEF793X with GST.
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Check mass air flow sensor output
OK
H
CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS. NG Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
E
1. Install all parts removed. NOSIS FOR NON-DE-
2. Start engine. TECTABLE ITEMS,
3. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “Injectors”, EC-515.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- Repair harness or connec-
MEC703B
SULT-II. tors.
speed drop.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
sound.
heard.
OK
H
1. Remove injector assembly.
2. Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose, all injectors and injector
harness connectors connected to injector
gallery.
H
Confirm that the engine is cooled down
and there are no fire hazards near the
vehicle.
H
1. Disconnect all injector harness connec- Drips Replace the injectors from
E
tors. which fuel is dripping.
2. Place pans or saucers under each injec-
tor.
3. Disconnect all ignition coil harness con-
nectors.
4. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injec-
tor.
Does not drip.
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-256
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor

The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel tem-
perature inside the fuel tank. The sensor modifies a voltage signal
from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel GI
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive
to the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
MA
SEF394WA EM
<Reference data>
Fluid temperature Voltage* Resistance LC
°C (°F) (V) (kΩ)
20 (68) 3.5 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 2.2 0.79 - 0.90
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
q
91 (Fuel tank temperature sensor) and ground.
FE
CAUTION:
SEF012P Doing so may result in damage to the ECM’s transistor. Use a AT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC PD
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ... FA
(Possible Causes)
No.
P0180 I An excessively high or low voltage is sent to ECM. I Harness or connectors
0402 I Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM, compared (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) RA
with the voltage signals from engine coolant tempera- I Fuel tank temperature sensor
ture sensor and intake air temperature sensor.
BR
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION ST

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE- RS
the next test. BT
3) Wait at least 10 seconds. HA
SEF392X If the result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-260.
If the result is OK, go to following step. EL
NOTE:
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is already less than 90°C (194°F)
before step 4), the result will be OK. IDX
If “COOLAN TEMP/S” is above 90°C (194°F), go to the
following step.
4) Cool engine down until “COOLAN TEMP/S” is less than
90°C (194°F).
EC-257
Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-258
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC055M
EC-259
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Disconnect fuel tank temperature sensor B65 , B178
harness connector. I Harness connectors
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. B102 , F64
4. Check voltage between terminal q 2 and I Harness for open or short
SEF394WA
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. between ECM and fuel
Voltage: Approximately 5V tank temperature sensor
OK
connector.
H
E
2. Check harness continuity between termi- F64 , B102
nal q
4 and body ground. I Harness connectors
Continuity should exist. B178 , B65
SEF403U F63 , M49 , M4 , B3
OK
I Joint connector-16
between ECM and sensor
between TCM (Transmis-
sion control module) and
sensor
between fuel tank tem-
perature sensor and
SEF404U (TAC) module
connectors.
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel tank tempera-
E
(Fuel tank temperature sensor). ture sensor.
next page.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-260
Fuel tank temperature sensor
Check resistance by heating with hot water or heat gun as shown
in the figure.
GI
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
MA
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
SEF405UA
If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor. EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-261
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0300 - P0308
No. 1 - 8 Cylinder Misfire, Multiple Cylinder

Misfire
If misfire occurs, the engine speed will fluctuate. If the fluctuation is detected by the crankshaft position sen-
sor (OBD), the misfire is diagnosed.
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) Engine speed ECM
E
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)

When a misfire is detected which will overheat and damage the three way catalyst, the malfunction indi-
cator lamp (MIL) will start blinking; even during the first trip. In this condition, ECM monitors the misfire
every 200 engine revolutions.
If the misfire frequency decreases to a level that will not damage the three way catalyst, the MIL will change
from blinking to lighting up.
(After the first trip detection, the MIL will light up from engine starting. If a misfire is detected that will cause
three way catalyst damage, the MIL will start blinking.)
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
When a misfire that will not damage the three way catalyst (but will affect exhaust emission) occurs, the
malfunction indicator lamp will light up based on the second consecutive trip detection logic. In this
condition, ECM monitors the misfire for each 1,000 revolutions of the engine.
P0300 (0701) I Multiple cylinders misfire. I Improper spark plug
I Insufficient compression
P0301 (0608) I No. 1 cylinder misfires.
I Incorrect fuel pressure
P0302 (0607) I No. 2 cylinder misfires. I EGR valve
P0303 (0606) I No. 3 cylinder misfires. I The injector circuit is open or shorted.
I Injectors
I Intake air leaks
P0305 (0604) I No. 5 cylinder misfires. I The ignition secondary circuit is open or
P0306 (0603) I No. 6 cylinder misfires. shorted.
I Lack of fuel
I Magnetized signal plate (drive plate)
P0308 (0601) I No. 8 cylinder misfires. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)

PROCEDURE (Overall)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “DATA MONITOR”
SEF392X mode with CONSULT-II.
EC-262
Misfire (Cont’d)
perature.
4) Start engine again and drive at 1,500 to 3,000 rpm for GI
at least 3 minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during
driving. MA
Refer to the freeze frame data for the test driving con-
ditions.
5) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-263
Misfire (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. NG Discover air leak location
E
Start engine and run it at idle speed. Listen and repair.
for the sound of the intake air leak.
OK
H
SEC547A
CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOG- NG Repair or replace it.
E
GING.
Stop engine and visually check exhaust
tube, three way catalyst and muffler for
dent.
OK
H
CHECK EGR FUNCTION. NG Repair EGR system.
E
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE for EGR Function, EC-423.
OK
H
SEF793X
PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST. No Go to .
E
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in
“ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Is there any cylinder which does
not produce a momentary
engine speed drop?
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
When disconnecting each injector
harness connector one at a time, is
there any cylinder which does not
produce a momentary engine
speed drop?
Yes
SEF137T H
CHECK INJECTOR. No Check injector(s) and cir-
E
Does each injector make an operating cuit(s). Refer to EC-515.
sound at idle?
Yes
H
CHECK IGNITION SPARK. NG Check ignition coil with
E
1. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from power transistor and their
rocker cover. circuits. Refer to EC-399.
2. Connect a known-good spark plug to
the ignition coil assembly.
3. Place end of spark plug against a suit-
able ground and crank engine.
SEF138T
4. Check for spark.
H OK
(Go to q
A on next page.)
MEC703B
EC-264
Misfire (Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
CHECK SPARK PLUGS. E
Repair or replace spark GI
Remove the spark plugs and check for plug(s) with standard type
fouling, etc. one(s).
For spark plug type, refer to
OK “ENGINE MAINTENANCE” MA
in MA section.
H
NG
SEF575Q CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE. E
Check pistons, piston rings, EM
Refer to EM section. valves, valve seats and cyl-
I Check compression pressure. inder head gaskets.
Standard:
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm LC
1,285 (13.1, 186)
Minimum:
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
991 (10.1, 144)
Difference between each cylinder:
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/300 rpm
98 (1.0, 14)
FE
OK
H
SEF156I CHECK FUEL PRESSURE.

NG
E
Check the following. AT
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to I Fuel pump and circuit
page EC-37. Refer to EC-523.
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check I Fuel pressure regulator
fuel pressure. Refer to EC-37. PD
At idle: I Fuel lines
Approx. 235 kPa Refer to EC-38.
(2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi) I Fuel lines
Refer to “ENGINE MAIN- FA
OK TENANCE” in MA sec-
tion.
I Fuel filter for clogging
If NG, repair or replace. RA
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION TIMING. E
Adjust ignition timing. BR
Perform “BASIC INSPECTION”,
SEF112T EC-91.
OK
H ST
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace heated oxygen
[Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)]. sensor 1 (front).
EC-172.
RS
OK
H
NG BT
CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR. E
Check connectors for
Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA rusted terminals or loose
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. connections in the mass air
3.0 - 6.0 g⋅m/sec: at idling flow sensor circuit or engine HA
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm grounds.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- Refer to EC-124.
Check “mass air flow” in MODE 1 If NG, repair or replace it.
with GST. EL
12.9 - 25.3 g⋅m/sec: at 2,500 rpm
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
Check mass air flow sensor output IDX
H OK
(Go to q
B on next page.)
EC-265
Misfire (Cont’d)
q
B
H
CHECK SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART. NG Repair or replace.
E
Check items on the rough idle symptom in
“Symptom Matrix Chart”, EC-99.
OK
H
Some tests may cause a Diagnostic
Trouble Code to be set.
Erase the DTC from the ECM memory
after performing the tests. Refer to EC-67.
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-266
Knock Sensor (KS) (P0325: Left bank), (P0330:

Right bank)
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses GI
engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration
from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. MA
SEF598K EM
* Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the knock sensor. The MIL will not light for knock
sensor malfunction. LC
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. FE
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL ITEM CONDITION AT
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
105 W Knock sensor (RH) Engine is running.

108 W Knock sensor (LH)
2.0 - 3.0V PD
Idle speed
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC FA

Diagnostic Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when .... Check Items
No. (Possible Cause)
RA
P0325 I An excessively low or high voltage from the I Harness or connectors
0304 knock sensor is sent to ECM. (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Bank 1) I Knock sensor
BR
P0330
0212
(Bank 2)
ST
PROCEDURE RS
NOTE:
tery voltage is more than 10V. BT
HA
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” EL

speed. IDX
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF400X
EC-267
Right bank) (Cont’d)
TEC086M
EC-268
Right bank) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
GI
screws. MA
SEF377U H EM
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-1. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector tors.
and knock sensor sub-harness connec- LC
tor.
minal q4 (bank 1), q2 (bank 2) and
ECM terminal 105 (bank 1), 108
(bank 2).
If OK, check harness for short to ground FE
and short to power.
OK
SEF057T H
AT
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-2. NG Check the following.
E
Check harness continuity between terminal I Harness for open or short
q4 (bank 1), q2 (bank 2) and engine between knock sensor PD
ground. sub-harness connector-2
Continuity should exist. and knock sensor
If OK, check harness for short to ground If NG, repair open circuit or FA
and short to power. short to ground or short to
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter power in harness or con-
which can measure more than 10 MΩ. nectors.
I As for knock sensor RA
OK (COMPONENT
INSPECTION), refer to
below.
If NG, replace knock sen-
BR
SEF895VA
sor.
H
ST
RS
H
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
SEF355W
EL
Knock sensor
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
IDX
2. Check resistance between terminal q
2 and ground.
Approximately 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
I It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or
SEF546P
physically damaged. Use a new one.
EC-269
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (OBD)

The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transmis-
sion housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the drive plate. It
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
SEF956N
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not used to control the engine system. It is used only
for the on board diagnosis.
SEF058T

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (AC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 1.7V
(AC voltage)
Idle speed
Crankshaft position sen- SEF391X

57 B/R
sor (OBD)
Approximately 0V
SEF546T
EC-270
(Cont’d)
P0335 I The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft posi- I Harness or connectors GI
0802 tion sensor (OBD) is not sent to ECM while the (The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) circuit is
engine is running at the specified engine speed. open.)
I Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
MA
I Dead (Weak) battery
EM
PROCEDURE LC
NOTE:
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” FE
SEF400X speed.
AT
PROCEDURE”, EC-279. PD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-271
(Cont’d)
TEC056M
EC-272
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
GI
H
screws.
MA
SEF058T H EM
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor I Harness connectors
(OBD) harness connector and ECM F14 , F131 LC
harness connector. I Harness for open or
2. Check continuity between sensor termi- short between crankshaft
nal q
1 and ECM terminal q 57 with CON- position sensor (OBD)
SULT-II or tester. and ECM
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to short to ground or short to
ground and short to power. power in harness or con- FE
nectors.
OK
SEF377U
H
NG
AT
Check harness continuity between termi- I Harness connectors
nal q
2 and engine ground. F14 , F131
PD
If OK, check harness for short to power. F63 , M69
OK M4 , B3 FA
short between crankshaft
position sensor (OBD) RA
harness connector and
ECM
I Harness for open or BR
SEF407U short between crankshaft
position sensor (OBD)
and throttle actuator con-
trol module (TAC) ST
position sensor and TCM RS
Module)
short to power in harness BT
or connectors.
H
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace crankshaft posi-
HA
E
SEF799Q [Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)]. tion sensor (OBD).
next page. EL
OK
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR IDX
H
INSPECTION END
EC-273
(Cont’d)
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
SEF960N
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Resistance:
Approximately 166.5 - 203.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
SEF134W
EC-274
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS)

The camshaft position sensor (CMPS) is a basic component of the
ECM. It monitors engine speed and piston position. It sends signals
to the ECM to control fuel injection, ignition timing and other func- GI
tions.
The camshaft position sensor has a rotor plate and a wave-form-
ing circuit. The rotor plate has 360 slits for 1° signal and 8 slits for MA
90° signal. Light Emitting Diodes (LED) and photo diodes are built
into the wave-forming circuit.
MEF328G
When the rotor plate passes between the LED and the photo diode, EM
the following happens:
Slits in the rotor plate continually cut the transmitted light to the
photo diode from the LED. This generates rough-shaped pulses LC
converted into on-off pulses by the wave forming circuit sent to the
ECM.
FE
AT
SEF503J

PD
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the FA
TER-
WIRE DATA RA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running. BR
0 - 1V
For a few seconds after turning ignition switch ST
BATTERY VOLTAGE RS
switch “OFF”
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-275
Camshaft Position Sensor (CMPS) (Cont’d)
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0.6 - 1.0V
Idle speed
SEF540T
55 Crankshaft position sen-
P
58 sor (REF) Approximately 0.8 - 0.9V
SEF544T
Approximately 2.5V
Idle speed
SEF547T
59 L
(POS) Approximately 2.4V
SEF548T
130 BATTERY VOLTAGE

131 (11 - 14V)
EC-276
Diagnostic
Check Items
Trouble Code Malfunction is detected when ....
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0340 A) Either 1° or 90° signal is not sent to ECM for the first I Harness or connectors GI
0101 few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor circuit is open or
........................................................................................... shorted.)
B) Either 1° or 90° signal is not sent to ECM during I Starter motor (Refer to EL section.) MA
engine running. I Starting system circuit (Refer to EL section.)
........................................................................................... I Dead (Weak) battery
C) Either 1° or 90° signal is not in the normal pattern EM
during engine running.
LC
PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If DTC cannot be
confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B and C”.
NOTE: FE
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting AT
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- PD
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
FA
RA
BR
Procedure for malfunction A ST

2) Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle RS
speed.
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START”
for at least 2 seconds.) BT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- HA
SEF400X Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above.
Procedure for malfunction B and C EL

2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. IDX
speed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-277
TEC030M
EC-278
INSPECTION START
H
No GI
CHECK STARTING SYSTEM. E Check starting system.
Does the engine turn over? (Refer to EL section.)
(Does the starter motor operate?)
MA
Yes
H
SEF802W 1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. EM

screws.
LC
H
NG
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor I Harness for open or
harness connector. short between camshaft
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. position sensor and
3. Check voltage between terminal q2 ECM FE
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I Harness for open or
Voltage: Battery voltage short between camshaft
position sensor and
SEF377U OK ECM relay AT
short to ground and short
to power in harness or PD
connectors.
H FA
NG
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor RA
harness connector and ECM harness
connector.
minal q3 and ECM terminal q 59 , terminal BR
SEF872Q q4 and ECM terminals q 55 , q
58 .
If OK, check harness for short to ST
OK
RS
H
NG
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors BT
minal q1 and engine ground. If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to power in harness
If OK, check harness for short to or connectors. HA
power.
SEF409U
OK EL
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace camshaft position
[Camshaft position sensor]. sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on IDX
next page.
H
OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF150T
EC-279
q
A
H
H
Trouble is not fixed.
NG
Visually check the surface of camshaft E
Replace camshaft sprocket.
sprocket for chipping.
H
OK
INSPECTION END
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating tempera-
ture.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals q 59 (POS) or q 55 , q
58
(REF) (ECM terminal) and ground with DC range.
CAUTION:
SEF839U
Condition Terminals Voltage

Approx. 2.5V
q
59 and ground (POS)
SEF547T
Engine running at idle
Approx. 0.7 - 1.2V
q
55 , q
58 and ground (REF)
SEF046V
q
59 and ground (POS)
SEF548T
Engine at 2,000 rpm
q
55 , q
58 and ground (REF)
SEF544T
If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
EC-280
EGR Function (Close)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor Engine speed
E
GI
E
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature MA

E
Start signal E
EGRC-sole-
Ignition switch
E
ECM
noid valve EM
E
LC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
E
Secondary throttle position sensor Throttle position

E
FE
This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the I Low engine coolant temperature
EGR valve to suit engine operating conditions. This I Engine starting
cut-and-control operation is accomplished through I Engine stopped AT
the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve. When the I Engine idling
ECM detects any of the following conditions, current I Excessively high engine coolant temperature
does not flow through the solenoid valve. This I Mass air flow sensor malfunction PD
causes the port vacuum to be discharged into the I Low vehicle speed or high vehicle speed
atmosphere. The EGR valve remain closed. I TCS is operating
FA
RA
BR
ST
SEF317U
RS
BT
HA
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION EL
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the IDX
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response
to throttle valve opening. The vacuum controls the movement of a
taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR valve.
SEF783K
EC-281
EGR Function (Close) (Cont’d)
EGRC-solenoid valve
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM.
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the sole-
noid valve is energized. The signal reaches to the EGR valve.
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, a plunger will then move to
cut the vacuum signal from the intake manifold collector to the EGR
valve.
SEF383RD

I Lift up drive wheels Idle OFF (CUT)

EGRC SOL/V I Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
ON (FLOW)
I No-load rpm

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Less than 4.5V
Idle speed
0 - 1.0V
Lift up drive wheels and rev engine up from 0 - 0.7V

10 L/Y EGRC-solenoid valve idle to 3,000 rpm in “D” position.

If the absence of EGR flow is detected by EGR temperature sen-
sor under the condition that calls for EGR, a low-flow malfunction
is diagnosed.
SEF073P
EC-282
P0400 I No EGR flow is detected under conditions that call I EGR valve stuck closed
0302 for EGR. I EGRC-BPT valve
I Vacuum hose GI
I EGRC-solenoid valve
I EGR passage
I EGR temperature sensor MA
I Exhaust gas leaks
EM
PROCEDURE LC
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn FE
I P0400 will not be displayed in the “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” AT
SEF988Z mode with CONSULT-II even though the DTC work support
test result is “NG”.
TESTING CONDITION: PD
For best results, perform at a temperature above 5°C (41°F).
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”
2) Check “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” FA
mode witch CONSULT-II.
Confirm COOLAN TEMP/S value is within the range
listed below. RA
COOLANT TEMP/S: Less than 40°C (104°F)
If the value is out of range, park the vehicle in a cool
place and allow the engine temperature to stabilize. Do BR
SEC043C not attempt to lower the coolant temperature with a fan
or means other than ambient air. Doing so may produce
an inaccurate diagnostic result. ST
3) Select “EGR SYSTEM P0400” of “EGR SYSTEM” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Touch “START”. RS
5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle. When
the engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F),
immediately go to the next step. BT
6) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH)
once and then stop vehicle.
If “COMPLETED” with “OK” appears on CONSULT-II HA
SEF235Y
screen, go to step 9).
If “COMPLETED” does not appear on CONSULT-II
screen, go to the following step. EL
7) Check the output voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” at
closed throttle position.
8) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will IDX
conditions until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
(It will take approximately 30 seconds or more.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,000 rpm
Vehicle speed: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
EC-283
THRTL POS SEN: X − (X + 0.53) V
X = Voltage value measured at
step 7)
from step 2).
SEF396W

Use this procedure to check the overall EGR function. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1) Lift up drive wheels.
Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to nor-
2) Shift to “D” position.
3) Check the EGR valve lifting when revving engine from
idle up to 3,000 rpm.
EGR valve should lift up and down without sticking.
AEC783 4) Check voltage between EGR temperature sensor harness con-
nector terminal q1 and ground at idle speed.
Less than 4.5V should exist.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
6) Check harness continuity between EGR temperature sensor
harness connector terminal q 2 and ECM terminal 129 .
7) Perform “COMPONENTS INSPECTION”, “EGR temperature
sensor”. Refer to EC-289.
SEF410U
SEF109L
SEF642Q
EC-284
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC057M
EC-285
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. E
Repair or replace exhaust
Check exhaust pipes and muffler for system.
leaks.
OK
H
SEF099P OK
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE TO EGR E
CHECK COMPONENT
VALVE. (EGR valve).
1. Lift up drive wheels. Refer to “COMPONENT
2. Start engine and warm it up to INSPECTION”, EC-430.
normal operating temperature.
NG
3. Disconnect vacuum hose to
EGR valve.
4. Check for vacuum at hoses.
Vacuum should not exist at
idle.
5. Check for vacuum when revving
engine from idle up to 3,000
rpm using the following method.
SEF109T I Select “EGRC SOLENOID
VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-II and turn the
solenoid valve “ON”.
Vacuum should exist when rev-
ving engine.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
H
1. Warm engine up to normal oper-
ating temperature. Replace EGR valve.
3. Lift up drive wheels.
4. Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”)
and shift to “1” position.
SEF764X
5. Disconnect vacuum hose from
EGR valve. Check vacuum at
idle.
Vacuum should not exist at
idle.
6. Rev up engine speed from idle
up to 3,000 rpm.
Vacuum should exist when
revving engine.
NG
H
NG
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. Repair it.
E
Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks
SEF109L or improper connection or misconnecting.
Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-19.
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-286
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Repair or replace EGRC-
E
(EGRC-solenoid valve). solenoid valve or repair GI
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. circuit.
2. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve “ON”
and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST” MA
mode with CONSULT-II and
check operating sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF764X
1. Turn ignition “OFF”. EM
2. Disconnect ECM harness con-
nector.
3. Connect suitable jumping wire LC
between ECM terminal q 10 and
engine ground.
4. Check operating sound of
EGRC-solenoid valve.
OK
H FE
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EGRC-solenoid
E
(EGRC-solenoid valve). valve.
SEF358W
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on AT
next page.
OK
H PD
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace EVAP canister.
(EVAP canister).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on FA
next page.
OK
H RA
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. NG Repair it.
E
Check vacuum hose into EVAP canister
for clogging, cracks and improper connec- BR
tion.
OK
H ST
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EGRC-BPT valve.
E
(EGRC-BPT valve).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on RS
next page.
OK
H BT
Check resistance of EGR temperature
sensor. Refer to EC-289.
HA
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. EL
H
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-287
EGR valve
I Apply vacuum to EGR valve vacuum port with a hand vacuum
pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
I Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.
MEF137D
EGRC-solenoid valve
Check air passage continuity.
Perform “EGRC SOLENOID VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST”
mode.
Air passage Air passage
Condition
continuity continuity
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
SEF799X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check solenoid valve, following the table as shown below:

Conditions continuity continuity
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
12V direct current supply
between terminals q 1 Yes No
and q
2
No supply No Yes
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace the

MEC488B solenoid valve.
EC-288
EGR temperature sensor
Check resistance change and resistance value.
EGR temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) (V) (MΩ)
0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11 GI
50 (122) 2.53 0.09 - 0.12
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024 MA
If NG, replace EGR temperature sensor.
SEF643Q EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF320U
EGRC-BPT valve ST
1. Plug one of two ports of EGRC-BPT valve.
2. Vacuum from the other port and check for leakage while apply-
ing a pressure above 0.981 kPa (100 mmH2O, 3.94 inH2O) RS
from under EGRC-BPT valve.
3. If a leakage is noted, replace the valve.
BT
HA
SEF083P
EL
IDX
EC-289
EGRC-BPT Valve Function
SEF091PI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The EGRC-BPT valve monitors exhaust pressure to activate the diaphragm, controlling throttle body vacuum
applied to the EGR valve. In other words, recirculated exhaust gas is controlled in response to positioning of
the EGR valve or to engine operation.

If too much EGR flow exists due to an EGRC-BPT valve malfunction, off idle engine roughness will increase.
If the roughness is excessive, then the vacuum to the EGR valve is interrupted through the EGRC-solenoid
valve. If the engine roughness is reduced at that time, the EGRC-BPT valve malfunction is indicated.
P0402 I The EGRC-BPT valve does not operate properly. I EGRC-BPT valve
0306 I EGR valve
I Loose or disconnected rubber tube
I Blocked rubber tube
I Blocked exhaust system
I Orifice
EC-290
EGRC-BPT Valve Function (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE: GI
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting MA
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF930V I For best results, perform the test at temperature above EM
5°C (41°F) or higher.
battery voltage is more than 11V at idle. LC
1) Install vacuum gauge between EGRC-BPT valve and
EGR valve as shown in the figure.
perature.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “EGRC-BPT/V FE
P0402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
SEC044C
5) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle. AT
closed throttle position and open throttle position. PD
be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen and the bar
chart may increase. Maintain the conditions many times FA
until “COMPLETED” appears.
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,000 - 1,600 rpm RA
THRTL POS SEN: X − (X + 0.89) V BR
SEC045C X = Voltage value measured at
step 7)
I The bar chart on CONSULT-II screen indicates the ST
status of this test. However, the test may be fin-
ished before the bar chart becomes full scale.
I If the bar chart indication does not continue to RS
progress, completely release accelerator pedal
once and try to meet the conditions again.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT-II BT
screen, retry from step 4).
If OK, go to next step. HA
9) Open engine hood.
SEC046C 10) Raise engine speed to 2,000 to 2,800 rpm under no-
load and hold it. Then touch “NEXT” of the CONSULT-II
screen.
EL
11) Check vacuum gauge while keeping engine speed
2,000 to 2,800 rpm.
Vacuum should be 0 to −20.0 kPa (0 to −150 mmHg, IDX
0 to −5.91 inHg).
If OK, touch “YES” in the CONSULT-II screen.
PEF034W
EC-291
12) Check the rubber tube between intake manifold
collector, EGR valve and EGRC-BPT valve for
misconnection, cracks, blockages or twisting.
If NG, repair.
If OK, touch “YES” in the CONSULT-II screen.
13) If CONSULT-II instructs to carry out “OVERALL FUNC-
TION CHECK”, go to next step. If “NG” is displayed,
refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-293.
PEF035W
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EGRC-BPT
valve. During the check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1) Install vacuum gauge between EGRC-BPT valve and EGR
valve as shown in the figure.
2) Lift up vehicle.
3) Connect the intake manifold collector and the EGRC-BPT
valve with a rubber tube that has 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. orifice.
(The intake manifold vacuum will be directly applied to the
SEF930V EGRC-BPT valve.)
4) Start engine and shift to 1st position.
5) Check vacuum gauge while keeping engine speed 2,400±400
rpm.
Vacuum should be 0 to −20.0 kPa (0 to −150 mmHg, 0 to
−5.91 inHg).
6) Check rubber tube between the intake manifold collector,
EGRC-solenoid valve and EGRC-BPT valve for
misconnection, cracks, blockages or twisting.
7) If NG, repair or replace.
EC-292
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK HOSE. NG
E
Repair or replace vacuum GI
Check vacuum hose for clogging and hose.
improper connection. Refer to “Vacuum
Hose Drawing”, EC-19. MA
OK
H
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. NG Repair or replace exhaust EM
E
Check exhaust system for collapse. system.
OK
H LC
CHECK ORIFICE. NG Replace vacuum hose.
E
Make sure orifice is installed in vacuum
hose between EGRC-BPT valve and
EGRC-solenoid valve.
OK
H FE
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EGRC-BPT valve.
E
(EGRC-BPT valve).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on AT
next page.
H
OK PD
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace camshaft position
E
(Camshaft position sensor). sensor.
FA
EC-280.
H
OK RA
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace mass air flow sen-
E
BR
EC-131.
H
OK ST
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EGRC-solenoid
E
RS
EC-288.
OK BT
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Repair or replace EGR
E
(EGR valve). valve. HA
EC-288.
OK EL
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. IDX
H
INSPECTION END
EC-293
EGRC-BPT valve
2. Vacuum from the other port and check leakage without apply-
ing any pressure from under EGRC-BPT valve.
Leakage should exist.
SEF172P
EC-294
Three Way Catalyst Function (P0420: Left

bank), (P0430: Right bank)
ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of heated oxygen sen- GI
sor 1 (front) and 2 (rear).
A three way catalyst with high oxygen storage capacity will indicate
a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear). As MA
oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
(rear) switching frequency will increase.
SEF184UG When the frequency ratio of heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) 2 (rear) EM
approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst malfunc-
tion is diagnosed.
LC
P0420 I Three way catalyst does not operate properly. I Three way catalyst
0702 I Three way catalyst does not have enough oxygen storage I Exhaust tube
(Bank 1) capacity. I Intake air leaks
I Injectors
P0430 FE
I Injector leaks
0703
I Spark plug
(Bank 2)
I Improper ignition timing AT

PROCEDURE
PD
CAUTION:
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition RA
the next test.
1) Start engine and drive vehicle at a speed of more than BR
SEC047C 70 km/h (43 MPH) for 2 consecutive minutes.
3) Set “MANU TRIG” and “HI SPEED”, then select ST
“HO2S1 (B1) (B2)”, “HO2S2 (B1) (B2)”, “HO2S1 MNTR
(B1) (B2)”, “HO2S2 MNTR (B1) (B2)” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode with CONSULT-II. RS
4) Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen with engine
speed held at 2,000 rpm constantly under no load.
5) Make sure that the switching frequency between “RICH” BT
and “LEAN” of “HO2S2 MNTR (B1) (B2)” is much less
than that of “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” as shown below.
Switching frequency ratio = HA
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) switching fre-
PEF215U
quency
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) switching fre- EL
quency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, the three way catalyst
IDX
is not operating properly.
If the “HO2S1 MNTR (B1) (B2)” does not indicate
“RICH” and “LEAN” periodically more than 5 times
within 10 seconds at step 4), perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSES FOR DTC P0133 first.
If the result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC
If the result is OK, go to following step.
EC-295
bank), (P0430: Right bank) (Cont’d)
6) Select “AUTO TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
7) Drive vehicle at a speed more than 84 to 96 km/h (52
to 60 MPH) with D position (“OD” ON) for at least 10
consecutive minutes.
(Drive the vehicle in an area where vehicle speed and
accelerator pressure can be held steady and constant.)
If the result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
EC-297.
8) Select “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode
with CONSULT-II.
9) Verify that “CATALYST” is “CMPLT”.
If not “CMPLT”, repeat the test from step 3).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the three way
catalyst.
During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
3) Set voltmeters probes between ECM terminals q 82 (B2),
q83 (B1) (sensor signal front) and ground. q89 (B2), q90
SEF746W (B1)
(sensor signal rear) and ground.
4) Keep engine speed at 2,000 rpm constant under no
load.
5) Make sure that the voltage switching frequency (high &
low) between ECM terminals q 89 and ground is much
less than that of ECM terminals q 82 and ground (right
bank). Or q 90 and ground is much less than that of the
terminals q83 and ground (left bank).
Switching frequency ratio =
Heated oxygen sensor 2 (rear) voltage switching

frequency
Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) voltage switching
frequency
This ratio should be less than 0.75.
If the ratio is greater than above, it means three way
catalyst does not operate properly.
NOTE:
If the voltage at terminal q 82 or q
83 does not switch peri-
odically more than 5 times within 10 seconds at step 4,
perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0130 or
P0150 first, EC-166.
EC-296
bank), (P0430: Right bank) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H GI
NG
CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. E
Repair or replace it.
Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler
for dent. MA
OK
H
SEF099P CHECK FOR EXHAUST AIR LEAK.
NG
E
Repair or replace. EM
exhaust air leak before the three way cata-
lyst.
LC
H
OK
NG
CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK. E
Repair or replace.
intake air leak after the mass air flow sen-
sor.
H
OK FE
NG
Check for ignition timing. E
Adjust ignition timing.
Refer to “Basic inspection”, EC-91.
SEF575Q
AT
OK
H
NG
CHECK IGNITION SPARK. Check ignition coil with
1. Disconnect ignition coil assembly from
E
power transistor and their PD
rocker cover. circuits. Refer to EC-399.
2. Connect a known-good spark plug to
the ignition coil assembly. FA
3. Place end of spark plug against a suit-
able ground and crank engine.
4. Check for spark.
OK RA
H
NG
CHECK INJECTORS. E
Perform TROUBLE DIAG-
1. Refer to WIRING DIAGRAM for NOSIS FOR NON-DE- BR
SEF415U Injectors, EC-515. TECTABLE ITEMS,
2. Stop engine and then turn ignition “Injectors”, EC-515.
switch “ON”. Repair harness or connec-
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals tors. ST
q1 ,q2 ,q 3 ,q5 ,q 6 ,q7 ,q
8 ,q
14 and
Battery voltage should exist.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. RS
H
OK
Remove injector assembly. BT
Refer to EC-38.
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected
to injector gallery.
HA
H
Drips
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
Replace the injectors from
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor which fuel is dripping. EL
harness connector.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injec-
tor. IDX
H
Does not drip. Trouble is not fixed.
E
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR Replace three way catalyst.
H
Trouble is fixed.
INSPECTION END
EC-297

(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure)
Note: If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See
EC-464.)

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using of engine intake manifold vacuum.
If pressure does not increase, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the fuel tank and EVAP can-
ister purge control valve, under the following “Vacuum test” conditions.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister
purge control valve. The EVAP canister vent control valve will then be closed to shut the EVAP purge line off.
The EVAP canister purge volume control valve and EVAP canister purge control valve are opened to depres-
surize the EVAP purge line using intake manifold vacuum. After this occurs, the EVAP canister purge volume
control valve and EVAP canister purge control valve will be closed.
SEF850U
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0440 I EVAP control system has a leak. I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
0705 I EVAP control system does not operate properly. I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
I Foreign matter caught in fuel filler cap.
I Leak is in line between intake manifold and EVAP
canister purge control valve.
I Foreign matter caught in EVAP canister vent control
valve.
I EVAP canister or fuel tank leaks
I EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber tube) leaks
I EVAP purge line rubber tube bent.
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to EVAP control system
pressure sensor
I EVAP canister vent control valve and the circuit
I EVAP canister purge control valve
I EVAP canister purge volume control valve and the
circuit
I EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve
I MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve and the circuit
I Blocked or bent rubber tube to MAP/BARO switch
solenoid valve
I O-ring of EVAP canister vent control valve is missing
or damaged.
I Water separator
I EVAP canister is saturated with water.
I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
I Use only a genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
I If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on.
I Use only a genuine NISSAN rubber tube as a replacement.
EC-298
(Small Leak) (Negative Pressure) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, perform TROUBLE GI
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See EC-464.)
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn MA
SEC048C EM
TESTING CONDITION:
I Perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” when the fuel level is
less than 3/4 full and vehicle is placed on the flat level LC
surface.
I It is better that fuel level is low.
I Always perform test at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
I Battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. FE
PEF669U
mode with CONSULT-II. AT
4) Check that the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F)
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F) PD
5) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440” of “EVAPORATIVE
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON-
SULT-II. FA
Follow the instruction displayed.
NOTE:
I If the CONSULT-II screen shown at left is displayed, RA
stop the engine and stabilize the vehicle tempera-
ture at 25°C (77°F) or cooler. After “FUEL T/TMP SE”
becomes less than 30°C (86°F), retest. BR
PEF929V
(Use a fan to reduce the stabilization time.)
6) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. ST
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- RS
NOTE:
I Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving pattern” on
EC-56 before driving vehicle. BT
I It is better that the fuel level is low.
86°F). HA
PEF297U 1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving pattern”, EC-56.
3) Stop vehicle. EL
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the follow-
ing step. IDX
I If SRT of EVAP system is set, the result will be OK.
6) Start engine.
It is not necessary to cool engine down before the driv-
ing.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving pattern”,
EC-56.
8) Stop vehicle.
EC-299
I If P1447 is displayed on the screen, go to “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1447”, EC-457.
I If P0440 is displayed on the screen, go to “DIAGNOS-
TIC PROCEDURE”, EC-301.
I If P0440 and P1440 are not displayed on the screen, go
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set, go to step 6).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE:
EC-56 before driving vehicle.
86°F).
1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”).
3) Stop vehicle.
5) Turn ignition switch “ON” and perform “Diagnostic Test
Mode (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
EC-300
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. E If genuine NISSAN fuel
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. filler cap is not used,
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler replace with NISSAN fuel MA
cap design. filler cap.
3. Check for air releasing sound while
opening the fuel filler cap.
SEF434Q If the air releasing sound is heard, go to EM
.
If the air releasing sound is not heard,
check the following.
Was the cap tightened properly?
If Yes, check fuel filler cap vacuum
LC
relief valve.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
SYSTEM”, EC-27.
If No, open fuel filler cap, then clean
cap and filler neck thread using air
blower. Retighten until ratcheting sound
is heard.
FE
OK
H
NG
SEF462U
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK.
I Never use compressed air or a high
E Repair or replace. AT
pressure pump.
I Improper installation of adapter to
the service port may cause a leak.
I Do not2 exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 PD
kg/cm , 0.6 psi) of pressure in the
system.
To locate the EVAP leak, do the follow-
ing. FA
1. Install the EVAP service port adapter
and the pressure pump securely.
Select “EVAP SYSTEM RA
CLOSE” of “WORK SUP-
PORT” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Touch “START” and apply
pressure to the EVAP line BR
SEF463U until the pressure indicator
reaches the middle of the bar
graph.
4. Using EVAP leak detector,
locate the leak. Refer to the
ST
instruction manual for more
details about the leak detec-
tor.
Refer to “Evaporative Emis- RS
sion Line Drawing”, EC-29.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP BT
canister vent control valve. The
valve will close. (Continue to
apply 12 volts until the end of
test.)
4. Apply 12 volts DC to vacuum
HA
SEF200U
cut valve bypass valve. The
valve will open. (Continue to
apply 12V until the end of test.)
5. Pressurize the EVAP line using EL
pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to
0.79 inHg), then remove pump
and service port adapter. IDX
6. Locate the leak using a leak
detector. Refer to the instruction
manual for more details about
the leak detector. Refer to
“Evaporative Emission Line
Drawing”, EC-29.
H OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF598U
EC-301
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace EVAP canister
(EVAP canister purge volume control purge volume control
valve). valve.
EC-304.
OK
H
SEF599U NG
(EVAP canister purge control valve). purge control valve.
EC-492.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT E Repair or replace EVAP
(EVAP canister vent control valve, O-ring canister vent control valve
and water separator). and O-ring or harness/
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR connectors.
P0446” for circuit, EC-315 and “COMPO-
NENT INSPECTION”, EC-306.
OK
SEF593U H
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- E Replace EVAP canister
RATED WITH WATER. and check the following.
1. Remove EVAP canister with EVAP can- 1. Check hose connections
ister vent control valve attached. to the EVAP canister
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP and water separator for
canister. If it will, weigh the EVAP canis- clogging and poor con-
ter with the vent control valve attached. nection.
If the weight is: 2. Check water separator.
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG Refer to “COMPONENT
Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK INSPECTION”, EC-306.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
SEF594U (EVAP canister purge control solenoid I EVAP canister purge con-
valve). trol solenoid valve.
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to Refer to “COMPONENTS
EVAP canister purge control INSPECTION”, EC-440 and
solenoid valve. “P1492 EVAP canister
2. Start engine. purge control solenoid
3. Perform “PURG CONT S/V” in valve” for circuit, EC-305.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode. I Vacuum hoses for clog-
4. Select “ON” on CONSULT-II ging or disconnection.
screen to turn on “PURG CONT Refer to “Vacuum Hose
S/V”. Drawing”, EC-19.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum
when revving engine up to 2,000
rpm.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF596U 1. Start engine and warm it up to
2. Stop engine.
EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at
least 60 seconds.
rpm.
H OK
qB
(Go to next page.)
SEF765X
EC-302
q
B
H
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
Replace absolute pressure GI
E
EC-306. MA
OK
H
SEF597U NG EM
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace MAP/BARO
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). switch solenoid valve.
EC-334. LC
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace fuel tank tempera-
(Fuel tank temperature sensor). ture sensor.
EC-308.
FE
OK
H AT
SEF396W NG
CHECK COMPONENT. E Repair or reconnect the
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, hose.
fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or
improper connection. PD
Refer to “Evaporative Emission Line
Drawing”, EC-29.
OK
FA
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT. E Replace EVAP control sys-
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor. RA
EC-325.
OK BR
SEF394WA H
Clean EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
tube) using air blower. ST
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR RS
H BT
INSPECTION END
HA
EL
IDX
EC-303
EVAP canister purge volume control valve
1. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
harness connector.
2. Check resistance between the following terminals.
terminal q 2 and terminals q 1 ,q 3
Resistance:
Approximately 35 - 43Ω [At 25°C (77°F)]
3. Reconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
harness connector.
4. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control valve
from intake manifold collector and disconnect hoses
from the valve.
(Plug the purge hoses. The EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control valve harness connector should remain
connected.)
6. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST”
mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EVAP canister
purge volume control valve shaft moves smoothly for-
SEF353Q
ward and backward according to the valve opening.
If NG, replace the EVAP canister purge volume control
valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
harness connector.
Resistance:
SEC049C
harness connector.
from the valve.
connected.)
5. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. Check that EVAP
canister purge volume control valve shaft moves
smoothly forward and backward according to the igni-
tion switch position.
SEF763P valve.
SEF593U
EC-304
EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve
2. Select “PURG CONT S/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-II. GI
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem-
perature.
4. Disconnect vacuum hose at EVAP canister purge con- MA
trol valve.
5. Touch “ON” and “OFF” and check for vacuum passing
SEF765X through the hose. EM
Condition Vacuum
Idle Not exist
LC
2,000 rpm Exist
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FE
SEF400W
Condition continuity continuity AT
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

between terminals
Yes No PD
No supply No Yes
FA
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid
valve.
RA
BR
SEF313Q
EVAP canister purge control valve ST

Check EVAP canister purge control valve as follows:
1. Blow air in port qA and q C , then ensure that there is no leak-
age. RS
2. Blow air in port q
B , then ensure that there is a resistance to flow
out of port qC .
3. Apply vacuum to port q A . [Approximately −13.3 to −20.0 kPa BT
(−100 to −150 mmHg, −3.94 to −5.91 inHg)]
Blow air in port qC and ensure free flow out of port q B .
HA
SEF809W
EL
IDX
EC-305
EVAP canister vent control valve
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Condition Air passage continuity
VENT CONTROL/V between qA and q B
ON No
OFF Yes
SEC050C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air passage continuity

Condition
between qA and q B
12V direct current supply between ter-

No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean valve using air

AEC783A blower or replace as necessary.
If the portion q
B is rusted, replace control valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly.
Water separator
1. Check visually for insect nests in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance.
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that qA and q C are not clogged by blowing air into q
B with
qA , and then q
C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
Do not disassemble water separator.
SEF829T

connected.
terminal q
64 and ground.
SEF747W
EC-306
inHg) to absolute pressure sensor as shown in figure and
check the output voltage.
The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4V lower than the value GI
measured in step 3.
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it. MA
Doing so will damage the absolute pressure sensor. EM
5. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor.
LC
FE
AT
MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve
PD
perature.
2. Perform “MAP/BARO SW/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode FA
with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the following.
I Condition: At idle under no-load. RA
I CONSULT-II display
MAP/BARO SW/V ABSOL PRES/SE (Voltage)
BR
SEF767X
BARO More than 2.6V
MAP Less than the voltage at BARO
ST
I Time for voltage to change
MAP/BARO SW/V Required time to switch
RS
BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO
BT
4. If NG, check solenoid valve as shown below.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve. HA
SEF768X
2. Check air passage continuity.
Air passage Air passage EL

Condition continuity continuity
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

IDX
and q
2
No supply No Yes
3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace

solenoid valve.
MEC488B
EC-307
in the figure.

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
SEF405UA If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor.
EC-308

Volume Control Valve (Circuit)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
E
GI
Amount of intake air MA

EM
Engine coolant temperature sen- E
sor
LC
Start signal
Ignition switch E EVAP canister
ECM E purge volume
control valve
Throttle position
E
FE
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas AT

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) E
PD
Fuel temperature in fuel tank
Fuel tank temperature sensor E
FA
Vehicle speed
RA
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor BR
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti-
mum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con-
ditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the ST
air flow changes.
RS
BT
HA
The EVAP canister purge volume control valve uses a step motor
to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. This IDX
motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output
pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in
sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or
closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is
needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain volt-
age signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular
opening.
SEF249P
EC-309
Volume Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d)
Idle 0 step
PURG VOL C/V Vehicle running
I Air conditioner switch “OFF” —
(Shift lever “1”)

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
Ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1V


BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF”
130 BATTERY VOLTAGE

131 (11 - 14V)

123 W/L Current return
28 BR/Y Engine is running. 0 - 0.4V or

EVAP canister purge vol-
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ume control valve Idle speed
29 G (11 - 14V)
35 G/OR Engine is running. 0 - 0.4V or

BATTERY VOLTAGE
36 L/B (11 - 14V)

P0443 I An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through I Harness or connectors
1008 the valve. (The valve circuit is open or shorted.)
I EVAP canister purge volume control valve
EC-310
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF272Y
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that bat- EM
tery voltage is more than 11V at ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. LC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-311
TEC823
EC-312
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
E
MA
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge vol- short between EVAP
ume control valve harness connector. canister purge volume
SEF417U 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. control valve and ECM EM
2 , relay
q5 and engine ground with CONSULT-II I Harness for open or
or tester. short between EVAP LC
Voltage: Battery voltage canister purge volume
control valve and ECM
OK If NG, repair harness or
connectors.
H
NG FE
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E
Replace harness or con-
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. nectors.
SEF578Q 3. Check harness continuity between
AT
ECM terminal q 28 and terminal q1 ,
ECM terminal q 35 and terminal q3 , PD
ECM terminal q 36 and terminal q6 .
If OK, check harness for short to FA
OK
H RA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace EVAP canister
valve). valve. BR
next page.
OK
ST
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. RS
H
INSPECTION END BT
HA
SEF418U
EL
IDX
EC-313
harness connector.
Resistance:
harness connector.
from the valve.
connected.)
SEF353Q
valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
harness connector.
Resistance:
SEC049C harness connector.
from the valve.
connected.)
SEF763P valve.
SEF417U
EC-314
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent

Control Valve (Circuit)
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can- GI
ister and is used to seal the canister vent.
This solenoid (the EVAP canister vent control valve) responds to
signals from the ECM. MA
When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil in the solenoid valve
is energized.
SEF032W A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal EM
the vent is necessary for the on board diagnosis of other evapora-
tive emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains LC
opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the
evaporative emission control system is depressurized and allows
“EVAP Control System (Small Leak)” diagnosis.
FE
SEF419U
AT
PD
VENT CONT/V I Ignition switch: ON OFF
FA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE RA

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the BR
TER- ST
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
RS
EVAP canister vent con- BATTERY VOLTAGE
20 P/B Ignition switch “ON”
BT
Diagnostic
Check Items
HA
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0446 I An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through I Harness or connectors EL
0903 EVAP canister vent control valve. (EVAP canister vent control valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
I EVAP canister vent control valve
IDX
EC-315
Control Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
DURE” has just been completed, always turn ignition switch
“OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next
test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery
SEF392X
voltage is more than 11V at idle.
3) Start engine and wait at least 8 seconds.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-316
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC058M
EC-317
INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II E Without CONSULT-II

Go to CHECK POWER SUPPLY .
H
OK
CHECK CIRCUIT. E Go to “CHECK COMPO-
1. Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in NENT” after procedure .
SEF419U “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that ratching sound is heard
from the vent control valve.
NG
H
NG
1. Disconnect EVAP canister vent control I Harness connectors
valve harness connector. C14 , B64 , B65 , B178
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness connectors
3. Check voltage between terminal q2 and B102 , F64 , F63 , M49
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I 10A fuse
Voltage: Battery voltage I Harness for open or
short between EVAP
OK canister vent control
SEC052C
valve and fuse
connectors.
H
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E Check the following.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. C14 , B64 , B65 , B178
terminal q20 and terminal q
1 . B102 , F64
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or
If OK, check harness for short to short between EVAP
ground and short to power. canister vent control
valve and ECM
SEF150S OK If NG, repair open circuit or
nectors.
H
NG
(EVAP canister vent control valve and vent control valve and
O-ring). O-ring.
next page.
OK
H
SEF420U
H
INSPECTION END
EC-318
Check air passage continuity. GI
CONSULT-II.
MA
SEC050C ON No EM
OFF Yes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LC

Condition
between qA and q B
12V direct current supply between ter- FE

No
minals q1 and q 2
AEC783A
No supply Yes AT
blower or replace as necessary. PD
If portion qB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-319

Pressure Sensor
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the
purge line. The sensor output voltage to the ECM increases as
pressure increases. The EVAP control system pressure sensor is
not used to control the engine system. It is used only for on board
diagnosis.
SEF429Q
SEF954S

EVAP SYS PRES I Ignition switch: ON Approx. 3.4V

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
98 BR/W Sensors’ power supply Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 5V
EVAP control system

92 W/R Ignition switch “ON” Approximately 3.4V
pressure sensor

P0450 I An improper voltage signal from EVAP control sys- I Harness or connectors
0704 tem pressure sensor is sent to ECM. (The EVAP control system pressure sensor circuit
is open or shorted.)
I Rubber hose to EVAP control system pressure
sensor is clogged, bent, kinked, disconnected or
not corrected properly.
I EVAP canister vent control valve (The valve is
stuck open.)
I EVAP canister
I Rubber hose from EVAP canister vent control
valve to water separator
EC-320
Pressure Sensor (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test. MA
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF273Y
I Always perform test at a temperature above 5°C (41°F). EM
1) Start engine and warm it at idle up to normal operating LC
temperature.
5) Make sure that “TANK F/TEMP SE” is more than 0°C
(32°F). FE
PROCEDURE”, EC-323. AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature. PD
2) Check that voltage between ECM terminal q 92 and
ground is less than 4.2V.
3) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds. FA
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- BR
SEF356W perature.
ground is less than 4.2V. ST
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and RS
then turn “ON”.
results)” with ECM. BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-321
TEC059M
EC-322
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE CONNECTED E Reconnect, repair or
TO THE SENSOR. replace.
Check rubber tube for clogging, bending, MA
kinking, disconnection or improper con-
nection.
SEF427U
OK
EM
H
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground LC
screw.
H
NG
1. Disconnect EVAP control system pres- I Harness or connectors
sure sensor harness connector. F64 , B102
2. Check sensor harness connector for I Harness or connectors FE
water. B178 , B65
Water should not exist. I Harness connectors
If OK, go to step 3. If NG, repair or B64 , C14
AT
SEF377U replace harness or connectors. I Harness for open or
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. short between EVAP
4. Check voltage between terminal q 3 and control system pressure
engine ground with CONSULT-II or sensor and ECM PD
tester. If NG, repair harness or
Voltage: Approximately 5V connectors.
OK FA
H
NG
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness or connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ter- F64 , B102
RA
minal q1 and engine ground. I Harness or connectors
Continuity should exist. B178 , B65
B64 , C14
BR
SEF410Q OK I Harness for open or
short between EVAP
control system pressure
sensor and ECM ST
or connectors.
RS
H
NG
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors BT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness or connectors
terminal q
92 and terminal q2 . F64 , B102
Continuity should exist. I Harness or connectors
If OK, check harness for short to B178 , B65 HA
ground and short to power. I Harness connectors
SEF411Q B64 , C14
OK I Harness for open or
short between ECM EL
and EVAP control sys-
tem pressure sensor
If NG, repair open circuit
or short to ground or IDX
short to power in har-
ness or connectors.
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF832U
EC-323
q
A
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP canister
E
valve). valve.
EC-304.
SEF596U
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT
(EVAP canister vent control valve).
EC-319.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EVAP control sys-
E
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor.
below.
OK
H
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- NG Clean, repair or replace
E
GING. rubber tube and/or water
Check obstructed water separator and separator.
rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve and clean the rubber tube using air
blower.
For water separator, refer to “COMPO-
OK
H
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- NG Replace EVAP canister
E
RATED WITH WATER. and check the following:
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-324
EVAP control system pressure sensor
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har- GI
ness connector connected.
2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. MA
4. Use pump to apply vacuum and pressure to EVAP control
system pressure sensor as shown in figure.
SEF357W 5. Check output voltage between ECM terminal q92 and ground. EM
Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V)
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6 LC
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
CAUTION:
I Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or FE
over 20 kPa (150 mmHg, 5.91 inHg) of pressure.
6. If NG, replace EVAP control system pressure sensor.
SEF799W
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor, AT
if equipped.
I Discard any EVAP control system pressure sensor which
has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 PD
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-325

(Gross Leak)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LOGIC
This diagnosis detects a very large leak (fuel filler cap fell off etc.)
in the EVAP system between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister
purge control valve.
SEF850U
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P0440 I EVAP control system has a leak. I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
0705 I EVAP control system does not operate properly. I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
valve.
pressure sensor
I EVAP canister purge volume control valve and the
circuit
I MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve and the circuit
solenoid valve
or damaged.
I Refueling control valve
I ORVR system leaks
CAUTION:
EC-326
(Gross Leak) (Cont’d)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Never remove fuel filler cap during the DTC confirmation pro-
cedure. GI
NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0455, perform TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. MA
SEC048C
ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before EM
TESTING CONDITION: LC
less than 3/4 full and vehicle placed on the flat level sur-
face.
86°F). FE
I Battery voltage is more than 11V at idle.
1) Tighten fuel filler cap securely until ratching sound is
heard. AT
PEF669U
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” PD
5) Make sure the following conditions are met.
COOLAN TEMP/S: 0 - 70°C (32 - 158°F) FA
INT/A TEMP SE: 0 - 60°C (32 - 140°F)
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- RA
SULT-II.
NOTE: BR
PEF929V I If the engine cannot be maintained within the range
on CONSULT-II screen, go to “Basic Inspection”,
EC-91. ST
I Make sure that EVAP hoses are connected EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve prop-
erly. RS
7) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II and make sure that “EVAP BT
GROSS LEAK [P0455]” is displayed. If it is displayed,
refer to “Diagnostic Procedure”, EC-329. If P0440 is
displayed, perform “Diagnostic Procedure” for P0440.
HA
PEF297U --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: EL
Be sure to read the explanation of “Driving pattern” on EC-56
before driving vehicle.
1) Start engine. (TCS switch “OFF”) IDX
3) Stop vehicle.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the follow-
ing step.
6) Start engine.
EC-327
It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving pattern”.
8) Stop vehicle.
EC-328
INSPECTION START
GI
H
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP.
NG
Check fuel tank vacuum
MA
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. relief valve. (Refer to
2. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler “FUEL TANK VACUUM
SEF434Q cap design. RELIEF VALVE”), EC-27. EM
If NG, replace with genuine NISSAN If NG, replace with genuine
fuel filler cap. NISSAN fuel filler cap.
If OK, go to next step. If OK, go to “CHECK
3. Check that the cap is tightened properly FOR EVAP LEAK”. LC
by rotating the cap clockwise.
I Open fuel filler cap, then clean cap
and fuel filler neck threads using air
blower.
I Retighten until ratcheting sound is
heard.
If OK, go to next step. FE
4. Check for air releasing sound while
opening the fuel filler cap.
SEF419U OK
AT
H
NG
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, hose. PD
improper connection or disconnection.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION FA
SYSTEM”, EC-29.
OK
H
NG
RA
Check hoses between EVAP canister and E Reconnect hoses properly.
refueling control valve for disconnection.
For location, refer to “SYSTEM DESCRIP-
TION” in “On Board Refueling Vapor
BR
Recovery (ORVR)” on EC-31.
OK ST
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT E Repair or replace EVAP
(EVAP canister vent control valve, O-ring). canister vent control valve RS
Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR and O-ring or harness/
DTC P0446” for circuit, EC-315 and connector.
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-332. BT
H OK
qA
HA
(Go to next page.)
EL
IDX
EC-329
q
A
H
NG
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK. E Repair or replace.
I Never use compressed air or high
pressure pump.
I Improper installation of service port
may cause leaking.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2,
0.6 psi) of pressure in the system.
SEF462U
To locate EVAP leak portion, proceed with
Select “EVAP SYSTEM
CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT”
3. Touch “START” and apply
vacuum into the EVAP line until
the pressure indicator reaches
the middle of bar graph.
4. Using EVAP leak detector,
locate the leak portion. For the
PEF658U leak detector, refer to instruction
manual for more details.
Refer to “Evaporative Emission
Line Drawing”, EC-29.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP
test.)
valve will open. (Continue to
SEF200U test.)
5. Pressurize the EVAP line using
pressure pump with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to
0.79 inHg).
detector. Refer to the instruction
Drawing”, EC-29.
H OK
qB
SEF598U (Go to next page.)
SEF599U
EC-330
q
B
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
(EVAP canister purge control solenoid I EVAP canister purge con-
valve). trol solenoid valve. GI
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to Refer to “COMPONENTS
EVAP canister purge control sole- INSPECTION”, EC-332 and
noid valve. “P1492 EVAP canister
2. Start engine. purge control solenoid MA
3. Perform “PURG CONT S/V” in valve” for circuit, EC-305.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode. I Vacuum hoses for clog-
4. Select “ON” on CONSULT-II ging or disconnection.
SEF765X screen to turn on “PURG CONT Refer to “Vacuum Hose EM
S/V”. Drawing”, EC-31.
rpm.
Vacuum should exist. LC
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to
2. Stop engine.
EVAP canister purge control sole-
noid valve.
least 60 seconds. FE
rpm.
SEF597U
Vacuum should exist. AT
OK
H
NG
PD
EC-306.
FA
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace MAP/BARO switch
(MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve). solenoid valve. RA
EC-334.
OK BR
SEF396W H
NG
(Fuel tank temperature sensor).
ture sensor. ST
EC-308.
OK
H
NG
RS
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace EVAP control sys-
EC-325. BT
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace refueling control HA
(Refueling control valve). valve.
SEF394WA Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”,
EC-34.
OK
EL
H
tube) using air blower.
IDX
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-331
harness connector.
Resistance:
harness connector.
from the valve.
connected.)
SEF353Q
valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
harness connector.
Resistance:
SEC049C
harness connector.
from the valve.
connected.)
SEF763P valve.
SEF593U
EC-332
Perform “VENT CONTROL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
GI
Condition
between qA and q B
MA
ON No
OFF Yes
SEC050C EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LC
Condition
between qA and q B

No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes FE
blower or replace as necessary. AT
AEC783A If portion q
B is rusted, replace control valve.
PD
FA
RA
BR
Absolute pressure sensor ST

connected.
2. Remove hose from absolute pressure sensor. RS
ECM terminal q 64 and engine ground.
The voltage should be 3.2 to 4.8V. BT
check the output voltage. HA
SEF747W The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4V lower than the value
measured in step 3.
CAUTION:
EL
I Do not apply vacuum below −93.3 kPa (−700 mmHg,
−27.56 inHg) or pressure over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92
IDX
inHg).
EC-333
perature.
2. Perform “MAP/BARO SW/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode
with CONSULT-II.
I Condition: At idle under no-load.
SEF767X
BARO More than 2.6V

BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF768X 1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

and q
2
No supply No Yes

in the figure.

20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor.

SEF405UA
EC-334
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)

The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transmission. It con-
tains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to
the speedometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the GI
ECM.
MA
SEF061T EM
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. LC
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC voltage)
FE
NO.
Approximately 5.2V
AT
Engine is running.
68 P/L Vehicle speed sensor
PD
Lift up drive wheels and run engine at idle in
“D” position.
FA
SEF542T
RA
Malfunction is detected when .... BR
P0500 I The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from the vehicle I Harness or connector
0104 speed sensor is sent to ECM even when the vehicle (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or ST
is driving. shorted.)
I Vehicle speed sensor
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-335
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF274Y
Step 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in
the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test is expected
to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1) Start engine.
2) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “DATA MONITOR”
mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating
wheels with suitable gear position.
If OK, go to following step.
4) Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
secutive seconds with TCS switch “OFF”.
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,300 - 2,250 rpm
PW/ST SIGNAL: OFF
EC-336
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle
speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed. GI
3) Read vehicle speed sensor signal in “MODE 1” with MA
GST.
The vehicle speed sensor on GST should be able to
SEF568P exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with EM
suitable gear position.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
3) Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal q 68
(Vehicle speed sensor signal) and ground with oscillo-
scope.
4) Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal FE
wave as shown at “ECM TERMINALS AND REFER-
ENCE VALUE” on previous page.
SEF638U
5) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-339. AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-337
TEC060M
EC-338
INSPECTION START
GI
H
E MA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector F63 , M49
and combination meter harness con- I Harness connectors
SEF748W
nector. M6 , N1
EM
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Joint connector-6
18 . I Harness for open or
Continuity should exist. short between ECM and
LC
If OK, check harness for short to combination meter
ground and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
OK
nectors.
FE
H
CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION. NG Check the following.
Make sure that speedometer functions
E
I Harness for open or AT
properly. short between combina-
tion meter and vehicle
OK
speed sensor
PD
connectors.
I Vehicle speed sensor
FA
and its circuit
(Refer to EL section.)
RA
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. BR
H ST
INSPECTION END
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-339
Idle Air Control Valve (IACV) — Auxiliary Air

Control (AAC) Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed

sor
Start signal
Ignition switch E
Throttle position
Park/Neutral position
PNP switch E
Air conditioner operation

Air conditioner switch E ECM E IACV-AAC valve
Power steering load signal

Power steering oil pressure E
switch
Battery voltage
Battery E
Vehicle speed
Cooling fan operation

Cooling fan E
Electrical load signal

Electrical load E
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine
adjustment of the amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve
changes the opening of the air by-pass passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actuated
by a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in the axial direction in steps corresponding to the
ECM output signals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respective opening of the air by-pass
passage. (i.e. when the step advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is varied to allow
for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The camshaft position sensor detects the actual engine speed
and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step position of the IACV-AAC valve so that engine
speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which
the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into consid-
eration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and engine load (air conditioner,
power steering and cooling fan operation).
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized
control of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases
and is actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and
OFF two windings each in sequence. Each time the IACV-AAC
valve opens or closes to change the auxiliary air quantity, the ECM
sends a pulse signal to the step motor. When no change in the
auxiliary air quantity is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse
signal. A certain voltage signal is issued so that the valve remains
at that particular opening.
SEF765P
EC-340
Control (AAC) Valve (Cont’d)
GI
I Engine: After warming up Idle 20 - 10 step
IACV-AAC/V
I No-load 2,000 rpm — MA
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE EM

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the LC
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
13 Y Engine is running. FE
8 GY/L Idle speed
11 PU Engine is running. AT
12 G/Y Idle speed
PD
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items FA
P0505 A) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. I Harness or connectors
0205 (The IACV-AAC valve circuit is open.)
RA
I IACV-AAC valve
........................................................................................ ........................................................................................
B) The IACV-AAC valve does not operate properly. I Harness or connectors
BR
(The IACV-AAC valve circuit is shorted.)
I IACV-AAC valve
ST
PROCEDURE RS
NOTE:
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn BT
I Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If a 1st trip HA
DTC cannot be confirmed, perform “Procedure for mal-
function B”.
TESTING CONDITION: EL
IDX
EC-341
4) Keep engine speed at 2,500 rpm for 3 seconds, then let
it idle for 3 seconds.
Do not rev engine up to speeds more than 3,000
rpm.
5) Perform step 4 once more.
SEF392X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1) Open engine hood.
perature.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5) Start engine and run it for at least 1 minute at idle
speed. (Headlamp switch, rear defogger switch: OFF)
SEF261Y PROCEDURE”, EC-344.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-342
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC489
EC-343
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness
connector.
SEF062T 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2 ,q 5
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
3. Check harness continuity between
SEF143T
ECM terminal q 8 and terminal q 4 .
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace IACV-AAC valve.
E
(IACV-AAC valve).
next page.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF423U
EC-344
IACV-AAC valve
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector. GI
terminal q
2 and terminals q
1 ,q3
terminal q
5 and terminals q
4 ,q6 MA
Resistance:
Approximately 30Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
EM
LC
FE
AT
SEF353Q
3. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.

4. Remove idle air adjusting unit assembly (IACV-AAC valve is PD
built-in) from engine.
(The IACV-AAC valve harness connector should remain con-
nected.) FA
5. Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”, and ensure the IACV-
AAC valve shaft smoothly moves forward and backward,
according to the ignition switch position. RA
If NG, replace the IACV-AAC valve.
BR
SEF261Q
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-345
Closed Throttle Position Switch

A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position
switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is used only for A/T control.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge control
valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning.
SEF350WA

I Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: Idle position ON
(Engine stopped)
CLSD THL/P SW I More than −40.0 kPa (−300
mmHg, −11.81 inHg) of vacuum
is applied to the throttle opener Throttle valve: Slightly open OFF
with a handy vacuum pump.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
Engine is running (Warmed-up condition)
I Accelerator pedal fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE

I More than −40.0 kPa (−300 mmHg, −11.81 (11 - 14V)
Throttle position switch inHg) of vacuum is applied to the throttle
74 GY/L
(Closed position) opener with a handy vacuum pump.

Approximately 0V

P0510 I Battery voltage from the closed throttle position I Harness or connectors
0203 switch is sent to ECM with the throttle valve (The closed throttle position switch circuit is
opened. shorted.)
I Closed throttle position switch
EC-346
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE: GI
the next test.
SEF198Y perature. EM
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal q 74 and ground
At idle: Battery voltage LC
At 2,000 rpm: 0 - 1V
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II at the
start of the test. FE
4) Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds
under the following condition.
SEF424U THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.8V
AT
Selector lever: Suitable position PD
Driving pattern: Driving vehicle uphill (Increased
engine load) will help maintain the
driving conditions required for FA
this test.
PROCEDURE”, EC-349. RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed BR
throttle position switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- ST
perature.
ground under the following conditions. RS
At idle: Battery voltage
At 2,000 rpm: Approximately 0V
3) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-349. BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-347
TEC061M
EC-348
INSPECTION START
H GI
E
2. Disconnect throttle position switch har- F63 , M49 MA
ness connector. I 10A fuse
SEF836U 4. Check voltage between terminal q 8 and short between throttle EM
engine ground with CONSULT-II or position switch and fuse
tester. If NG, repair harness or
Voltage: Battery voltage connectors. LC
OK
H
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. FE
6 .
SEF637U Continuity should exist. AT
PD
OK
H
ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH.
Perform BASIC INSPECTION, EC-91.
FA
OK
H
RA
E
(Closed throttle position switch). switch.
BR
next page.
SEF425U
OK
H
NG
ST
CHECK COMPONENT Replace throttle position
E
(Throttle position sensor). sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on RS
next page.
OK
H BT
HA
H
INSPECTION END
EL
IDX
EC-349
Closed throttle position switch (Built in throttle
position sensor)
2. Stop engine (Ignition switch “OFF”).
opener.
SEF793W
throttle opener.
8. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW”.
Measurement must be made with closed throttle position
switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions CLSD THL/P SW
Completely closed ON
Partially open or completely open OFF

SEF266Y
in “Basic Inspection”, replace closed throttle position
switch.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness con-
nector.
7. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch
terminals q 6 and q 8 .
Resistance measurement must be made with closed
throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
SEF947U Throttle valve conditions Continuity

Completely closed Yes
Partially open or completely open No

in “Basic Inspection”, replace closed throttle position
switch.
EC-350
2. Stop engine (Ignition switch “OFF”).
4. Connect suitable vacuum hose to the vacuum pump and the GI
opener.
inHg)] until the throttle drum becomes free from the rod of the MA
throttle opener.
SEF793W 7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EM
8. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN”.
tion sensor installed in vehicle. LC
Throttle valve conditions THRTL POS SEN
Completely closed (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open (b) 3.5 - 4.7 FE
SEF266Y 9. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7. Check voltage between ECM terminal q 63 (Throttle posi-
PD
tion sensor signal) and ground.
FA
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)

RA
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7
BR
SEF795W
Inspection”, EC-91. ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-351
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0600, P1605
A/T Communication Line (P0600) and A/T

Diagnostic Communication Line (P1605)
This circuit line (LAN) controls the smooth shifting up and down of
A/T during the hard acceleration/deceleration. Pulse signals are
exchanged between ECM and TCM (P0600).
This circuit line is also used to communicate malfunction informa-
tion related to A/T (Automatic Transmission) is transferred through
the line (LAN circuit) from TCM to ECM (P1605).
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only in TCM but also ECM after the A/T related repair.

P0600 I ECM receives incorrect voltage from TCM continu- I Harness or connectors
0504 ously. (The communication line circuit between ECM and
TCM is open or shorted.)
P1605 I Signal from TCM is not sent to ECM. I TCM
0804 I Dead (Weak) battery

PROCEDURE
NOTE
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF261Y 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Start engine and let it idle for at least 2 seconds (P0600)
and 40 seconds (P1605).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-352
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC062M
EC-353
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
E
SEF047TD 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector M4 , B3
and TCM harness connector. I Harness connectors
3. Check harness continuity between ECM F63 , M49
47 . I Joint connector-6
Continuity should exist. I Check harness for open
If OK, check harness for short to or short between ECM
ground and short to power. and TCM.
OK
nectors.
H
SEF063TB Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
H
INSPECTION END
SEF428U
EC-354
Engine Control Module (ECM)

The ECM consists of a microcomputer, diagnostic test mode
selector, and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The unit controls the engine.
GI
MA
SEC220B EM
Diagnostic Trouble Check Item LC
P0605
I ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. I ECM
0301
FE
DTC No.
CONSULT-II Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM*
GST AT
Unable to Unable to ECM ECM fail-safe activating condition
access ECM access Diag- The computing function of the ECM was judged to be malfunctioning.
nostic Test When the fail-safe system activates, i.e. if the ECM detects a malfunction PD
Mode II condition in the CPU of ECM, the MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP on
the instrument panel lights to warn the driver.
However, it is not possible to access ECM and DTC cannot be confirmed.
Engine control with ECM fail-safe FA
When the fail-safe system is operating, fuel injection, ignition timing, fuel
pump operation, IACV-AAC valve operation and cooling fan operation are
controlled under certain limitations. RA
ECM fail-safe operation
Engine speed Engine speed will not rise more than 3,000 rpm.
BR
Fuel injection Simultaneous multiport fuel injection system
Ignition timing Ignition timing is fixed at the preset value. ST

Fuel pump relay is “ON” when engine is running and
Fuel pump
“OFF” when engine stalls.
RS
Cooling fan relay “ON” (High speed condition) when
Cooling fans
engine is running, and “OFF” when engine stalls.
Replace ECM, if ECM fail-safe condition is confirmed.

BT
*: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
HA
EL
IDX
EC-355
Engine Control Module (ECM) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
SEF400X speed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-356
Engine Control Module (ECM) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H GI
2) Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”
mode with CONSULT-II. MA
3) Touch “ERASE”.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. EM
2) Select MODE 4 with GST.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
2) Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode
memory.
FE
H
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE
CODE CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. AT
See previous page.
PD
H
Is the DTC P0605 (0301) displayed Yes Replace ECM.
E
again? FA
No
H
RA
INSPECTION END
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-357

Pressure (BARO) Switch Solenoid Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Camshaft position sensor Engine speed
E

E MAP/BARO
ECM E switch solenoid
Throttle position valve
E

E
This system allows the absolute pressure sensor to Solenoid Conditions

monitor either ambient barometric pressure or
I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch
intake manifold pressure. The MAP/BARO switch
“ON”
solenoid valve switches between two passages by OR
ON-OFF pulse signals from the ECM. (One passage I For 5 seconds after starting engine
is from the intake air duct, the other is from the OR
intake manifold.) Either ambient barometric pres- I More than 5 minutes after the solenoid valve
sure or intake manifold pressure is applied to the ON shuts OFF.
absolute pressure sensor. and
I Throttle valve is shut or almost fully shut for
more than 5 seconds
and
I Vehicle speed is less than 100 km/h (62
MPH).
The MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve switches its air flow pas-
sage according to the voltage signal sent from the ECM. When
voltage is supplied from the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid
turns “ON”. Then, the absolute pressure sensor can monitor the
ambient barometric pressure. When voltage is not supplied from
the ECM, the MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve turns “OFF”. Then,
the sensor monitors intake manifold pressure.
SEF417Q

I For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”
BARO
MAP/BARO SW/V I For 5 seconds after starting engine
I More than 5 seconds after starting engine MAP
EC-358
(Cont’d)
CAUTION:
GI
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. MA
TER-
WIRE DATA
NO.
COLOR (DC Voltage) EM
For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch LC

“ON” Approximately 0V
Engine is running
MAP/BARO switch sole- For 5 seconds after starting engine.

41 W
noid valve Ignition switch “ON”
More than 5 seconds after turning ignition

FE
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “ON”
(11 - 14V)
Engine is running
AT

PD

Code No. Malfunction is detected when .... (Possible Cause) FA
P1105 A) MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve receives the I Harness or connectors
1302 voltage supplied though ECM does not supply (MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve circuit is open
the voltage to the valve. or shorted.) RA
B) There is little difference between MAP/BARO I Harness or connectors
switch solenoid valve input voltage at ambient (MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve circuit is open BR
barometric pressure and voltage at intake mani- or shorted.)
fold pressure. I Hoses
(Hoses are clogged, bent, kinked, disconnected,
not connected properly.) ST
RS
BT
HA
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION EL

PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC IDX
NOTE:
the next test.
SEF261Y
EC-359
(Cont’d)
TESTING CONDITION:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

perature.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” again and select “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
4) Make sure that “FUEL T/TMP SE” is more than 0°C
(32°F).
SEF273Y PROCEDURE”, EC-305.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature.
6) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds and
then turn “ON”.
SEF398W
results)” with ECM.
EC-360
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-361
(Cont’d)
TEC063M
EC-362
(Cont’d)
If the trouble is duplicated after “Procedure for malfunction
A”, perform “Procedure A” below. If the trouble is detected GI
after “Procedure for malfunction B”, perform “Procedure B”
on the next page.
MA
Procedure A
SEF396W INSPECTION START EM
H LC
E
2. Disconnect MAP/BARO switch solenoid F121 , F21 , F63 , M49
valve harness connector. I 10A fuse
1 and short between MAP/
FE
engine ground with CONSULT-II or BARO switch solenoid
tester. valve and fuse
SEF431U Voltage: Battery voltage If NG, repair harness or
AT
connectors.
OK
PD
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following.
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connectors FA
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. F121 , F21
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness for open or
2 with CON- short between MAP/ RA
SULT-II or tester. BARO switch solenoid
Continuity should exist. valve and ECM
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit or BR
SEF432U ground and short to power. short to ground or short to
OK
nectors. ST
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
E
Replace MAP/BARO RS
next page. BT
OK
H
HA
EL
H
INSPECTION END
IDX
EC-363
(Cont’d)
Procedure B
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK VACUUM SOURCE AND CIR- OK CHECK COMPONENT
E
CUIT TO MAP/BARO SWITCH SOLE- (Absolute pressure sen-
SEF396W NOID VALVE. sor).
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal 1. Check for disconnection
operating temperature. of vacuum hose con-
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. nected to the sensor.
3. Connect the MAP/BARO switch sole- 2. Disconnect sensor’s
noid valve and absolute pressure sen- connector and check
sor with a rubber tube that has a sensor harness connec-
vacuum gauge. tor for water.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. Water should not exist.
5. Select “MAP/BARO SW/V” in Refer to “COMPONENT
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with INSPECTION” of
CONSULT-II. “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SEF385U 6. Start engine and let it idle. FOR DTC P0105”,
7. Touch “MAP” and “BARO” alter- EC-139.
natively.
OK NG
MAP/BARO
Vacuum
SW/S H
Repair (dis-
BARO Should not exist.
connection)
MAP Should exist. or replace
absolute
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- pressure
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. sensor or
5. Check vacuum gauge within 5 harness
SEF767X seconds after turning ignition connectors.
switch “ON”.
H
Vacuum should not exist.
6. Start engine and let it idle. Go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
7. Check vacuum gauge. NOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
Vacuum should exist. TENT INCIDENT” in
EC-117.
NG
H
CHECK HOSE. NG Clean, repair or reconnect
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. the hose.
2. Check hose for clogging, cracks, dis- If NG, check vacuum port
SEF768X connection or improper connection. for clogging.
OK OK
H
CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM.
Check the intake system
for air leaks.
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF109L
EC-364
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
GI
E
2. Disconnect MAP/BARO switch solenoid F121 , F21 , F63 , M49 MA
valve harness connector. I 10A fuse
SEF431U 4. Check voltage between terminal q
1 and short between MAP/ EM
engine ground with CONSULT-II or BARO switch solenoid
tester. valve and fuse
Voltage: Battery voltage If NG, repair harness or LC
connectors.
OK
H
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. F121 , F21 FE
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness for open or
2 with CON- short between MAP/
SULT-II or tester. BARO switch solenoid AT
SEF432U Continuity should exist. valve and ECM
If OK, check harness for short to If NG, repair open circuit or
ground and short to power. short to ground or short to
PD
OK nectors.
H FA
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Repair (disconnection) or
(Absolute pressure sensor). replace harness connec-
1. Check for disconnection of vacuum tors or replace absolute RA
hose connected to the sensor. pressure sensor.
2. Disconnect sensor’s connector and
check sensor harness connectors for
water.
BR
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” of
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC ST
P0105”, EC-132.
OK RS
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace MAP/BARO
BT
next page.
OK HA
H
H
INSPECTION END IDX
EC-365
(Cont’d)
perature.
with CONSULT-II.
SEF767X I Condition: At idle under no-load
BARO More than 2.6V

BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO
SEF768X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

and q
2
MEC488B No supply No Yes
3. Check the time required for the solenoid valve to switch.

It should be less than 1 second.
4. If NG, replace solenoid valve.
5. If OK, check “Absolute pressure sensor”. Refer to
“COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EC-139.
EC-366
Intake Valve Timing Control (P1110: Left bank),

(P1135: Right bank)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
E
GI
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air MA

E
Intake
valve tim-
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EM
E ECM E ing control
solenoid
valve
Throttle position sensor Throttle position LC
E

E
FE
The intake valve timing control system is utilized to When ECM sends ON signal to intake valve timing
control intake valve opening and closing timing. control solenoid valve, oil pressure is transmitted to
Engine coolant temperature signals, engine speed, camshaft sprocket. Then, intake side camshaft is AT
amount of intake air, vehicle speed and throttle posi- advanced.
tion are used to determine intake valve timing.
The intake camshaft sprocket position is regulated PD
by oil pressure controlled by the intake valve timing
control.
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF587TA
EC-367
(P1135: Right bank) (Cont’d)
OPERATION
Intake valve timing
Intake valve opening
Engine operating condition control Valve overlap Engine valve timing
and closing time
solenoid valve
I Engine coolant temperature is
between 15°C (59°F) to 110°C
(230°F) and engine speed is
between 1,100 rpm and 4,600 q
ON Advance Increased II
rpm.
I During high load condition
I Vehicle speed is more than 4
km/h (2 MPH).
Those other than above OFF Normal Normal q
I

I Engine is in warm up condition.

OFF , ON (Using “INT/V TIM-B1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR”,
INT/V SOL-B1 I Engine speed is more than 2,000 rpm.
the difference of degree between “OFF” and “ON” is approxi-
INT/V SOL-B2 I Quickly depressed accelerator pedal
mately 20 deg.
I Vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2 MPH).

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
24
BR/Y Intake valve timing control solenoid is operat- Approximately 0V
(B2)
Intake valve timing control ing.
solenoid valves Engine is running.
25
BR Intake valve timing control solenoid is not Battery voltage
(B1)
operating.
Approximately 0V
R/L
(B2) Idle speed
SEF551T
Intake valve timing control
position sensors Approximately 0V
L/W
(B1) Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF552T
EC-368
P1110 Comparing the intake valve timing position when the I Harness or connectors GI
0805 intake valve timing solenoid is ON with that when the (The left bank intake valve timing control position
(Bank 1) solenoid is OFF, the difference does not exceed a cer- sensor circuit is open.)
P1135 tain limit. I Intake valve timing control position sensor MA
1301 I Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion
(Bank 2) of the camshaft
EM
PROCEDURE LC
CAUTION:
Always drive at safe speed.
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition FE
the next test.
1) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature [more AT
SEF275Y than 82°C (180°F)].
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” PD
4) Restart engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
5) Turn TCS switch “OFF”. FA
6) Shift A/T selector lever to “2nd” position.
7) Gradually raise engine speed and keep it between
1,100 rpm and 1,500 rpm for at least 20 seconds. (Test RA
is completed when “INT/V SOL - B1 in “DATA MONI-
TOR” with CONSULT-II remains “OFF”. If indication is
“ON”, repeat 7.
BR
8) Quickly raise engine speed to more than 2,500 rpm and
keep it there for at least 6 seconds. (Test is completed ST
when “INT/V SOL - B1 in “DATA MONITOR” with CON-
SULT-II remains “ON”. If indication is “OFF”, repeat 8.
9) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC RS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature. BT
3) Restart engine and wait at least 30 second.
4) Turn TCS switch “OFF”. HA
5) Shift A/T selector lever to “2nd” positions.
1,000 rpm and 1,500 rpm for at least 12 seconds. EL
keep it there for at least 6 seconds.
IDX
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
3) Restart engine and wait at least 30 seconds.
4) Turn TCS switch “OFF”.
5) Shift A/T selector lever to “D” position.
EC-369
1,000 rpm and 1,500 rpm for at least 12 seconds.
keep it there for at least 6 seconds.
then turn “ON”.
EC-370
LEFT BANK
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC064M
EC-371
RIGHT BANK
TEC065M
EC-372
INSPECTION START
GI
H
E MA
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control F63 , M49
SEF593TA
solenoid valve harness connector. I 10A fuse EM
4. Check voltage between terminal q 1 and between the intake valve
ground. timing control solenoid LC
Voltage: Battery voltage valve and fuse
OK
connectors.
H
E FE
3. Check harness continuity between ECM AT
SEF595TA terminal RH q 24 , q
25 LH and solenoid
valve terminal q 2 .
Continuity should exist. PD
and short to power.
OK FA
H
CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE. NG Repair lubrication system.
E
Refer to LC section (“Oil Pressure Check”, RA
“ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM”).
OK
BR
SEF837U H
CHECK INTAKE AIR SYSTEM. NG Repair intake air system.
E
Check intake air system for leaks. ST
OK
H
CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CON- NG Repair or replace. RS
E
TROL POSITION SENSOR.
Refer to DTC P1140, EC-382.
OK
BT
H
qA
(Go to next page.) HA
SEF433U
EL
IDX
EC-373
q
A
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace intake valve timing
E
(Intake valve timing control solenoid valve). control solenoid valve.
below.
OK
H
Replace intake valve timing control
sprocket with camshaft.
H
H
INSPECTION END
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
1. Check oil passage visually for any metal debris.
2. Supply intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals with
battery voltage.
3. Make sure that inside plunger protrudes.
If NG, replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
SEF783T
EC-374
Secondary Throttle Position Sensor (STPS)

The secondary throttle position sensor responds to the movement
of the throttle motor which is controlled by the TAC module.
This sensor is a kind of potentiometer which transforms the sec- GI
ondary throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage
signal to the TAC module. In addition, the sensor detects the open-
ing and closing speed and position of the secondary throttle valve MA
and feeds the voltage signal to the TAC module.
Another case is when the secondary throttle valve opening
SEF064T becomes smaller than the ordinary throttle valve opening due to EM
TCS operation. In this case, the signal from the secondary throttle
valve is used for engine control. This replaces the signal from the
ordinary throttle position sensor. The signal of the secondary LC
throttle valve first enters the TAC module, from where it is sent to
the ECM.
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
SEF303T
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE RS

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION BT
THRTL/P SEN2
(Engine stopped) Throttle valve: fully open 4.3 - 4.7V
HA
EL
IDX
EC-375
(Cont’d)
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 3 seconds after ignition switch Approximately 3.4V

Secondary throttle position “ON” and thereafter
66 L
sensor Ignition switch “ON”
Approximately 0.4V

P1120 A) An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor I Harness or connectors
0406 is sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
B) Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM com- I Harness or connectors
pared with the signals from mass air flow sensor, I Secondary throttle position sensor
camshaft position sensor and IACV-AAC valve. I TCM

PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If the 1st trip DTC
NOTE:
the next test.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF261Y
EC-376
(Cont’d)
Procedure for malfunction B.
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the secondary GI
throttle position sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WARNING: MA
Before touching the secondary throttle valve, be sure to dis-
connect the throttle motor harness connector. Failure to do so
SEF065T may cause injury due to accidental actuation of the valve. EM
perature.
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect throttle motor LC
harness connector.
3) Remove intake air duct.
5) Select “MANUAL TRIG” and “HI SPEED” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6) Select “THRTL/P SEN2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode FE
with CONSULT-II.
7) Press RECORD on CONSULT-II SCREEN at the same
SEF580R time close the secondary throttle valve by hand. AT
8) Print out the recorded data and check the following:
I The voltage when secondary throttle valve is closed
by hand is approximately 0.60 - 1.15V.
PD
I The voltage decrease is linear in response to second-
ary throttle valve closing. FA
I The voltage when secondary throttle valve is fully
opened is approximately 4.3 - 4.7V.
9) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-379. RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
perature. BR
SEF749W 2) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect throttle motor
harness connector.
3) Remove intake air duct. ST
ground, then check the following: RS
I The voltage when secondary throttle valve is closed
by hand is approximately 0.4 - 0.86V.
I The voltage decrease is linear in response to second- BT
ary throttle valve closing.
I The voltage when secondary throttle valve is fully
opened is approximately 3.3 - 3.5V. HA
EL
IDX
EC-377
(Cont’d)
TEC066M
EC-378
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
GI
H
MA
E
2. Disconnect secondary throttle position
SEF066T
sensor harness connector.
EM
LC
OK
H
NG
FE
E
2. Loosen and retighten ground screw. F63 , M49 AT
SEF899Q 3. Check harness continuity between ter- I Harness connectors
minal q1 and engine ground. M4 , B3
Continuity should exist. I Harness connectors PD
If OK, check harness for short to power. F62 , F61
OK
I Harness for open or FA
short between sensor
trol (TAC) module RA
short between secondary
throttle position sensor BR
SEF377U and ECM
short between secondary ST
throttle position sensor
and TCM (Transmission
Control Module) RS
or connectors. BT
H
qA
(Go to next page.) HA
SEF900Q
EL
IDX
EC-379
(Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector tors.
and throttle actuator control module
harness connector.
terminal q66 and throttle actuator control
module terminal q 4 , sensor terminal q 2
SEF447U and throttle actuator control module ter-
minal q3 .
If NG, repair open circuit or short to
ground or short to power in harness or
connectors.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace secondary throttle
(Secondary throttle position sensor). position sensor. Refer to
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” BR section.
below.
Refer to BR section (“Adjustment for Sec-
ondary Throttle Position”, “TRACTION
SEF340R CONTROL SYSTEM — TCS —”) for
adjustment.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
Secondary throttle position sensor
WARNING:
Before touching the secondary throttle valve, be sure to dis-
connect the throttle motor harness connector. Failure to do so
may cause injury due to accidental actuation of the valve.
2. Disconnect secondary throttle position sensor harness con-
nector.
3. Disconnect throttle motor harness connector.
SEF787T
4. Remove intake air duct.
5. Make sure that resistance between terminals q 2 and q 1
changes when opening secondary throttle valve manually.
Throttle valve conditions Resistance at 25°C (77°F)

Completely closed Approximately 0.6 kΩ
Partially open 0.6 - 4.0 kΩ
Completely open Approximately 5 kΩ
EC-380
Tandem Throttle Position Sensor

This diagnosis is for tandem throttles (main throttle and secondary
throttle). The quantity of intake air is determined by these two
throttle valves. A rationality check is then carried out by ECM after
monitoring the signals of these two throttle position sensors.
GI
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items MA
P1125 I Rationally incorrect voltage is entered to ECM com- I Harness or connectors EM
1502 pared with the signals from mass air flow sensor, (The sensor circuits are open or shorted.)
camshaft position sensor and IACV-AAC valve. I Throttle position sensor or secondary throttle posi-
tion sensor LC
I Throttle actuator control (TAC) module

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
FE
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting AT
the next test.
perature. PD
4) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. FA
5) Start engine and run it for 15 seconds.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- RA
perature.
3) Start engine and run it for 15 seconds. BR
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tem- ST
perature.
3) Start engine and run it for 15 seconds. RS
then turn “ON”.
5) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic BT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE HA
Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0120, EC-150 OR
Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1120, EC-375. EL
IDX
EC-381

The intake valve timing control position sensor is located rearmost
of the left-bank cylinder head. This sensor detects a signal (intake
valve position) generated by the cutout portion of camshaft and
sends it to the ECM. This sensor is not used to control the engine
system. It is used only for the on board diagnosis of intake valve
timing control.
SEF599T

INT/V TIM-B1 Advanced angle (degree) of the intake camshaft should be

I Engine is running.
INT/V TIM-B2 displayed.

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0V
R/L
(RH) Idle speed
SEF551T
Intake valve timing con-
trol position sensors Approximately 0V
L/W
(LH) Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
SEF552T

P1140 The proper pulse signal from the intake valve timing I Harness or connectors
1303 control position sensors is not sent to ECM while the (The left bank intake valve timing control position
(Left bank) engine is running at the specified engine speed. sensor circuit is open.)
P1145 I Intake valve timing control position sensor
1304 I Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion
(Right bank) of the camshaft
EC-382
(P1140: Left bank), (P1145: Right bank) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test. MA
SEF276Y
2) Start engine and keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm EM
and wait at least 15 seconds.
PROCEDURE”, EC-386. LC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm
3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC FE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine and keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm AT
then turn “ON”. PD
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-383
LEFT BANK
TEC757
EC-384
RIGHT BANK
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC758
EC-385
INSPECTION START
H
E
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control
SEF607TC position sensor harness connector.
terminal q71 LH, q70 RH and terminal q
3 .
and short to power.
OK
H
E
1. Loosen and retighten engine ground I Harness connectors
screws. F62 , F61
SEF598TC 2. Check harness continuity between sen- If NG, repair open circuit or
sor terminal q
2 and ground. short to power in harness
Continuity should exist. or connectors.
OK
H
CHECK CAMSHAFT. NG Remove debris and clean
E
Check accumulation of debris to the signal the signal pick-up cutout of
pick-up portion of the camshaft. Refer to camshaft.
EM section (“Timing Chain”).
OK
H
SEF435U Replace intake valve timing control position

sensor.
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF603T
EC-386
Intake valve timing control position sensor
1. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor harness GI
connector.
2. Loosen fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Visually check the sensor for chipping. MA
4. Check resistance between terminals q 2 and q 3 .
Resistance:
SEF604T 600 - 740Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] EM
If NG, replace intake valve timing control position sensor.
LC
FE
SEF605T
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-387
Closed Loop Control (P1148: Left bank),

(P1168: Right bank)
★ The closed loop control has the one trip detection logic.
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
P1148 I The closed loop control function for left bank does not I The heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) circuit is open or
0307 operate even when vehicle is driving in the specified shorted.
(Left bank) condition. I Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front)
P1168 I Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater (front)
0308
(Right bank)

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEC053C I Never raise engine speed above 3,200 rpm during the
“DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”. If the engine speed limit is exceeded, retry the
procedure from step 2).
battery voltage is more than 11V.
perature.
3) Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm and check the follow-
ing.
I “HO2S1” voltage should go above 0.70V at least once.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I “HO2S1” voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
If the check result is NG, perform “DIAGNOSIS
If the check result is OK, perform the following step.
4) Let engine idle at least 3 minutes.
EC-388
Closed Loop Control (P1148: Left bank),
5) Maintain the following condition at least 50 consecutive
seconds.
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2.5 ms or more
CMPS-RPM (POS): 2,000 - 3,000 rpm
GI
During this test P0130 may be displayed on the
CONSULT-II screen.
MA
EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK LC
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the closed loop
control. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
perature.
2) Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminals q 82 (RH),
q 83 (LH) (sensor) and ground. FE
rpm constant under no-load.
I The voltage should go above 0.70V at least once. AT
SEF353W
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I The voltage should go below 0.21V at least once.
4) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-187. PD
Refer to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0133 (B1), P0153 FA
(B2), EC-187.
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-389
Traction Control System (TCS) Signal Circuit

The ECM uses this circuit line for checking the TCS operation.
Voltage signals are sent and received between the ECM and the
throttle actuator control module.
★ Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the TCS signal circuit.
The MIL will not light for TCS signal circuit malfunction.
P1210 I An excessively low or high voltage from the I Harness or connectors
0106 throttle actuator control (TAC) module is sent to (The circuit is open or shorted.)
ECM. I Throttle actuator control (TAC) module

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and TCS switch “ON”, then
start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 3 seconds.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and TCS switch “ON”, then
start engine.
2) Run engine for at least 3 seconds at idle speed.
then turn “ON”.
EC-390
(Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC653
EC-391
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector
SEF148TB and TAC module harness connector.
3. ECM terminal q 73 and TCS terminal q
7 .
OK
H
E
Check TAC module function. switch.
Make sure that TAC module and circuit
function properly. Refer to BR section
(“Self-diagnosis for TAC module”),
SEF437U (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR TCS”).
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-392
Fuel Pump Control Module (FPCM)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
GI
Amount of intake air
MA
ECM E FPCM
Engine coolant temperature E
sensor EM
Ignition switch
Start signal LC
E
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The

Amount
amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump is Conditions of fuel Supplied voltage
altered between two flow rates by the FPCM opera- flow FE
tion. The FPCM determines the voltage supplied to
I Engine cranking
the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to
I Within 16 seconds after
the following conditions. AT
starting engine [above
Battery voltage
100°C (212°F)] high
(11 - 14V)
I Engine is running under PD
heavy load and high
speed conditions
Except the above low Approximately 7V FA
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION RA
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control
the amount of fuel flow. When the FPCM increases the voltage
supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the BR
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
ST
RS
SEF387X
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE BT

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION HA
I Within 16 seconds after starting the engine, when engine coolant temperature is
FPCM HIGH , LOW
I Within 16 seconds after starting the engine, when engine coolant temperature is
EL
FPCM D/R VOLT Approx. 5.0V , Approx. 0.4V
IDX
EC-393
Fuel Pump Control Module (FPCM) (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is cranking. Approximately 0.4V
15 R/L Fuel pump control module Engine is running.
Approximately 10V
Idle speed
When cranking the engine Approximately 0V
Fuel pump control module
93 G/R
(FPCM) check After starting the engine Approximately 5V

P1220 I An improper voltage signal from the FPCM, which I Harness or connectors
1305 is supplied to a point between the fuel pump and (FPCM circuit is open or shorted.)
the dropping resistor, is detected by ECM. I Dropping resistor
I FPCM

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
the next test.
1) Lift up vehicle.
SEF278Y
4) Shift A/T selector lever to “D” position.
5) Hold vehicle speed at 70 to 100 km/h (43 to 62 MPH)
for 12 seconds.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-394
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC067M
EC-395
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Disconnect FPCM harness connector. F63 , M49
4. Check voltage between terminal q3 and short between FPCM
SEF524Y
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. and fuel pump relay
connectors.
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-I. NG Check the following.
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I Harness connector B123
2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness If NG, repair open circuit or
connector. short to power in harness
3. Check harness continuity between or connectors.
FPCM and dropping resistor terminal q 2
and engine ground.
SEF005R
OK
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT-II. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connectors.
tor.
2. Check harness continuity between fuel
pump terminal q 3 and dropping resistor
terminal q
1 , resistor terminal q
1 and
FPCM terminal q 1 .
SEF152T
FPCM terminal q 1 and engine ground,
terminal q
3 and engine ground.
OK
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG
E Check the following.
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors
2. Check harness continuity between ECM F63 , M49
SEF068T
terminal q
M4 , B3
If OK, check harness for short to short between ECM and
ground and short to power. FPCM
OK short to ground or short to
nectors.
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-396
q
A
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT.
E Check the following. GI
terminal q
93 and terminal q1 (or fuel F63 , M49
pump terminal q I Harness connectors

3 ).
M4 , B3
MA
2. Check harness continuity between ECM short between ECM and
terminal q
93 and engine ground. FPCM (or fuel pump) EM
Continuity should not exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
ground and short to power. nectors. LC
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace dropping resistor.
E
(Dropping resistor).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on FE
next page.
OK
H AT
SEF153T
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace FPCM.
E
(FPCM).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on PD
next page.
OK FA
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. RA
H
INSPECTION END
BR
SEF426Q
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
SEF438U
EC-397
FPCM
2. Perform “FPCM” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
I When selecting “HI”, “FPCM DR VOLT” indicates
approximately 0V.
I When selecting “LOW”, “FPCM DR VOLT” indicates
approximately 4.4V.
SEF770X
4. If NG, replace FPCM.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating tempera-
ture.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
4. Check voltage between terminals q 1 and q 2 .
Within 30 seconds of starting engine:
Approximately 0V
More than 30 seconds after starting engine:
Approximately 4.4V
5. If NG, replace FPCM.
SEF771X
SEF525Y
Dropping resistor
Check resistance between terminals q
1 and q
2 .
Resistance: Approximately 0.8Ω at 25°C (77°F)
SEF156T
EC-398
Ignition Signal
Ignition coil & power transistor
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the GI
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit. MA
SEF304T EM
Specification data are reference values. LC
I Engine: After warming up Idle 15° BTDC

IGN TIMING
I No-load 2,000 rpm More than 25° BTDC
FE
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. AT
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. PD
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC voltage)
FA
NO.
Approximately 0.38V
RA
Engine is running. (Warmed-up condition) BR

Idle speed
43 Y/R Ignition signal (No. 1) ST
44 G/R Ignition signal (No. 8)
46 L/R Ignition signal (No. 7)
SEF538T
47 GY Ignition signal (No. 3) RS
50 PU/W Ignition signal (No. 6) Approximately 0.55V
51 GY/R Ignition signal (No. 5)
53 W/R Ignition signal (No. 4) BT
54 R/L Ignition signal (No. 2)
HA
EL
SEF539T
IDX
EC-399
Ignition Signal (Cont’d)
P1320 I The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent I Harness or connectors
0201 during engine cranking or running. (The ignition primary circuit is open or shorted.)
I Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
I Camshaft position sensor circuit

PROCEDURE
NOTE:
I If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335, P0340 or
P1336, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335, P0340 or
P1336 first. Refer to EC-270, EC-275 or EC-407.
SEF400X 1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
3) Start engine and wait at least 4 seconds. (If engine does
not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 5
seconds.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-400
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC035M
EC-401
TEC036M
EC-402
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC037M
EC-403
INSPECTION START
H
Start engine. Yes Go to “SEARCH FOR
E
Is engine running? MALFUNCTIONING CIR-
CUIT” on next page.
No
SEF393WA H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-1. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect ECM relay. F1 , E14
2 , I Harness connectors
q7 and ground with CONSULT-II or F2 , E13
tester. I 10A fuse
Voltage: Battery voltage I 7.5A fuse
OK
short between battery
and ECM relay
SEF893V
connectors.
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-1. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between ECM in harness or connectors.
terminal 124 and terminal q 1 .
OK
SEF892V
H
CHECK ECM RELAY. NG Replace ECM relay.
E
terminals q
1 and q 2 .
nals q
3 and q 5 ,q7 and q 6 .
Continuity exists.
No voltage applied:
No continuity
OK
SEC202B
H
1. Reconnect ECM relay and ECM har-
ness connector.
2. Go to “CHECK POWER SUP-
PLY-2” on next page.
EC-404
SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIR-

CUIT.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in GI
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Search for circuit which does MA
not produce a momentary
engine speed drop.
SEF793X ------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- EM
2. Check output signal voltage
between ECM terminals q 43 , q 44 ,
q 46 , q 47 , q 50 , q
51 , q 53 , q 54 and
LC
ground with oscilloscope.
3. Search for circuit that signal
voltage does not match to
“DATA” in “ECM INSPECTION
TABLE”.
FE
SEF894V H
AT
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-2. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness con- short between ignition
PD
nector(s). coil and ECM relay
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. If NG, repair harness or
FA
4. Check voltage between each ignition connectors.
coil harness connector terminal q1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. RA
OK
BR
SEF157T
H
NG Check the following.
E ST
2. Loosen and retighten engine ground F61 , F62
screws. I Check for open or short RS
3. Check harness continuity between igni- between ignition coil and
tion coil harness connector terminal q
2 engine ground
and engine ground. If NG, repair open circuit or BT
Continuity should exist. short to power in harness
If OK, check harness for short to power. or connectors.
OK
HA
SEF069T H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EL
IDX
SEF305T
EC-405
q
A
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-2. NG Repair open circuit or short
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. to ground or short to power
2. Check harness continuity between each in harness or connectors.
ignition coil harness connector terminal
q3 and each ECM harness connector
terminal.
SEF377U
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace ignition coil
E
(Ignition coil with power transistor). assembly.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”.
OK
H
SEF887Q Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR

INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”.
H
INSPECTION END
SEF439U
Ignition coil with power transistor
1. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connec-
tor.
2. Check ignition coil with power transistor for resistance between
terminals q
3 and q 2 .
Terminals Resistance Result
Not 0Ω OK
q
3 and q
2
SEF307T 0Ω NG
If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor assembly.
EC-406

(COG)
The crankshaft position sensor (OBD) is located on the transmis- GI
sion housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the drive plate. It
detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, core and coil. MA
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
SEF956N The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to EM
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes. LC
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
used only for the on board diagnosis of misfire.
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FE

CAUTION: AT
TER-
PD
WIRE DATA
COLOR (AC voltage)
NO.
FA
Approximately 1.7V
(AC voltage)
RA
BR
Idle speed
ST
Crankshaft position sen- SEF391X
57 B/R
sor (OBD) RS
Approximately 0V
BT
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm. HA
EL
SEF546T
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC IDX

P1336 I Chipping of the signal plate (on drive plate) gear I Harness or connectors
0905 teeth (cogs) is detected by the ECM. I Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
I Signal plate (drive plate)
EC-407
(COG) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF392X
tery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
2) Start engine and run it for at least 3 minutes at idle
speed.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
EC-408
(COG) (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC646
EC-409
(COG) (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
screws.
SEF058T
H
NG
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor F14 , F131
(OBD) harness connector and ECM I Harness for open or
harness connector. short between crankshaft
3. Check continuity between sensor termi- position sensor (OBD)
nal q
1 and ECM terminal q 57 with CON- and ECM
SULT-II or tester. If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to
If OK, check harness for short to power in harness or con-
ground and short to power. nectors.
OK
SEF440U
H
NG
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness connectors
M4 , B3
harness connector and
ECM
SEF377U
trol (TAC) module
or connectors.
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace crankshaft posi-
SEF799Q [Crankshaft position sensor (OBD)]. tion sensor (OBD).
next page.
OK
H
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-410
(COG) (Cont’d)
q
A
H
Visually check drive plate gear teeth NG
E Replace drive plate.
(COG) for chipping. GI
OK
H
INSPECTION END MA
EM
Crankshaft position sensor (OBD) LC
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (OBD) harness connec-
tor.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. FE
SEF960N
AT
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Resistance: PD
Approximately 166.5 - 203.5Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
FA
RA
BR
SEF134W
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-411
EGRC-solenoid Valve
noid valve is energized. A plunger will then move to flow the
vacuum signal (from the intake manifold collector to the EGR
valve.)
The vacuum signal passes through the solenoid valve. The signal
then reaches the EGR valve. When the ECM sends an OFF signal,
the plunger is returned by the spring and cut the vacuum signal.
SEF383RD

I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF (CUT)

EGRC SOL/V
ON (FLOW)
I No-load rpm

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.

10 L/Y EGRC-solenoid valve idle to 3,000 rpm in “1st” position.

P1400 I The improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through I Harness or connectors
1005 EGRC-solenoid valve. (The EGRC-solenoid valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
EC-412
EGRC-solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
TESTING CONDITION:
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn GI
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. MA
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II and
wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF268Y 3) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-II” above. LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-413
TEC068M
EC-414
INSPECTION START
GI
H
E
1. Disconnect EGRC-solenoid valve har- I Harness connectors MA
ness connector. F63 , M49
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness connectors
SEF431U 3. Check voltage between terminal q1 and F80 , F126 EM
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I 10A fuse
OK
connectors. LC
H
E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM F126 , F80
FE
terminal q
10 and terminal q2 . If NG, repair open circuit or
Continuity should exist. short to ground or short to
If OK, check harness for short to ground power in harness or con- AT
SEF798W and short to power. nectors.
OK
H PD
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EGRC-solenoid
E
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” FA
below.
OK RA
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. BR
H
INSPECTION END
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-415
EGRC-solenoid valve
mode.
Condition
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
ON (FLOW) Yes No
OFF (CUT) No Yes
SEF799X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
and q
2
No supply No Yes

EC-416
EGR Temperature Sensor

The EGR temperature sensor detects temperature changes in the
EGR passage way. When the EGR valve opens, hot exhaust gases
flow, and the temperature in the passage way changes. The EGR GI
temperature sensor is a thermistor that modifies a voltage signal
sent from the ECM. This modified signal then returns to the ECM
as an input signal. As the temperature increases, EGR temperature
MA
sensor resistance decreases.
This sensor is not directly used to control the engine system. It is
SEF599K
used only for the on board diagnosis.
EM
°C (°F) (V) (MΩ) LC
0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11
50 (122) 2.53 0.092 - 0.12
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024
*: These data are reference values and measured between ECM terminal q
63
(EGR temperature sensor) and ground. FE
When EGR system is operating:
Voltage: 0 - 1.5V
CAUTION: AT
ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF320U
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC ST

RS
P1401 A) An excessively low voltage from the EGR tem- I Harness or connectors
0305 perature sensor is sent to ECM, even when (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is shorted.)
engine coolant temperature is low. I EGR temperature sensor BT
I Malfunction of EGR function, EGRC-BPT valve or
EGRC-solenoid valve
................................................................................. ................................................................................................ HA
B) An excessively high voltage from the EGR I Harness or connectors
temperature sensor is sent to ECM, even (The EGR temperature sensor circuit is open.)
when engine coolant temperature is high. I EGR temperature sensor EL
I Malfunction of EGR function, EGRC-BPT valve or
EGRC-solenoid valve
IDX
EC-417
EGR Temperature Sensor (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
Perform “Procedure for malfunction A” first. If DTC cannot be
confirmed, perform “Procedure for malfunction B”.
NOTE:
the next test.
SEF279Y Procedure for malfunction A

3) Verify that engine coolant temperature is less than 40°C
(104°F).
If the engine coolant temperature is above the range,
cool the engine down.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CAUTION:
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform the test at temperature above −10°C (14°F).
perature.
2) Run engine at idle for at least 2 minutes.
3) Confirm that EGR valve is not lifting.
If the check result is NG, go to “TROUBLE DIAG-
SEF360Q NOSES FOR DTC P0400, P0402 and P1402”. (See
pages EC-281, 290 and 423.)
5) Read “EGR TEMP SEN” at about 1,500 rpm while hold-
ing the EGR valve in full open position by hand.
Voltage should decrease to less than 1.0V.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SEF392X closed throttle position and note it.
10) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecu-
tive seconds.
CMPS-RPM (POS): 1,200 - 2,200 rpm
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: X − (X + 0.52) V
X = Voltage value measured at
step 7)
EC-418
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EGR tem-
perature sensor. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
confirmed. GI
2) Run engine at idle for at least 2 minutes. MA
3) Confirm that EGR valve is not lifting. If NG, go to
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR DTC P1402, EC-423.
SEF360Q 4) Check voltage between ECM terminal q 75 and ground at EM
about 1,500 rpm with EGR valve lifted up to the full
position by hand.
Voltage should decrease to less than 1.0V. LC
5) If step 4 is OK, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR
DTC P0400 and P1400, EC-286, 415.
FE
SEF015V
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-419
TEC069M
EC-420
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Repair harness or connec- GI
E
1. Disconnect EGR temperature sensor tors.
harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. MA
3. Check voltage between terminal q1 and
SEF159T
Voltage: Approximately 5V EM
OK
H
NG
LC
E
2. Check harness continuity between termi- F63 , M49
nal q
2 and engine ground. I Harness connectors
If OK, check harness for short to power. I Joint connector-16 FE
OK
between ECM and EGR
SEF547P
temperature sensor AT
between EGR tempera-
ture sensor and throttle PD
actuator control (TAC)
module
I Harness for open or short FA
between TCM and EGR
temperature sensor
If NG, repair open circuit or RA
or connectors.
H BR
SEF548P NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EGR temperature
E
(EGR temperature sensor). sensor.
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION” on ST
next page.
OK RS
H
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117. BT
H
INSPECTION END HA
COMPONENT INSPECTION EL
Check resistance change and resistance value. IDX
SEF643Q
EC-421
°C (°F) (V) (MΩ)
0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11
50 (122) 2.53 0.092 - 0.12
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024
SEF320U
EC-422
EGR Function (Open)

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor Engine speed
E
GI
E
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature MA

E
Start signal E
EGRC-sole-
Ignition switch
E
ECM
noid valve EM
E
LC
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
E
Secondary throttle position sensor Throttle position

E
FE
This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the I Low engine coolant temperature
EGR valve to suit engine operating conditions. This I Engine starting
cut-and-control operation is accomplished through I Engine stopped AT
the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve. When the I Engine idling
ECM detects any of the following conditions, current I Excessively high engine coolant temperature
flows through the solenoid valve. This causes the I Mass air flow sensor malfunction PD
port vacuum to be discharged into the atmosphere. I Low vehicle speed
The EGR valve remain closed. I TCS is operating
FA
RA
BR
ST
SEF317U
RS
BT
HA
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the IDX
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response
to throttle valve opening. The vacuum controls the movement of a
taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR valve.
SEF783K
EC-423
EGR Function (Open) (Cont’d)
EGRC-solenoid valve
noid valve is energized. The signal reaches to the EGR valve.
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, a plunger will then move to
cut the vacuum signal from the intake manifold collector to the EGR
valve.
SEF383RD

I Engine: After warming up Idle OFF (CUT)

EGRC SOL/V
I Shift lever: “N” Revving engine up from idle to 3,000
ON (FLOW)
I No-load rpm

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Less than 4.5V
Idle speed
0 - 1.0V

10 L/Y EGRC-solenoid valve idle to 3,000 rpm in “D” position.

If EGR temperature sensor detects EGR flow under the condition
that does not call for EGR, a high-flow malfunction is diagnosed.
NOTE:
Diagnosis for this DTC will end when engine coolant tempera-
ture is approx. 50 to 60°C (122 to 140°F). Ignition switch must
be turned “ON” (engine start) with engine coolant temperature
below 40°C (104°F) when starting DTC confirmation proce-
dure.
SEF073P
EC-424
P1402 I EGR flow is detected under conditions that do not I EGRC-solenoid valve
0514 call for EGR. I EGR valve leaking or stuck open
I EGR temperature sensor GI
I EGRC-BPT valve
MA
EM
PROCEDURE LC
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
FE
I Always perform the test at temperature above −10°C
(14°F). AT
SEF808X I Engine coolant temperature and EGR temperature must
be verified in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II
before starting DTC WORK SUPPORT test. If it is out of PD
range below, the test cannot be conducted.
COOLAN TEMP/S: −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F)
EGR TEMP SEN: Less than 4.8V FA
If the values are out of the ranges indicated above, park
the vehicle in a cool place and allow the engine tempera-
ture to stabilize. Do not attempt to reduce the coolant or RA
EGR temperature with a fan or means other than ambient
air. Doing so may produce an inaccurate diagnostic result.
SEF753X Then turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “EGR SYSTEM P1402” of “EGR SYSTEM” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-II. ST
3) Follow instruction of CONSULT-II.
4) Start engine and let it idle until “TESTING” on CON-
SULT-II screen is turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take RS
70 seconds or more.)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, turn igni-
tion “OFF” and cool the engine coolant temperature to BT
the range of −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F). Retry from step
1).
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF- HA
PEF245V DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAG-
EL
IDX
PEF246V
EC-425
SEF236Y
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “MODE 1” with
GST.
2) Check that engine coolant temperature is within the
range of −10 to 40°C (14 to 104°F).
3) Check that voltage between ECM terminal q 75 (EGR
temperature) and ground is less than 4.8V.
least 70 seconds.
5) Stop engine.
6) Perform the step 1) to 4) again.
SEF443U
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Check the following voltages.
ECM terminal q 67 (Engine coolant temperature) and
ground:
2.7 - 4.4V
ECM terminal q 75 (EGR temperature) and ground:
Less than 4.8V
4) Turn ignition “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds.
5) Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II” (Self-diagnostic
results) with ECM.
When using GST, “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” should be performed twice as much as
when using CONSULT-II or ECM (Diagnostic Test Mode II)
because GST cannot display MODE7 (1st trip DTC) concern-
ing this diagnosis. Therefore, using CONSULT-II or ECM (Diag-
nostic Test Mode II) is recommended.
EC-426
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC057M
EC-427
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK VACUUM HOSE. E
Repair it.
Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks
or improper connection or misconnecting.
Refer to “Vacuum Hose Drawing”, EC-19.
OK
SEF109L
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Repair or replace EGRC-
(EGRC-solenoid valve). solenoid valve or repair
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. circuit.
2. Turn EGRC-solenoid valve “ON”
and “OFF” in “ACTIVE TEST”
mode with CONSULT-II and
check operating sound.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Disconnect ECM harness con-
nector.
SEF764X 3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Connect a suitable jumper wire
between ECM terminal q 10 and
engine ground.
5. Check operating sound of the
solenoid valve when disconnect-
ing and reconnecting the jumper
wire.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace EGRC-solenoid
SEF358W EC-430.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EGR valve.
E
(EGR valve).
430.
H
OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-428
q
A
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace EGRC-BPT valve.
E
(EGRC-BPT valve).
EC-431.
H
OK MA
Check resistance of EGR temperature NG Replace EGR temperature
E
sensor. Refer to EC-431. sensor. EM
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR LC
H
INSPECTION END
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-429
EGR valve
I Apply vacuum to EGR valve vacuum port with a hand vacuum
pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
I Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.
MEF137D
EGRC-solenoid valve
mode.
Condition
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
ON (FLOW) Yes No
OFF (CUT) No Yes
SEF799X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C
and q
2
No supply No Yes

EC-430
Check resistance change and resistance value.
°C (°F) (V) (MΩ)
0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11 GI
50 (122) 2.53 0.092 - 0.12
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024 MA
SEF643Q EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF320U
EGRC-BPT valve ST
2. Vacuum from the other port and check for leakage while apply-
ing a pressure above 0.981 kPa (100 mmH2O, 3.94 inH2O) RS
from under EGRC-BPT valve.
3. If a leakage is noted, replace the valve.
BT
HA
SEF083P
EL
IDX
EC-431

(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure)
Note: If DTC P1448 is displayed with P1440, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See
EC-464.)

This diagnosis detects leaks in the EVAP purge line using of vapor pressure in the fuel tank.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is closed to shut the EVAP purge line. The vacuum cut valve bypass
valve will then be opened to clear the line between the fuel tank and the EVAP canister purge control valve.
The EVAP control system pressure sensor can now monitor the pressure inside the fuel tank.
If pressure increases, the ECM will check for leaks in the line between the vacuum cut valve and EVAP can-
ister purge control valve.
SEF850U

Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1440 I EVAP control system has a leak. I Incorrect fuel tank vacuum relief valve
0213 I EVAP control system does not operate properly. I Incorrect fuel filler cap used
I Fuel filler cap remains open or fails to close.
valve.
pressure sensor
solenoid valve
or damaged.
I Water separator
CAUTION:
EC-432
(Small Leak) (Positive Pressure) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
I Never use compressed air or high pressure pump. GI
Otherwise, EVAP system may be damaged.
I Do not start the engine.
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042 kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure MA
in EVAP system.
NOTE:
SEF609U
EM
LC
I Always remove service port adapter from service port
after applying air up to 0.69 to 1.38 kPa (5.17 to 10.34
mmHg, 0.20 to 0.41 inHg).
I During the test, clamp the EVAP hose tightly as shown at
left. FE
I When clamping the hose, do not clamp other than middle
of the hose to prevent loose or damage of the hose.
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P1440, perform TROUBLE AT
PEF422W DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first. (See EC-464.)
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2) Clamp the EVAP hose as shown left. PD
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- FA
SULT-II.
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. RA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BR
SEF462U
I It is better that the fuel level is low. ST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle according to “Driving pattern”, EC-56. RS
3) Stop vehicle.
I If SRT of EVAP system is not set yet, go to the follow- BT
ing step.
5) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds. HA
6) Start engine.
PEF295U It is not necessary to cool engine down before driving.
7) Drive vehicle again according to the “Driving pattern”, EL
EC-56.
8) Stop vehicle.
9) Select “MODE 3” with GST. IDX
EC-433
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine.
3) Stop vehicle.
5) Turn ignition switch “ON” and perform “Diagnostic Test
Mode (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
EC-434
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. E If genuine NISSAN fuel
1. Check for genuine NISSAN fuel filler
cap design.
filler cap is not used,
replace with genuine
MA
2. Check for air releasing sound while NISSAN fuel filler cap.
opening the fuel filler cap. If the air
SEF434Q releasing sound is heard, go to . EM
If the air releasing sound is not heard,
check the following.
Was the cap tightened properly?
If Yes, check fuel filler cap vacuum LC
relief valve.
Refer to “EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
SYSTEM”, EC-27.
If No, open fuel filler cap, then clean
cap and filler neck thread using air
blower. Retighten until ratcheting sound
is heard.
FE
OK
H
NG
CHECK FOR EVAP LEAK. E Repair or replace. AT
SEF462U I Never use compressed air or a high
pressure pump.
I Improper installation of service port
may cause a leak. PD
I Do not exceed 4.12 kPa (0.042
kg/cm2, 0.6 psi) of pressure in EVAP
system.
To locate the EVAP leak, do the following. FA
Select “EVAP SYSTEM RA
CLOSE” of “WORK SUPPORT”
3. Touch “START” and apply posi-
tive pressure to the EVAP line. BR
SEF463U 4. Using EVAP leak detector,
locate the leak. Refer to the
instruction manual for more
details about the leak detector. ST
Refer to “Evaporative Emission
Line Drawing”, EC-29.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. RS
3. Apply 12 volts DC to EVAP
apply 12 volts until the end of BT
test.)
valve will open. (Continue to HA
apply 12V until the end of test.)
SEF200U 5. Pressurize the EVAP line using
pressure gauge with 1.3 to 2.7
kPa (10 to 20 mmHg, 0.39 to EL
0.79 inHg), then remove pump
and service port adapter.
detector. Refer to the instruction IDX
Drawing”, EC-29.
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF598U
EC-435
q
A
H
E
valve). valve.
EC-439.
SEF599U
OK
H
E
EC-493.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT NG Repair or replace EVAP
E
(EVAP canister vent control valve, O-ring canister vent control valve
SEF593U
and water separator). and O-ring or harness/
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, connectors.
EC-441 and “P0446 EVAP canister vent con-
trol valve for California”, EC-315.
OK
H
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER SATU- NG Replace EVAP canister
E
SEF594U 2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP and water separator for
OK
H
qB
(Go to next page.)
SEF596U
EC-436
q
B
H GI
CHECK COMPONENT (EVAP canister NG Check the following.
E
purge control solenoid valve). I EVAP canister purge con-
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to trol solenoid valve MA
EVAP canister purge control Refer to “COMPONENTS
solenoid valve. INSPECTION”, EC-440.
2. Start engine. I Vacuum hoses for clog-
SEF594U
3. Perform “PURG CONT S/V” in ging or disconnection. EM
“ACTIVE TEST” mode. Refer to “Vacuum Hose
4. Select “ON” on CONSULT-II Drawing”, EC-29.
screen to turn on “PURG CONT LC
S/V”.
rpm.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine and warm it up to FE
2. Stop engine.
SEF765X
EVAP canister purge control AT
valve.
least 60 seconds. PD
rpm.
Vacuum should exist. FA
OK
H RA
NG
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, BR
EC-442.
SEF597U
OK
ST
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace MAP/BARO
RS
EC-442.
OK BT
H
NG
(Fuel tank temperature sensor). ture sensor. HA
SEF406W
EC-443.
OK
EL
H
NG
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, hose. IDX
improper connection.
Drawing”, EC-29.
H OK
qC
(Go to next page.)
SEF394WA
EC-437
q
C
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT Replace EVAP control sys-
E
EC-325.
OK
H
tube) using air blower.
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-438
1. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve GI
harness connector.
terminal q 2 and terminals q 1 ,q 3 MA
Resistance:
Approximately 35 - 43Ω [At 25°C (77°F)] EM
harness connector.
4. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control valve LC
from the valve.
connected.)
purge volume control valve shaft moves smoothly for- AT
SEF353Q
valve. PD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
harness connector. FA
terminal q 5 and terminals q 4 ,q 6 RA
Resistance:
3. Reconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve BR
SEC049C
harness connector.
from intake manifold collector and disconnect hoses ST
from the valve.
RS
connected.)
BT
tion switch position. HA
SEF763P valve.
EL
IDX
SEF593U
EC-439
with CONSULT-II.
perature.
4. Disconnect vacuum hose at EVAP canister purge con-
trol valve.
SEF765X through the hose.
Condition Vacuum
Idle Not exist
2,000 rpm Exist
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SEF400W
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

Yes No
between terminals
No supply No Yes

valve.
SEF313Q
EVAP canister purge control valve

age.
out of port qC .
3. Apply vacuum to port q A . [Approximately −13.3 to −20.0 kPa
(−100 to −150 mmHg, −3.94 to −5.91 inHg)]
SEF809W
EC-440
CONSULT-II. GI
VENT CONTROL/V between qA and q B MA
ON No
SEC050C OFF Yes EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LC
Condition
between qA and q B

No
minals q1 and q 2
FE
No supply Yes
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, clean valve using air AT

AEC783A blower or replace as necessary.
If the portion qB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve. PD
FA
RA
BR
Water separator ST
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. RS
B with
qA , and then q
C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. BT
NOTE:
HA
SEF829T
EL
IDX
EC-441
connected.
terminal q
64 and ground.
SEF359W check the output voltage.
The voltage should be 1.0 to 1.4V lower than the value
measured in step 3.
CAUTION:

perature.
with CONSULT-II.
I Condition: At idle under no-load
SEF767X
BARO More than 2.6V

BARO to MAP
Less than 1 second
MAP to BARO

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Remove MAP/BARO switch solenoid valve.
SEF768X

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

and q
2
No supply No Yes

solenoid valve.
MEC488B
EC-442
in the figure.
GI
20 (68) 2.3 - 2.7
MA
50 (122) 0.79 - 0.90
SEF405UA If NG, replace fuel tank temperature sensor. EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-443

Volume Control Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Amount of intake air


sor
Start signal
Ignition switch E EVAP canister
ECM E purge volume
control valve
Throttle position

Heated oxygen sensor 1 (front) E
Fuel temperature in fuel tank

Fuel tank temperature sensor E
Vehicle speed
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor
moves the valve in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for opti-
mum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con-
ditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is regulated as the
air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control valve uses a step motor
to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. This
motor has four winding phases. It operates according to the output
pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings are turned ON and OFF in
sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the valve opens or
closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow rate is
needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain volt-
age signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular
opening.
SEF249P
EC-444
Volume Control Valve (Cont’d)
GI
Idle 0 step
PURG VOL C/V Vehicle running
I Air conditioner switch “OFF” — MA
(Shift lever “1”)
ECM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE EM

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the LC
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
FE
Ignition switch “OFF” 0 - 1V AT

PD
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF” FA
130 BATTERY VOLTAGE
R/G Power supply for ECM Ignition switch “ON” RA
131 (11 - 14V)

123 W/L Current return
(11 - 14V)
BR
Idle speed
28 BR/Y Engine is running. 0 - 0.4V or

BATTERY VOLTAGE ST
29 G (11 - 14V)
35 G/OR
EVAP canister purge vol- Engine is running. 0 - 0.4V or RS
BATTERY VOLTAGE
36 L/B (11 - 14V)
BT
Diagnostic Trouble Check Items HA
P1444 I The canister purge flow is detected during the I EVAP control system pressure sensor EL
0214 specified driving conditions, even when EVAP can- I EVAP canister purge volume control valve (The
ister purge volume control valve is completely valve is stuck open.)
closed. I EVAP canister purge control valve IDX
I Hoses
(Hoses are connected incorrectly or clogged.)
EC-445
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
SEF809X
TESTING CONDITION:
Always perform test at temperature above 0°C (32°F).
perature.
4) Select “PURG CN/V & S/V P1493” of “EVAPORATIVE
SULT-II.
SEF811X
least 90 seconds.
“COMPLETED”. (It will take for at least 30 seconds.)
CMPS-RPM (POS): 900 - 6,300 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL: 2 - 4.8 msec
9) Select “PURG VOL C/V P1444” of “EVAPORATIVE
SULT-II.
SEF810X
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to step 12).
“COMPLETED”. (It will take for at least 20 seconds.)
from step 2).
SEF812X 12) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-
EC-446
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2) Select “MODE 1” with GST. GI
3) Check coolant temperature.
Coolant temperature: 40 - 100°C (104 - 212°F)
Be sure that water temperature does not exceed 100°C MA
(212°F). If it becomes higher than 100°C (212°F), cool
down the engine and perform the procedure again from
SEF519R
the beginning. EM
5) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 15 seconds.
6) Restart engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds. LC
7) Maintain the following conditions for at least 80 sec-
onds.
Gear position : Suitable gear position
CMPS-RPM (POS) : 900 - 6,300 rpm FE
9) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC AT
NOTE:
I Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during PD
driving in steps 7.
I If the driving conditions are not satisfied in steps 7, restart
the procedure. FA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to nor- RA
Voltage: 0.8 - 1.5V BR
SEF615U Perform the following procedure before the voltage
drops below 0.8V. If the voltage drops below 0.8V, cool
down the engine and perform the entire procedure all ST
over again.
4) Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 15 seconds. RS
5) Restart engine and let it idle for at least 80 seconds.
onds. BT
CMPS-RPM : 900 - 6,300 rpm
Check voltage between ECM terminal q 67 and
HA
ground: 0.8 - 1.5V
7) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds, and
then turn “ON”. EL
9) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC IDX
NOTE:
I Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during
driving in steps 6.
the procedure.
EC-447
INSPECTION START
H
NG
valve). valve.
SEF417U next page.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace EVAP control sys-
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). tem pressure sensor and
1. Check disconnection of hose connected repair or replace harness
to the sensor. and connector.
2. Check sensor harness connector for
water.
3. Check EVAP control system pressure
sensor.
EC-450.
SEF427U
OK
H
NG
(EVAP canister vent control valve). vent control valve.
EC-450.
OK
H
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- E Clean, repair or replace
Check obstructed water separator, separator.
improper connection of hose and rubber
tube to EVAP canister vent control valve
and clean the rubber tube using air
SEF596U
blower.
OK
H
NG
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-448
1. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve GI
harness connector.
terminal q 2 and terminals q 1 ,q 3 MA
Resistance:
Approximately 35 - 43Ω [At 25°C (77°F)] EM
harness connector.
4. Remove EVAP canister purge volume control valve LC
from the valve.
connected.)
purge volume control valve shaft moves smoothly for- AT
SEF353Q
valve. PD
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
harness connector. FA
terminal q 5 and terminals q 4 ,q 6 RA
Resistance:
3. Reconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve BR
from intake manifold collector and disconnect hoses ST
from the valve.
ume control valve harness connector should remain RS
connected.)
canister purge volume control valve shaft moves BT
HA
SEF763P valve.
EL
IDX
SEF593U
EC-449
1. Remove EVAP control system pressure sensor with its har-
SEF357W 5. Check output voltage between ECM terminal q92 and ground.

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
CAUTION:
I Do not apply below −20 kPa (−150 mmHg, −5.91 inHg) or
SEF799W I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor,
if equipped.
has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
one.

CONSULT-II.

ON No
OFF Yes
SEC050C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Condition
between qA and q B

No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes

blower or replace as necessary.
AEC783A
EC-450
If the portion q
B is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-451

Control Valve (Close)
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
signals from the ECM.
is energized.
SEF419U A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.


CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.


Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1446 I EVAP canister vent control valve remains closed I EVAP canister vent control valve
0215 under specified driving conditions. I EVAP control system pressure sensor and the circuit
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve
I Water separator
EC-452
Control Valve (Close) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. GI
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition MA
the next test.
SEF280Y EM
3) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”). LC
4) Drive vehicle at a speed of approximately 80 km/h (50
MPH) for a maximum of 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If a malfunction exists, NG result may be displayed quicker. FE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-453
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOG- E
Clean, repair or replace
Check obstructed water separator and separator.
rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve and clean the rubber tube using air
SEF419U blower.
NENT INSPECTION” on next page.
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
O-ring). O-ring.
next page.
OK
SEF596U
H
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- E
1. Remove EVAP canister with the vent 1. Check hose connections
control valve attached. to the EVAP canister
canister. clogging and poor con-
If it will, weigh the EVAP canister with nection.
the vent control valve attached. 2. Check water separator.
If the weight is: Refer to “COMPONENT
More than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → NG INSPECTION”, EC-455.
OK
SEF427U
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace EVAP control sys-
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- repair or replace harness
nected to the sensor. and connector.
2. Check sensors harness connector for
water.
sensor.
EC-456.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-454
Check air passage continuity. GI
CONSULT-II.
MA
SEC050C ON No EM
OFF Yes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LC

Condition
between qA and q B

FE
No
minals q1 and q 2
AEC783A
No supply Yes AT
If NG, clean valve using air blower or replace as necessary.
PD
valve.
FA
RA
BR
Water separator ST
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. RS
B with
qA , and then q
C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. BT
NOTE:
HA
SEF829T
EL
IDX
EC-455
5. Check output voltage between ECM terminal q92 and ground.
SEF357W Pressure (Relative to atmospheric pressure) Voltage (V)

0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
CAUTION:
I Never apply force to the air hole protector of the sensor,
if equipped.
SEF799W I Discard any EVAP control system pressure sensor which
one.
EC-456

Purge Flow Monitoring
NOTE: If DTC P1447 is displayed with P0510, perform TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0510 first.
(See EC-346.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF850U
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
In this evaporative emission (EVAP) control system, purge flow occurs during non-closed throttle conditions. FE
Purge volume is related to air intake volume. Under normal purge conditions (non-closed throttle), the EVAP
canister purge volume control valve and EVAP canister purge control valve are open. Purge flow exposes the
EVAP control system pressure sensor to intake manifold vacuum. AT

PD
Under normal conditions (non-closed throttle), sensor output voltage indicates if pressure drop and purge flow
are adequate. If not, a fault is determined.
FA
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
RA
P1447 I EVAP control system does not operate properly. I EVAP canister purge volume control valve stuck
0111 I EVAP control system has a leak between intake mani- closed
fold and EVAP control system pressure sensor. I EVAP canister purge control valve stuck closed
I EVAP control system pressure sensor BR
I Loose, disconnected or improper connection of rubber
tube
I Blocked rubber tube
ST
solenoid valve
I Cracked EVAP canister RS
I Closed throttle position switch
I Improper connection of one-way valve
I Blocked purge port BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-457
Purge Flow Monitoring (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
SEF809X
TESTING CONDITION:
I Always perform test at temperature above 0°C (32°F).
perature.
least 90 seconds.
SULT-II.
SEF811X
“COMPLETED”. (It will take at least 30 seconds.)
from step 2).
SEF810X
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed, go to 11).
SEF812X Selector lever: Suitable position
from step 2).
NOSTIC PROCEDURE” of “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FOR DTC P1444”, EC-448.
12) Select “PURG FLOW P1447” of “EVAPORATIVE SYS-
TEM” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-
II.
SEC054C be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the
EC-458
GI
from step 2). MA
SEC055C
NOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-460. EM
LC
FE
SEF238Y
AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK PD
Use this procedure to check the overall monitoring function of the
EVAP control system purge flow. During this check, a 1st trip DTC FA
mal operating temperature. RA
2) Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 5 seconds.
4) Set voltmeter probes to ECM terminals q 92 (EVAP con- BR
SEF360W trol system pressure sensor signal) and 128 (ECM
ground).
5) Check EVAP control system pressure sensor value at ST
idle speed.
6) Establish and maintain the following conditions for at
least 1 minute. RS
Air conditioner switch: ON
Steering wheel: Fully turned
Headlamp switch: ON BT
Rear window defogger switch: ON
Engine speed: Approx. 3,000 rpm
Gear position: HA
Any position other than “P”, “N” or “R”
Verify that EVAP control system pressure sensor value

EL
stays 0.1V less than the value at idle speed for at least
1 second. IDX
EC-459
INSPECTION START
H
NG
CHECK EVAP CANISTER. E
Replace EVAP canister.
Check EVAP canister for cracks.
OK
SEF622U H
NG
CHECK PURGE FLOW. CHECK EVAP PURGE
E
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from LINE.
EVAP canister purge control Check EVAP purge line for
valve and install vacuum gauge. improper connection, dis-
2. Start engine and let it idle. connection and blocked
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” purge port.
in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. 1. Turn ignition switch
4. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm. “OFF”.
5. Select “ON” and “OFF” on CON- 2. Disconnect purge hoses
SULT-II screen to turn on connected to EVAP can-
“PURG CONT/V S/V”. ister purge control valve
ON: Vacuum should exist. (qA ) and EVAP canister
SEF765X
OFF: Vacuum should not purge volume control
exist. valve (qB ).
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. Blow air into each hose
1. Start engine and warm it up to and make sure air flows
normal operating temperature. freely.
2. Stop engine. 4. Check EVAP purge port
3. Disconnect vacuum hose from qC.
EVAP canister purge control 5. Check improper connec-
valve and install vacuum gauge. tion of one-way valve.
4. Start engine and let it idle for at If NG, reconnect one-way
least 60 seconds. valve properly or repair or
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum clean hoses and/or purge
when revving engine up to port.
2,000 rpm.
SEF621U While operating solenoid OK
H
valve, vacuum should exist.
6. Release the accelerator pedal CHECK ONE-WAY VALVE.
and let idle. 1. Check for improper con-
Vacuum should not exist. nection.
2. Check component.
OK Refer to EC-393.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENTS
(EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid
valve).
SEF368U Refer to “COMPONENT
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
valve). valve.
EC-462.
H
OK
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF593U
EC-460
q
A
H
GI
E
(EVAP canister purge control solenoid purge control solenoid
valve). valve.
MA
EC-463.
SEF600U OK EM
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT
E
Replace EVAP canister LC
EC-463.
OK
H FE
CHECK COMPONENT AND CIRCUIT NG Replace EVAP control sys-
E
SEF594U 1. Check disconnection of hose connected repair or replace harness AT
water. PD
FA
sensor. Refer to “COMPONENT
RA
OK
H BR
SEF427U E
O-ring). O-ring. ST
EC-455.
OK
RS
H
CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE. NG Replace it.
Inspect EVAP purge line (pipe and rubber
E BT
tube). Check for evidence of leaks.
OK HA
H
SEF419U
tube) using air blower. EL
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-461
1) Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
harness connector.
2) Check resistance between the following terminals.
Resistance:
3) Reconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
harness connector.
4) Remove EVAP canister purge volume control valve
from the valve.
connected.)
6) Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST”
SEF353Q
valve.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1) Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
harness connector.
2) Check resistance between the following terminals.
Resistance:
3) Reconnect EVAP canister purge volume control valve
4) Remove EVAP canister purge volume control valve
from the valve.
connected.)
5) Turn ignition switch “ON” and “OFF”. Check that EVAP
SEF763P valve.
SEF593U
EC-462
age. GI
out of port qC .
3. Apply vacuum to port q A . [Approximately −13.3 to −20.0 kPa MA
(−100 to −150 mmHg, −3.94 to −5.91 inHg)]
SEF809W EM
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. LC
with CONSULT-II.
perature.
trol valve. FE
through the hose.
SEF765X
AT
Condition Vacuum
Idle Not exist PD
2,000 rpm Exist
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- FA
RA
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C BR
SEF400W
Yes No
between terminals
ST
No supply No Yes
If NG or operation takes more 1 second, replace solenoid valve. RS
BT
HA
SEF313Q
One-way valve EL
Check one-way valve air passage continuity.
IDX
Blow air into side B to A Yes
Blow air into side A to B No
If NG, replace one-way valve.

Make sure to install one-way valve with the colored side fac-
AEC140A ing the vacuum.
EC-463

Control Valve (Open)
NOTE:
If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, P1440, perform
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first.
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP can-
SEF378Q signals from the ECM.
is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains
opened.
SEF419U


CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.


Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1448 I EVAP canister vent control valve remains opened I EVAP canister vent control valve
0309 under specified driving conditions. I EVAP control system pressure sensor
I Blocked rubber tube to EVAP canister vent control
valve
I Water separator
I Vacuum cut valve
EC-464
Control Valve (Open) (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
I If DTC P1448 is displayed with P0440, P1440, perform GI
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1448 first.
CEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn MA
SEF814X EM
TESTING CONDITION:
less than 3/4 full. And vehicle is placed on a flat level sur- LC
face.
I Always perform test at temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
2) Select “EVAP SML LEAK P0440” of “EVAPORATIVE FE
SULT-II.
PEF929V
Follow the instruction displayed. AT
3) Make sure that “OK” is displayed.
If “NG” is displayed, go to following step.
NOTE: PD
I If the CONSULT-II screen shown at left (“CAN NOT
BE DIAGNOSED”) is displayed, stop the engine and
stabilize the vehicle temperature at 25°C (77°F) or FA
cooler. After “FUEL T/TMP SE” becomes less than
30°C (86°F), retest.
(Use a fan to reduce the stabilization time.) RA
I If the engine speed cannot be maintained within the
range on the CONSULT-II screen, go to “BASIC
INSPECTION”, EC-91. BR
SEF813X
4) Disconnect hose from water separator.
5) Select “VENT CONTROL/V” of “ACTIVE TEST” mode ST
with CONSULT-II.
6) Touch “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
7) Make sure the following. RS
BT
ON No
OFF Yes
HA
PEF669U EC-467.
If the result is OK, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE” EL
for “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P0440”,
EC-298.
IDX
SEC050C
EC-465
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the EVAP can-
ister vent control valve circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
1) Disconnect hose from water separator.
2) Disconnect EVAP canister vent control valve harness
connector.
3) Verify the following.
AEC783A
12V direct current supply between
No
terminals q
1 and q 2
No supply Yes

EC-467.
If the result is OK, go to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR
DTC P0440”, EC-298.
EC-466
INSPECTION START
GI
H
NG
CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR DISCON- E Repair or clean.
NECTION.
Check disconnection of rubber tube to
MA
EVAP canister vent control valve and
clean the rubber hose and/or vent control
SEF419U valve then install properly. EM
OK
H
NG
LC
O-ring). O-ring.
next page.
OK FE
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E Replace vacuum cut valve.
SEF623U
(Vacuum cut valve). AT
EC-474.
OK
PD
H
NG
CHECK IF EVAP CANISTER IS SATU- E Replace EVAP canister FA
1. Remove EVAP canister with the vent 1. Check hose connections
control valve attached. to the EVAP canister
2. Check if water will drain from the EVAP and water separator for RA
the vent control valve attached. 2. Check water separator. BR
If the weight is: Refer to “COMPONENT
SEF596U
ST
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT
NG
E Replace EVAP control sys- RS
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- repair or replace harness
nected to the sensor. and connector. BT
water.
3. Check EVAP control system pressure HA
sensor.
SEF427U
next page. EL
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-467
CONSULT-II.

SEC050C ON No
OFF Yes
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Condition
between qA and q B

No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes
AEC783A
valve.

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”’.
SEF357W
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
−9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
CAUTION:
if equipped.
SEF799W in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
EC-468
Water separator
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose. GI
B with
qA , and then q
C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts. MA
NOTE:
SEF829T EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-469
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Circuit)

The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister.
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF623U ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SEF850U


CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

45 LG/B Ignition switch “ON”
valve (11 - 14V)

P1490 I An improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through I Harness or connectors
0801 vacuum cut valve bypass valve. (The vacuum cut valve bypass valve circuit is
open or shorted.)
I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
EC-470
(Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the igni-
tion switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conduct-
ing the next test. MA
SEF392X
3) Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-471
(Cont’d)
TEC070M
EC-472
(Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
GI
E
Go to CHECK POWER SUPPLY .
H
MA
CHECK CIRCUIT. OK Go to “CHECK COMPO-
E
1. Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE NENT” after procedure .
SEF623U
TEST” mode.
EM
2. Make sure that clicking sound is heard
from the vacuum cut bypass valve.
LC
NG
H
E
2. Disconnect vacuum cut valve bypass C14 , B64 , B65 , B178
valve harness connector. I Harness connectors FE
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. B102 , F64 , F63 , M49
4. Check voltage between terminal q2 and I 10A fuse
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I Harness for open or short
SEC056C Voltage: Battery voltage between vacuum cut
AT
valve bypass valve and
OK fuse
If NG, repair harness or PD
connectors.
H FA
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. F64 , B102 , B178 , B65 RA
3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Harness or connectors
1 . B64 , C14
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or short BR
If OK, check harness for short to ground between vacuum cut
SEF877T
and short to power. valve bypass valve and
ECM
OK If NG, repair open circuit or ST
nectors. RS
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace vacuum cut valve
E BT
(Vacuum cut valve bypass valve). bypass valve.
next page.
OK
HA
H
SEF625U
H
INSPECTION END IDX
EC-473
(Cont’d)
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.

VC/V BYPASS/V between qA and q B
SEC057C ON Yes
OFF No
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Condition
between qA and q B

Yes
terminals
No supply No
SEF351Q
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace vacuum cut
valve bypass valve.
EC-474
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve

The vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve bypass valve are
installed in parallel on the EVAP purge line between the fuel tank
and the EVAP canister. GI
The vacuum cut valve prevents the intake manifold vacuum from
being applied to the fuel tank.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve is a solenoid type valve and MA
generally remains closed. It opens only for on board diagnosis.
The vacuum cut valve bypass valve responds to signals from the
SEF623U ECM. When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the valve is EM
opened. The vacuum cut valve is then bypassed to apply intake
manifold vacuum to the fuel tank.
LC
FE
AT
PD
SEF850U
FA
RA
BR
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. ST
CAUTION:
ECM’s transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals such as the body ground. RS
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC Voltage) BT
NO.

45 LG/B
valve
(11 - 14V) HA
EL
IDX
EC-475
Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve (Cont’d)
P1491 I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve does not operate I Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
0311 properly. I Vacuum cut valve
I Bypass hoses for clogging
I Hose between fuel tank and vacuum cut valve
clogged
I Hose between vacuum cut valve and EVAP canis-
ter clogged
I EVAP canister
I EVAP purge port of fuel tank for clogging

PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF809X
I Always perform test at temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to
86°F).
perature.
least 90 seconds.
SULT-II.
SEF810X 7) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will
from step 3).
DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to
SEC058C “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1493”, EC-488.
EC-476
SULT-II.
If “COMPLETED” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen,
go to step 12). GI
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to MA
SEC059C
Vehicle speed: 36 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH) EM
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry LC
from step 3).
DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1444”, EC-444.
13) Select “VC CUT/V BP/V P1491” of “EVAPORATIVE FE
SULT-II.
14) Touch “START”. AT
SEF239Y 15) When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will
conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to PD
Vehicle speed: 36 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH) FA
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 5 minutes, retry RA
from step 3).
DIAG RESULTS”. If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAG- BR
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ST
1) Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum cut valve
bypass valve as an assembly. RS
2) Apply vacuum to port q A and check that there is no
suction from port q B .
3) Apply vacuum to port q B and check that there is suction BT
from port qA .
4) Blow air in port qB and check that there is a resistance
to flow out of port qA . HA
5) Supply battery voltage to the terminal.
6) Blow air in port q
A and check that air flows freely out of
port qB . EL
7) Blow air in port q
B and check that air flows freely out of
port qA .
8) If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-478. IDX
SEF530Q
EC-477
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK COMPONENT. OK Check the following.
E
1. Remove vacuum cut valve and vacuum I EVAP purge line between
cut valve bypass valve as an assembly. EVAP canister and fuel
2. Apply vacuum to port q A and check that tank for clogging or dis-
there is no suction from port q B. connection.
3. Apply vacuum to port q B and check that I EVAP canister Refer to
SEC057C there is suction from port q A. EC-26.
4. Blow air in port q B and check that there I EVAP purge port of fuel
is a resistance to flow out of port q A. tank for clogging
5. Select “VC/V BYPASS/V” in If NG, repair or replace.
“ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “ON”. OK
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
5. Supply battery voltage to the ter-
minal.
H
6. Blow air in port q A and check that air
flows freely out of port q B. Go to below.
7. Blow air in port q B and check that air
flows freely out of port q A.
NG
H
Check bypass hoses for clogging. NG Repair or replace hoses.
E
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace malfunctioning
E
(Vacuum cut valve, vacuum cut valve parts.
bypass valve).
next page.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Repair or replace harness,
SEF530Q E
(EVAP control system pressure sensor). connectors and/or replace
1. Check for disconnection of hose con- EVAP control system pres-
nected to the sensor. sure sensor.
water.
If OK, go to the following step.
sensor.
next page.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Repair or replace.
SEF623U E
EC-480.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF427U
EC-478
Vacuum cut valve bypass valve
Perform “VC/V BYPASS/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
GI
VC/V BYPASS/V between qA and q B
MA
ON Yes
OFF No
SEC057C EM
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LC
Condition
between qA and q B
12V direct current supply between terminals Yes

No supply No
FE
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace vacuum cut
valve bypass valve.
SEF351Q
AT
Vacuum cut valve
Check vacuum cut valve as follows:
PD
1. Plug port qC and q D with fingers.
2. Apply vacuum to port q A and check that there is no suction
from port qB . FA
3. Apply vacuum to port q B and check that there is suction from
port q
A .
B and check that there is a resistance to flow RA
out of port q
A .
5. Open port q C and q D .
A check that air flows freely out of port q
C . BR
SEF379Q B check that air flows freely out of port q
7. Blow air in port q D .
EVAP control system pressure sensor ST

2. Remove hose from EVAP control system pressure sensor. RS
system pressure sensor as shown in figure. BT

HA
0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg) 3.0 - 3.6
SEF357W −9.3 kPa (−70 mmHg, −2.76 inHg) 0.4 - 0.6
CAUTION: EL
IDX
if equipped.
SEF799W
one.
EC-479
CONSULT-II.

ON No
OFF Yes
SEC050C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Condition
between qA and q B

No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes

AEC783A If the portion qB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
EC-480

Control Valve/Solenoid Valve (Circuit)
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
E
GI
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EVAP canister

E
E purge control sole-
MA
Closed throttle position switch Closed throttle position noid valve
E ECM
Vacuum EM
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed signal
E
H
Ignition switch Start signal EVAP canister LC

E
purge control valve
This system controls the vacuum signal applied to I Start switch “ON” FE
the EVAP canister purge control valve. I Closed throttle position
When the ECM detects any of the following I Low or high engine coolant temperature
conditions, current does not flow through the EVAP I During deceleration AT
canister purge control solenoid valve. I Engine stopped
The solenoid valve cuts the vacuum signal so that I For 60 seconds after starting engine
the EVAP canister purge control valve remains (After warming up to normal operating tempera- PD
closed. ture)
FA
RA
BR
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ST
The EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve responds to sig- RS
nals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the
vacuum signal (from the intake manifold to the EVAP canister
purge control valve) is cut. BT
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the vacuum signal
passes through the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve.
The signal then reaches the EVAP canister purge control valve. HA
SEF383RE
EVAP canister purge control valve EL

When the vacuum signal is cut by EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve, EVAP canister purge control valve shuts off the IDX
EVAP purge line.
SEF343QB
EC-481
Control Valve/Solenoid Valve (Circuit) (Cont’d)
SEF850U

Idle OFF
PURG CONT S/V I Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm ON

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

22 Y
Approximately 0V

Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1492 I The improper voltage signal is sent to ECM through I Harness or connectors
0807 EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve. (The EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve cir-
cuit is open or shorted.)
EC-482
NOTE:
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn the igni-
tion switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conduct- GI
ing the next test.
PROCEDURE MA
SEF392X 2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EM
PROCEDURE”, EC-485. LC
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-483
TEC071M
EC-484
INSPECTION START
GI
H
E MA
1. Disconnect EVAP canister purge control I Harness connector
solenoid valve harness connector. M49 , F63
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I 10A fuse
SEF012V EM
3. Check voltage between terminal q2 and I Harness for open or short
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. between EVAP canister
Voltage: Battery voltage purge control solenoid LC
valve and fuse
OK
connectors.
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec- FE
E
SEF880T
3. Check harness continuity between ECM AT
1 .
If OK, check harness for short to ground PD
and short to power.
OK
H
FA
E
(EVAP canister purge control solenoid purge control solenoid
valve). valve.
RA
below.
BR
SEF605U OK
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ST
H RS
INSPECTION END
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-485
with CONSULT-II.
perature.
SEF765X trol valve.
through the hose.
Condition Vacuum
Idle Not exist
2,000 rpm Exist
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SEF400W Air passage Air passage

between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

Yes No
between terminals
No supply No Yes

valve.
SEF313Q
EC-486

Control Valve/Solenoid Valve
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
E
GI
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EVAP canister

E
E purge control sole-
MA
Closed throttle position switch Closed throttle position noid valve
E ECM
Vacuum EM
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed signal
E
H
Ignition switch Start signal EVAP canister LC

E purge control valve
This system controls the vacuum signal applied to I Start switch “ON”
I Closed throttle position
FE
the EVAP canister purge control valve.
When the ECM detects any of the following I Low or high engine coolant temperature
conditions, current does not flow through the EVAP I During deceleration AT
canister purge control solenoid valve. I Engine stopped
The solenoid valve cuts the vacuum signal so that I For 60 seconds after starting engine
the EVAP canister purge control valve remains (After warming up to normal operating tempera- PD
closed. ture)
FA
RA
BR
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ST
The EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve responds to sig- RS
nals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an OFF signal, the
vacuum signal (from the intake manifold to the EVAP canister
purge control valve) is cut. BT
When the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the vacuum signal
passes through the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve.
The signal then reaches the EVAP canister purge control valve. HA
SEF383RE
EVAP canister purge control valve EL

When the vacuum signal is cut by EVAP canister purge control
solenoid valve, EVAP canister purge control valve shuts off the IDX
EVAP purge line.
SEF343QB
EC-487
Control Valve/Solenoid Valve (Cont’d)
SEF850U

Idle OFF
PURG CONT S/V I Engine: After warming up
2,000 rpm ON

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC Voltage)
NO.

22 Y
Approximately 0V

Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
No.
P1493 I EVAP canister purge control valve does not operate I EVAP canister purge control valve
0312 properly (stuck open). I EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve
I Vacuum hoses for clogging or disconnection
I Water separator
I EVAP canister saturated with water
EC-488
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. GI
NOTE:
I If DTC P1492 is displayed with P1493, first perform
“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC P1492”. Refer to MA
EC-482.
SEF809X
EM
LC
perature.
SYSTEM” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- FE
SULT-II.
SEF811X
6) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and let it idle for at AT
least 90 seconds.
be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. Maintain the PD
Vehicle speed: 36 - 120 km/h (22 - 75 MPH) FA
Selector lever: Suitable position RA
from step 2).
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF- BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- EL
2) Select “MODE 1” with GST. IDX
3) Check coolant temperature.
Be sure that water temperature does not exceed 100°C.
If it becomes higher than 100°C, cool down the engine
and perform the procedure again from the beginning.
SEF519R
EC-489
onds.
Engine speed : 900 - 6,300 rpm
NOTE:
driving in steps 7.
the procedure.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage: 3.12 - 0.8V
Perform the following procedure before the voltage
drops below 0.8V. If the voltage drops below 0.8V, cool
down the engine and perform the entire procedure all
over again.
SEF639U
onds.
Engine speed : 1,000 - 2,100 rpm
Check voltage between ECM terminal q 67 and
ground: 3.12 - 0.8V
7) Stop the vehicle, turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least
5 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
NOTE:
driving in steps 6.
the procedure.
EC-490
INSPECTION START
GI
H
CHECK VACUUM SIGNAL. NG CHECK COMPONENTS
E
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to (EVAP canister purge con- MA
EVAP canister purge control trol solenoid valve).
valve and install vacuum gauge. Refer to “COMPONENTS
2. Start engine. INSPECTION” on next
SEF594U 3. Perform “PURG CONT S/V” in page. EM
“ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Select “ON” and “OFF” on CON- OK
SULT-II screen to turn on
“PURG CONT S/V”. LC
while revving engine up to 2,000
rpm.
ON: Vacuum should exist.
OFF: Vacuum should not
exist.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- H
FE
1. Start engine and warm it up to
normal operating temperature. Check vacuum hoses for
2. Stop engine. improper connection, clog-
SEF622U 3. Disconnect vacuum hose to ging or disconnection. AT
EVAP canister purge control Refer to Vacuum Hose
valve. Drawing”, EC-19.
4. Install vacuum gauge and start PD
engine.
rpm. FA
ON: Vacuum should exist.
OFF: Vacuum should not
exist.
RA
H
OK
E
vent control valve and/or BR
SEF765X Refer to “COMPONENTS INSPECTION”, water separator.
EC-493.
OK
ST
H
NG
RATED WITH WATER. and check the following. RS
1. Remove EVAP canister with vent con- 1. Check hose connections
trol valve attached. to the EVAP canister
2. Check if water drains from the EVAP and water separator for BT
the vent control valve attached. 2. Check water separator.
If the weight is: Refer to “COMPONENT HA
SEF596U Less than 1.8 kg (4.0 lb) → OK
OK EL
H
E
IDX
EC-493.
OK
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
EC-491
q
A
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace EVAP control sys-
1. Check disconnection of hose connected repair or replace harness
water soak.
SEF427U If OK, go to step 3.
sensor, refer to “COMPONENT
OK
H
NG
CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE. E
Repair EVAP purge line
Check EVAP purge line hoses for leak or hoses.
clogging.
Drawing”, EC-29.
OK
H
INSPECTION END
with CONSULT-II.
perature.
trol valve.
SEF765X
through the hose.
Condition Vacuum
Idle Not exist
2,000 rpm Exist
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SEF400W
between q A and q
B between q A and q
C

Yes No
between terminals
No supply No Yes

valve.
SEF313Q
EC-492
age. GI
out of port qC .
3. Apply vacuum to port q A . [Approximately −13.3 to −20.0 kPa MA
(−100 to −150 mmHg, −3.94 to −5.91 inHg)]
SEF809W EM
Check air passage continuity. LC
CONSULT-II.

FE
ON No
OFF Yes
SEC050C
AT
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PD
Condition
between qA and q B
FA
No
minals q1 and q 2
No supply Yes RA
blower or replace as necessary. BR
AEC783A If the portion qB is rusted, replace EVAP canister vent control
valve.
Make sure new O-ring is installed properly. ST
RS
BT
HA
Water separator EL
1. Check visually for insect’s nest in the water separator air inlet.
2. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the appearance. IDX
3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Check that qA and q C are not clogged by blowing air into qB with
qA , and then q
C plugged.
5. In case of NG in items 2 - 4, replace the parts.
NOTE:
SEF829T
EC-493
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch

When the gear position is in “P” or “N”, park/neutral position (PNP)
switch is “ON”. ECM detects the position because the continuity of
the line (the “ON” signal) exists.
The PNP switch assembly also includes a transmission range
switch to detect the selector lever position.
SEF146TA

Shift lever: “P” or “N” ON

P/N POSI SW I Ignition switch: ON
Except above OFF

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Approximately 0V
Gear position is “N” or “P”.
101 G/OR PNP switch
Approximately 5V
Except the above gear position

P1706 I The signal of the park/neutral position switch is not I Harness or connectors
1003 changed in the process of engine starting and driv- (The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ing. I Harness or connectors
(The park/neutral position relay circuit is open or
shorted.)
I PNP switch
I Park/neutral position relay
EC-494
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
NOTE: GI
the next test.
SEF281Y 2) Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with EM
CONSULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal
LC
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
“N” and “P” positions ON
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-497. FE

4) Start engine (TCS switch “OFF”) and warm it up to nor- AT
SEF212Y
secutive seconds. PD
CMPS-RPM (REF): 1,500 - 2,200 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL: 1.4 - 5.8 msec FA
6) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC RA
PROCEDURE”, EC-497
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK BR
SEF429U
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral
position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
ST
2) Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and body RS
ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage (V) (Known good data)

BT
“P” and “N” position Approx. 0
Except the above position Approx. 5
HA
EL
IDX
EC-495
TEC072M
EC-496
INSPECTION START
H
NG
GI
CHECK POWER SUPPLY. Check the following.
E
1. Disconnect PNP switch harness con- I 10A fuse
nector. I Harness for open or short MA
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. between PNP switch and
3. Check voltage between terminal q3 and fuse
SEF146TA ground with CONSULT-II or tester. If NG, repair harness or EM
Voltage: Battery voltage connectors.
OK
LC
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect park/neutral position relay E66 , M12
harness connector. I Harness connectors
3. Check harness continuity between relay M4 , B3 FE
terminal q1 and PNP switch terminals I Harness connectors
q7 ,q9 . (diodes) B10 , B11
SEF147T
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or short AT
If OK, check harness for short to ground between PNP switch and
and short to power. relay
OK
If NG, repair open circuit or PD
nectors. FA
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec- RA
E
1. Check harness continuity between relay tors.
terminals q
2 ,q7 and engine ground.
Continuity should exist. BR
SEF796W
OK ST
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II. NG Check the following.
E
RS
2. Check harness continuity between ECM E13 , F2
terminal 101 and relay terminal q 6 . I Harness for open or short
Continuity should exist. between ECM and relay
BT
If OK, check harness for short to ground If NG, repair open circuit or
HA
OK
SEF797W nectors.
H
EL
qA
(Go to next page.)
IDX
SEF814Q
EC-497
q
A
H
CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION NG Replace park/neutral posi-
E
RELAY. tion relay.
terminals q
1 and q 2 .
nals q
6 and q 7 .
SEF459U
Continuity exists.
No voltage applied:
No continuity
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace PNP switch.
E
(PNP switch).
Refer to AT section.
OK
H
SEF586T
H
INSPECTION END
EC-498
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ABS/TCS C/U SIGNAL
ABS/TCS Control Unit

The malfunction information related to ABS/TCS control unit is
transferred through the line (LAN) from ABS/TCS control unit to
ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not GI
only for ABS/TCS control unit but also for ECM after the ABS/
TCS related repair.
MA
SEF641T EM
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS control unit. The MIL will not light up for
ABS/TCS control unit. LC
Malfunction is detected when
—* I ECM receives incorrect voltage from ABS/TCS con- I Harness or connectors
0107 trol unit continuously. (The circuit between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit
FE
is open or shorted.)
I ABS/TCS control unit
AT
*: SAE J2012 number is not applicable
PD
PROCEDURE FA
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”. RA
BR
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ST
then turn “ON”. RS
4) If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to “DIAGNOSTIC BT
DTC erasing procedure for ABS/TCS related repair
Erase DTC code by following procedure: HA
1) Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then turn it “ON”.
2) Connect CONSULT-II and select “ABS”.
3) Insert UE990 card and install it. EL
4) Select “ABS” and touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
6) Touch “BACK” then erase malfunction code which has IDX
been stored in the TCM or ECM.
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, EC-502.
EC-499
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR ECM — ABS/TCS COMM NG
ABS/TCS Communication Line

This circuit line is used to control the smooth engine operation of
ABS/TCS during the TCS operation. Pulse signals are exchanged
between ECM and ABS/TCS control unit.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not
only in ABS/TCS control unit but also ECM after the ABS/TCS
related repair. Refer to BR section (Self-diagnosis for ABS/
TCS control unit, “HOW TO ERASE SELF DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS”).
Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for the ABS/TCS communication line. The MIL will not light
up for the ABS/TCS communication line.
Diagnostic
Check Items
(Possible Cause)
Code No.
—* I ECM receives incorrect voltage from ABS/TCS control I Harness or connectors
0404 unit continuously. (The communication line circuit between ECM and
ABS/TCS control unit is open or shorted.)
I ABS/TCS control unit
*: SAE J2012 number is not applicable.

PROCEDURE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
then turn “ON”.
EC-500
ABS/TCS Communication Line (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC073M
EC-501
ABS/TCS Communication Line (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector M50 , B101
and ABS/TCS control unit harness con- I Harness connectors
nector. F63 , M49
SEF047TD 3. Check harness continuity between ECM I Joint connector-6
16 . I Check harness for open
Continuity should exist. or short between ECM
If OK, check harness for short to and ABS/TCS control
ground and short to power. unit.
OK
nectors.
H
SEF641T
H
INSPECTION END
SEF444U
EC-502
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR OVERHEAT
Overheat
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Input/output signal line
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed GI
E

sensor
E ECM E Cooling fan relays MA
Air conditioner “ON” signal

Air conditioner switch
E
EM
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature and air condi- LC
tioner ON signal.
Operation
FE
AT
PD
SEF751W
FA
I The cooling fan operates at HIGH if diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine
coolant temperature sensor is “NG” or when the ECM fail-safe is activating.
I When A/C line pressure reaches the specified value, the triple-pressure switch turns on to operate cool-
RA
ing fans at low speed.
BR
ST
OFF
(201°F) or less
RS
I After warming up engine, idle the Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine. 95°C (203°F) and 104°C (219°F) at HIGH
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” vehicle speeds less than 80 km/h
BT
HIGH
(221°F) or more
HA
EL
IDX
EC-503
Overheat (Cont’d)
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)
34 LG Cooling fan relay-1 (High)
27 LG/R Cooling fan relay-2 (High) Engine is running.
0 - 1V
Cooling fan is operating.

Air conditioner switch: “OFF” OFF
I Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: “ON”
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
OFF
(201°F) or less
Engine coolant temperature is
I After warming up engine, idle the
between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C
COOLING FAN engine.
(219°F) at vehicle speed less than
I Air conditioner switch: “OFF” HIGH
20 km/h (12 MPH)
Engine coolant temperature is
105°C (221°F) or more

This diagnosis continuously monitors the engine coolant temperature.
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, the engine coolant temperature
will rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
Diagnostic trouble Check Items
code No. (Possible Cause)
OVERHEAT I Engine coolant reaches an abnormally high tempera- I Harness or connectors.
0208 ture. (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
I Cooling fan
I Radiator hose
I Radiator
I Radiator cap
I Water pump
I Thermostat
For more information, refer to “MAIN 12
CAUSES OF OVERHEATING”, (EC-513).
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the MA
section (“Changing Engine Coolant”, “ENGINE MAINTENANCE”). Also, replace the engine oil.
a. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute like pour-
ing coolant by kettle. Be sure to use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA section
(“Anti-freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio”, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”).
b. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
EC-504
Overheat (Cont’d)
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious GI
burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by MA
turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape.
Then turn the cap all the way off.
AEC640 1) Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. EM
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to “DIAG- LC
2) Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to “DIAG-
4) Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with FE
CONSULT-II.
SEF792X --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- OR --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- AT
3) Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness
connector.
4) Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature PD
sensor harness connector.
5) Start engine and make sure that cooling fan operates.
Be careful not to overheat engine. FA
RA
BR
SEF784T
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-505
Overheat (Cont’d)
TEC074M
EC-506
Overheat (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H GI
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERA- NG Check cooling fan motor-I
E
TION-I. speed control circuit.
1. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1 and -3. (Go to PROCEDURE A .) MA
3. Perform “COOLING FAN” in
SEF160T “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON- EM
SULT-II.
Cooling fans should operate.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR ------------------------------------------------------------------- LC
2. Disconnect engine coolant tem-
perature sensor harness connec-
tor.
3. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine
coolant temperature sensor har-
ness connector. FE
4. Start engine and wait at least 15
seconds.
SEF792X
5. Make sure that cooling fan AT
motors operate.
Be careful not to overheat
engine. PD
OK
H
qA FA
(Go to next page.)
RA
BR
SEF784T
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-507
Overheat (Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR OPERA- NG Check cooling fan motor-II
E
TION-II. control circuit.
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. (Go to PROCEDURE B .)
2. Reconnect cooling fan relay-1 and -3.
3. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2.
5. Perform “COOLING FAN” in
SEF792X SULT-II.
Cooling fans should operate.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Restart engine and wait at least
15 seconds.
5. Make sure that cooling fan
motors operate.
Be careful not to overheat
engine.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace triple-pressure
E
(Triple-pressure switch). switch.
Refer to HA section (“Electrical Compo-
SEF784T
nents Inspection”, “TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES”).
H
OK
q
B
(Go to EC-512.)
PROCEDURE A
INSPECTION START
H
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 10A fuse
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. I 40A fusible links
SEF160T 4. Check voltage between terminals q
1 ,q
5 , between cooling fan
q7 and ground with CONSULT-II or relay-2 and fuse
tester. I Harness for open or short
Voltage: Battery voltage between cooling fan
relay-2 and battery
OK
connectors.
H
qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF753W
EC-508
Overheat (Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
Repair harness or connec-
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness
connector. GI
relay terminals q3 ,q6 and cooling
fan motor terminal q1 .
Continuity should exist. MA
If OK, check harness for short.
fan motor terminal q4 and engine
SEF070T ground. EM
ground and short to power. LC
OK
H
NG
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM F2 , E13
terminal q
34 and relay-2 terminal q2 . I Harness for open or short
Continuity should exist. between cooling fan FE
If OK, check harness for short to ground relay-2 and ECM
and short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
short to ground or short to AT
SEF754W OK power in harness or con-
nectors.
H PD
NG
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY E
Check harness for open or
BETWEEN COOLING FAN RELAY-2 AND short between triple-pres-
GROUND. sure switch and relay-2 or
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. ground.
FA
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-2. If NG, repair open circuit or
3. Disconnect triple-pressure switch har- short to ground or short to
ness connector.
nectors.
RA
relay-2 terminal q2 and switch terminal
q2 , switch terminal q3 and engine
ground. BR
SEF755W
and short to power.
ST
OK
H
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace triple-pressure
(Triple-pressure switch). switch. RS
Refer to “Magnet Clutch Circuit” in HA sec-
tion.
H
OK BT
NG
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace cooling fan relay.
(Cooling fan relay-2).
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, HA
EC-514.
SEF805W
OK
H
NG EL
CHECK COMPONENT E
Replace cooling fan motors.
(Cooling fan motors).
EC-514. IDX
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
SEF757W
EC-509
Overheat (Cont’d)
PROCEDURE B
INSPECTION START
H
E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. I 40A fusible links
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1 and 3. I 10A fuse
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I Harness continuity
4. Check voltage between cooling fan between cooling fan
SEF160T relay-1 and -3 terminals q1 ,q
5 and relay-1 and -3 and fuse
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. I Harness continuity
Voltage: Battery voltage between cooling fan
relay-1 and -3 and battery
OK
connectors.
H
CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT. NG Repair harness or connec-
E
2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 and -2
harness connectors.
SEF407W relay-1 and -3 terminal q3 and cool-
ing fan motor-1 and -2 terminal q2 .
If OK, check harness for short.
relay-1, -3 terminal q6 and fan
motor-1 and -2 terminal q 3 .
relay -1, -3 terminal q7 and engine
ground.
SEF758W
OK
H
E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM F2 , E13
terminal q
27 and fan relay-1, -3 terminal I Harness for open or short
q2 . between cooling fan
Continuity should exist. relay-1, -3 and ECM
If OK, check harness for short to ground If NG, repair open circuit or
SEF070T power in harness or con-
OK
nectors.
H
qB
(Go to next page.)
SEF759W
EC-510
Overheat (Cont’d)
q
B
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace cooling fan relays.
E
(Cooling fan relay-1 and -3).
EC-514.
OK
H
MA
CHECK COMPONENTS NG Replace cooling fan motors.
E
(Cooling fan motors).
SEF761W Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, EM
EC-514.
OK LC
H
Disconnect and reconnect harness connec-
tors in the circuit. Then retest.
Trouble is not fixed.

H
Check ECM pin terminals for damage or FE
the connection of ECM harness connector.
Reconnect ECM harness connector and
retest.
SEF760W
AT
H
INSPECTION END PD
FA
RA
BR
SEF806W
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-511
Overheat (Cont’d)
q
B
H
CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK. NG Check the following for
E
Apply pressure to the cooling system with leak.
a tester, and check if the pressure drops. I Hose
Testing pressure: I Radiator
157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi) I Water pump
Pressure should not drop. Refer to LC section (“Water
CAUTION: Pump”).
Higher than the specified pressure may
cause radiator damage.
SLC754A
OK
H
CHECK RADIATOR CAP. NG Replace radiator cap.
E
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.
Radiator cap relief pressure:
Standard
98 - 118 kPa (1.0 - 1.2 kg/cm2, 14 -
17 psi)
Limit
59 - 118 kPa (0.6 - 1.2 kg/cm2, 9 - 17
psi)
OK
H
SLC755A NG
CHECK THERMOSTAT. Replace thermostat.
E
1. Check valve seating condition at normal
room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
2. Check valve opening temperature and
maximum valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
82°C (180°F) [standard]
Maximum valve lift:
More than 8.6 mm/95°C
(0.339 in/203°F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F)
below valve opening temperature.
For details, refer to LC section (“Thermo-
SLC343 stat”).
OK
H
Check engine coolant temperature sensor. NG Replace engine coolant
E
Refer to “COMPONENT INSPECTION”, temperature sensor.
EC-149.
OK
H
If the cause can not be isolated, go to
“MAIN 12 CAUSES OF
OVERHEATING”, EC-513.
H
INSPECTION END
Perform FINAL CHECK by the following procedure after repair

is completed.
1. Warn up engine. Run the vehicle for at least 20 minutes. Pay
attention to engine coolant temperature gauge on the instru-
ment panel. If the reading shows an abnormally high
temperature, another part may be malfunctioning.
2. Stop vehicle and let engine idle. Check the intake and exhaust
systems for leaks by listening for noise or visually inspecting
the components.
3. Allow engine to cool and visually check for oil and coolant
leaks. Then, perform “OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK”.
EC-512
Overheat (Cont’d)
MAIN 12 CAUSES OF OVERHEATING
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 I Blocked radiator I Visual No blocking —
I Blocked condenser
I Blocked radiator grille GI
I Blocked bumper
2 I Coolant mixture I Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRI- MA
CANTS” in MA section
3 I Coolant level I Visual Coolant up to MAX level See “Changing Engine
in reservoir tank and Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN- EM
radiator filler neck TENANCE” in MA section
4 I Radiator cap I Pressure tester 98 - 118 kPa See “System Check”
(1.0 - 1.2 kg/cm2, 14 - 17 “ENGINE COOLING SYS- LC
psi) TEM” in LC section
59 - 118 kPa
(0.6 - 1.2 kg/cm2, 9 - 17
psi) (Limit)
ON*2 5 I Coolant leaks I Visual No leaks See “System Check”
“ENGINE COOLING SYS-
TEM” in LC section
FE
ON*2 6 I Thermostat I Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See “Thermostat” and
lower radiator hoses “Radiator”, “ENGINE AT
COOLING SYSTEM” in
LC section
ON*1 7 I Cooling fan I CONSULT-II Operating See “TROUBLE DIAGNO- PD
SIS FOR OVERHEAT”
(EC-503)
OFF 8 I Combustion gas leak I Color checker Negative — FA
chemical tester
4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 I Coolant temperature I Visual Gauge less than 3/4 — RA
gauge when driving
I Coolant overflow to res- I Visual No overflow during driving See “Changing Engine
ervoir tank and idling Coolant”, “ENGINE MAIN- BR
TENANCE” in MA section
OFF*4 10 I Coolant return from res- I Visual Should be initial level in See “ENGINE MAINTE-
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank NANCE” in MA section ST
OFF 11 I Cylinder head I Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD” in EM sec-
tion RS
12 I Cylinder block and pis- I Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, “CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK” in EM sec-
tion
BT
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. HA
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS” in LC section.
EL
IDX
EC-513
Overheat (Cont’d)
Cooling fan relays-1 and -2, -3
Check continuity between terminals q
3 and q
5 ,q
6 and q
7 .
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals q
1
Yes
and q
2
No current supply No
SEC202B
Cooling fan motor

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation as shown in the figure.
Conditions Cooling fan motor

Cooling fan operates at high speed
terminal q
1 ,q2 and q 3 ,q4 (Ground)
SEF321T
If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
EC-514
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR NON-DETECTABLE ITEMS
Injector
LEFT BANK
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC075M
EC-515
Injector (Cont’d)
RIGHT BANK
TEC085M
EC-516
Injector (Cont’d)
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The GI
amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration.
Pulse duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The
ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel MA
needs.
SEC222B EM
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. LC
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINAL
COLOR
ITEM CONDITION
(DC voltage)
FE
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
1 R/B Injector No. 1 (11 - 14V)
AT
2 R/W Injector No. 8 PD

Idle speed
3 R/Y Injector No. 7 FA
14 R/L Injector No. 3

SEF388X
RA
...............................................................................................................
BATTERY VOLTAGE
4 W/R Injector No. 6 (11 - 14V) BR
5 PU/R Injector No. 5

Engine is running. ST
6 GY/L Injector No. 4
RS
7 L/G Injector No. 2
SEF526Y BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-517
Injector (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION. OK INSPECTION END
E
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in
SEF793X SULT-II.
speed drop.
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
sound.
heard.
NG
H
MEC703B CHECK POWER SUPPLY. NG Check the following.
E
2. Disconnect right bank injector sub-har- F63 , M49
ness connectors F22 and sub-harness I 15A fuse
connector F26 (on the right bank). I Check harness for open
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. or short between harness
4. Check voltage between terminal q 4 connector F22 , F26
(right bank), q
5 (left bank) and ground and ignition switch.
with CONSULT-II or tester. If NG, repair harness or
Voltage: Battery voltage connectors.
OK
H
SEF137T qA
(Go to next page.)
SEF138T
SEF322T
EC-518
Injector (Cont’d)
q
A
H
CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT. NG Check the following (Right
E
bank). GI
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. I Harness or connectors
3. Check harness continuity between the F26 , F106
following terminals and ECM terminals. If NG, repair open circuit or MA
Right bank: short to ground or short to
q1 and q 2 ,q 4 ,q6 ,q7 power in harness or con-
SEF808W
Left bank: nectors. EM
q3 and q 1 ,
q2 and q 14 ,
q1 and q 5 ,
LC
q6 and q 3
and short to power.
OK FE
H
CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT AND NG Repair harness or connec-
OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT (FOR LEFT
E
tors.
AT
BANK).
1. Remove intake manifold collector.
PD
(Refer to “TIMING CHAIN” in EM sec-
tion.)
2. Disconnect injector sub-harness con- FA
nector F101 .
minal q 5 and injector terminal q
2 . RA
ground and short to power. BR
SEF446U 4. Check harness continuity between
injector terminal q
1 and terminals q 3 ,
q2 ,q 1 ,q6 . ST
ground and short to power. RS
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace injector. BT
E
(Injector).
on next page. HA
SEF794T OK
H
EL
H
IDX
INSPECTION END
SEF795T
EC-519
Injector (Cont’d)
Injector
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 10 - 14Ω at 25°C (77°F)
If NG, replace injector.
SEF836Q
EC-520
Start Signal
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC076M
EC-521
Start Signal (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
H
E
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
SEF282Y IGN “ON” OFF
IGN “START” ON
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Turn ignition switch to “START”.
2. Check voltage between ECM
terminal q 80 and ground.
Voltage:
Ignition switch “START”
Battery voltage
Except above
Approximately 0V
NG
H
SEF449U
Check if 7.5A fuse is OK. NG Replace 7.5A fuse.
E
OK
H
E
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and F63 , M49
7.5A fuse. I Harness for open or short
3. Check harness continuity between ECM between ECM and fuse
terminal q80 and fuse block. block
Continuity should exist. If NG, repair open circuit or
If OK, check harness for short to ground short to ground or short to
and short to power. power in harness or con-
SEF450U nectors.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-522
Fuel Pump Control

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

E
GI
ECM E Fuel pump relay

E MA
Fuel pump ON-OFF control EM

The ECM activates the fuel pump for several sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned ON to
improve engine start-up. If the ECM receives a 1° LC
signal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to
activate. If the 1° signal is not received when the
ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM
stops pump operation and prevents the battery from
discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM
FE
does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the
ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the AT
fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation

PD
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 5 seconds
Engine is running and cranking Operates
FA
When engine is stopped Stops for 1.5 seconds
Except as shown above Stops
RA
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE BR

ST
I Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second)
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY I Engine running and cranking
Except as shown above OFF RS

BT
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the HA
TER-
MINAL
WIRE
ITEM CONDITION
DATA EL
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Ignition switch “ON” IDX

For 5 seconds after turning ignition switch 0 - 1V
“ON”
11 PU Fuel pump relay Engine is running.
Ignition switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE

5 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” (11 - 14V)
EC-523
Fuel Pump Control (Cont’d)
TEC077M
EC-524
INSPECTION START
H
GI
E
2. Pinch fuel feed hose with fingers.
MA
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt
on the fuel feed hose for 5 seconds
SEF327T after ignition switch is turned “ON”. EM
NG
LC
H
E
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay. F63 , M49
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. I 15A fuse
1 ,q
4. Check voltage between terminals q 3 I Harness continuity
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. between fuel pump relay FE
Voltage: Battery voltage and ignition switch
OK connectors. AT
SEF617T
H
NG Check the following.
PD
E
2. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector B3 , M4
and dropping resistor harness connector. I Harness connectors
FA
3. Check harness continuity between relay M49 , F63
terminal q5 and terminal q 1 , FPCM ter- I Harness connectors
minal q3 and terminal q 1 , terminal q
2 B111 , B26 RA
and body ground. I Joint connector-17
Continuity should exist. I Harness for open or short
If OK, check harness for short to power. between fuel pump relay BR
SEF328T and fuel pump
OK I Harness for open or short
between fuel pump and
dropping resistor
ST
between dropping resistor
and body ground RS
or connectors. BT
H
q
A
HA
SEF067T
EL
IDX
SEF330T
EC-525
q
A
H
E
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. tor.
terminal q
and short to power.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump relay.
E
(Fuel pump relay).
below.
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENT NG Replace fuel pump.
E
(Fuel pump).
below.
OK
H
SEF329T INTERMITTENT INCIDENT”, EC-117.
H
INSPECTION END
SEF628U
Fuel pump relay
Check continuity between terminals q
3 and q
5 .
Yes
between terminals q 1 and q
2
No current supply No
If NG, replace relay.

SEF090M
Fuel pump
1. Disconnect fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals q 1 and q
3 .
If NG, replace fuel pump.
SEF161T
EC-526
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC078M
EC-527
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch (Cont’d)
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power
steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-FICD solenoid valve to increase the idle
speed and adjust for the increased load.
SEF071T

Steering wheel in neutral position

I Engine: After warming up, idle the OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
engine
The steering wheel is turned ON

CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
COLOR (DC voltage)
NO.
Engine is running.
0 - 1.5V
Power steering oil pres- Steering wheel is being turned.
100 G
sure switch Engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE
Steering wheel is not being turned. (11 - 14V)
EC-528
INSPECTION START
H GI
E
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in MA
“DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
Steering is neutral position: OFF
SEF757X Steering is turned: ON EM
------------------------------------------------------------------- OR -------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between ECM
terminal 100 and ground under
LC
the following conditions.
Voltage:
When steering wheel is
turned quickly.
Approximately 0V
Except above
Battery voltage FE
NG
SEF451U H AT
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-I. E Check the following.
2. Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve F63 , M49 PD
harness connector. I 10A fuse
1 short between IACV-
and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. FICD solenoid valve and
FA
Voltage: Battery voltage fuse
OK RA
H
NG
CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II. E Repair harness or connec-
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. tors. BR
SEF166T 2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure
switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage terminal q1 (or ECM ST
terminal 100 and ground.
H OK
RS
qA
(Go to next page.)
BT
HA
SEF663P
EL
IDX
SEF452U
EC-529
q
A
H
E
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure E101 , E21
switch harness connector. I Harness for open or short
3. Check harness continuity between ter- between power steering
minal q2 and engine ground. pressure switch and
Continuity should exist. ground
SEF163T
If OK, check harness for short to power. If NG, repair open circuit or
OK
or connectors.
H
E
terminal 100 and terminal q 1 .
and short to power.
SEF453U
OK
H
CHECK COMPONENTS NG Replace power steering oil
E
(Power steering oil pressure switch and pressure switch or IACV-
IACV-FICD solenoid valve). FICD solenoid valve.
next page.
OK
H
H
INSPECTION END
EC-530
Power steering oil pressure switch
1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness con-
nector then start engine.
2. Check continuity between terminals q
1 and q 2 . GI
MA
Steering wheel is being turned Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned No
SEF165T EM
If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch.
LC
FE
AT
IACV-FICD solenoid valve
Disconnect IACV-FICD solenoid valve harness connector.
PD
I Check for clicking sound when applying 12V direct current to
terminals. FA
RA
BR
SEF658Q
I Check plunger for seizing or sticking. ST

I Check for broken spring.
RS
BT
HA
SEF097K
EL
IDX
EC-531
Electrical Load Signal
TEC794
EC-532
Electrical Load Signal (Cont’d)
INSPECTION START
GI
H
OK
CHECK THE OVERALL FUNCTION. E INSPECTION END
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. MA
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal
SEF454U q
72 , q
79 and ground in the following con- EM
ditions.
ECM LC
Conditions terminal Voltage (V)
No.
Rear window defogger

q
79
switch “ON”*1
Battery volt-
Headlamp “ON” at 2nd age
position with low q
72 FE
beam*2
Except the above*1 0
SEF455U
AT
NG(*1) NG(*2)
H
q
A PD
(Go to next page.)
H
CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
NG
Refer to EL section (RR
FA
E
FUNCTION. window defogger).
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the rear defogger switch. RA
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear
windshield heated up?
OK BR
H
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
NG
ST
E
RR/DEF. I Harness connectors
Check harness continuity between ECM F63 , M49
terminal q
79 and terminal q5 . I Joint connector-10 RS
Continuity should exist. M60
If OK, check harness for short to ground I Harness connectors
and short to power. M4 , B3
BT
OK short to ground or short to
nectors. HA
H
Perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR EL
H
IDX
INSPECTION END
EC-533
Electrical Load Signal (Cont’d)
q
A
H
NG
CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION. E Refer to EL section
1. Start engine. (HEADLAMP).
2. Turn the headlamp switch “ON” (2nd
position with low beam).
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK
H
NG
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR E Check the following.
HEADLAMP. I Harness connectors
Check harness continuity between ECM F1 , E14
72 and terminal q
terminal q 6 (HEADLAMP If NG, repair open circuit or
RELAY), or q 7 (HID RELAY). short to ground or short to
Continuity should exist. power in harness or con-
If OK, check harness for short to ground nectors.
and short to power.
OK
H
SEF807W
H
INSPECTION END
EC-534
MIL & Data Link Connectors
GI
MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
TEC080M
EC-535
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
PRESSURE REGULATOR
Fuel pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Approximately
At idle
235 (2.4, 34)
A few seconds after ignition Approximately
switch is turned OFF to ON 294 (3.0, 43)
Inspection and Adjustment
Target idle speed*1 rpm

HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER
(FRONT)
650±50
No-load*3
(in “P” or “N” position) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 2.3 - 4.3
Base idle speed*2 rpm
600±50 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

No-load*3
(in “P” or “N” position) (REAR)
Air conditioner: ON Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 2.3 - 4.3
More than 700 rpm
(in “N” position)
Ignition timing 15°±2° BTDC

FUEL PUMP
*1: TPS harness connector connected.
*2: Using CONSULT-II “WORK SUPPORT” or TPS harness connector Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.2 - 5.0
disconnected.
*3: Under the following conditions:
I Air conditioner switch: OFF
I Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater, fan & rear defogger) IACV-AAC VALVE (Step motor type)
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω Approximately 30
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

INJECTOR
Supply voltage V Battery voltage (11 - 14)
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 10 - 14
1.0 - 1.7 at idle*
Output voltage V
Approximately 2.1 at 2,500
Mass air flow

3.0 - 6.0 at idle*
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
(Using CONSULT-II or GST)
12.9 - 25.3 at 2,500 rpm* Accelerator pedal conditions Voltage*
g⋅m/sec
*: Engine is warmed up sufficiently and idling under no-load. Completely released (a) 0.15 - 0.85
Partially released Between (a) and (b)
Completely depressed (b) 3.5 - 4.7

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR *: Measured with vacuum applied to the throttle opener using a
vacuum pump.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance (kΩ)
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 CALCULATED LOAD VALUE

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 Calculated load value %
(Using CONSULT-II or GST)
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
At idle 13.0 - 32
At 2,500 rpm 13.0 - 25.5

EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
EGR temperature Voltage Resistance INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
°C (°F) (V) (MΩ)
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance
0 (32) 4.61 0.68 - 1.11
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ
50 (122) 2.53 0.09 - 0.12
80 (176) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
100 (212) 0.87 0.017 - 0.024
EC-536
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Inspection and Adjustment (Cont’d)
DROPPING RESISTOR CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (OBD)
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω Approximately 0.8 Resistance Ω 166.5 - 203.5 [at 25°C (77°F)]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL GI

CONTROL VALVE POSITION SENSOR
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 35 - 43 Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 600 - 740 MA
EM
LC
FE
AT
PD
FA
RA
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
EL
IDX
EC-537
NOTES

(NISSAN) Manual de Taller Nissan Note

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(NISSAN) Manual de Taller Nissan Note

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX.........................4 Idle Speed/Ignition Timing/Idle Mixture Ratio

When you read wiring diagrams:

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

*COOLAN T SEN/CIRC P0125 0908 EC-161 FPCM/CIRCUIT P1220 1305 EC-393

ECM-ABSTCS COMM IACV/AAC VLV/CIRC P0505 0205 EC-340

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC P1760 1203 AT-143

OVER HEAT — 0208 EC-503

PNP SW/CIRC P0705 1101 AT-81 LC

PURG CONT/V S/V P1492 0807 EC-481

SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 P0750 1108 AT-129

TACM SW SIGNALS P1210 0106 EC-390

TANDEM TP SEN/CIRC P1125 0110 EC-381

THRTL POS SEN/

TW CATALYST SYS-B1 P0420 0702 EC-295

TW CATALYST SYS-B2 P0430 0703 EC-295 BR

VC CUT/V BYPASS/V P1491 0311 EC-475 ST

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 P0720 1102 AT-89

VENT CONTROL VALVE P1446 0215 EC-452 BT

VENT CONTROL VALVE P0446 0903 EC-315 HA

DTC*6 Items DTC*6 Items

ECM-ABSTCS COMM P0301 0608 CYL 1 MISFIRE EC-262

THRTL POS SEN/ P0340 0101 CAM POS SEN/CIR EC-275

P0139 0707 HO2S2 (B1) EC-226 VEH SPEED SEN/

P0755 1201 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-133

P1105 1302 MAP/BAR SW SOL/CIR EC-358

P1120 0406 TP SEN2/CIRCUIT EC-375 MA

P1135 1301 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 EC-367 EM

P1145 1304 INTK TIM S/CIRC-B2 EC-382

P1168 0308 CLOSED LOOP-B2 EC-388

P1220 1305 FPCM/CIRCUIT EC-393

P1320 0201 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-399 FE

P1400 1005 EGRC SOLENOID/V EC-412 AT

P1402 0514 EGR SYSTEM EC-423

EVAP PURG FLOW/

P1490 0801 VC/V BYPASS/V EC-470 BR

P1492 0807 PURG CONT/V S/V EC-481 ST

P1605 0804 A/T DIAG COMM LINE EC-352

P1706 1003 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-494

P1760 1203 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-143

Special Service Tool

Commercial Service Tools

Hose clipper Clamping the EVAP purge hose between the

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

Engine Fuel & Emission Control System

I When connecting ECM harness connector, tighten secur-

I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

I Before replacing ECM, perform ECM input/output signal

I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

I Regarding model Y33, “B1” indicates the left bank and

Engine Control Component Parts Location

Vacuum Hose Drawing

Refer to “System Diagram”, EC-16, for vacuum control system.

Engine coolant temperature sensor E

Heated oxygen sensors 1 (front) E

Idle air control system E IACV-AAC valve

Throttle position sensor E Intake valve timing control

Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch (TCM) E

Fuel pump relay and

Air conditioner switch E

I EVAP canister purge volume

DTC6 Items DTC6 Items

1 EC-50 2 EC-54 *3 EC-55